GE Fanuc AutomationGE Fanuc Automation Computer Numerical Control Products Series 15i / 150i―Model...

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 15i / 150i―Model A

Parameter Manual

GFZ-63330EN/03 October 2000

GFL-001

Warnings, Cautions, and Notesas Used in this Publication

WarningWarning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or maybe associated with its use.

In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, aWarning notice is used.

CautionCaution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

NoteNotes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding andoperating the equipment.

This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While effortshave been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover alldetails or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency inconnection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein whichare not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes noobligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutorywith respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, orusefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness forpurpose shall apply.

©Copyright 2000 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.

B-63320EN/03 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

s - 1

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine.Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also,supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughlybefore attempting to use the machine.

WARNING

Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a damage of both the userbeing injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION

Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approvedprocedure is not observed.

NOTE

The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning andCaution.

- Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

B-63320EN/03 PREFACE

p - 1

PREFACE

Applicable product nameThe models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are:

Product name AbbreviationsFANUC Series 15i -MA 15i -MA Series 15i

FANUC Series 150i -MA 150i -MA Series 150i

NOTESome functions described in this manual may not beapplied to some products. For detail, refer to theDESCRIPTIONS manual (B-63322EN).

Related manualsThe table below lists manuals related to MODEL A of Series 15i, andSeries 150i. In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk (*).

Table 1 (a) Related Manuals

Manual nameSpecification

number

DESCRIPTIONS B-63322ENDESCRIPTIONS (Supplement for Remote Buffer) B-63322EN-1CONNECTION MANUAL (Hardware) B-63323ENCONNECTION MANUAL (Function) B-63323EN-1PROGRAMMING MANUAL(Macro Compiler/Macro Executor)

B-63323EN-2

OPERATOR’S MANUAL (PROGRAMMING) B-63324ENOPERATOR’S MANUAL (OPERATION) B-63324EN-1MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-63325ENPARAMETER MANUAL B-63330EN *

B-63330EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS

c - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE................................ s-1

PREFACE.................................................................................................. p-1

1 DISPLAYING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERRORCOMPENSATION DATA........................................................................11.1 DISPLAYING PARAMETERS........................................................................2

1.2 DISPLAYING PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA ...............................5

2 SETTING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERRORCOMPENSATION DATA........................................................................72.1 SETTING PARAMETERS..............................................................................8

2.2 SETTING PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA...................................10

3 INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS USINGEXTERNAL INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES...............................................123.1 INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS ON THE

PARAMETER SCREEN...............................................................................13

3.2 INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS ON THE FLOPPY

DIRECTORY SCREEN................................................................................16

3.3 INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS ON THE MEMORY

CARD SCREEN...........................................................................................18

3.4 INPUT/OUTPUT FORMATS........................................................................20

3.4.1 Input/Output Formats for Parameters .................................................................... 20

3.4.2 Input/Output Format for Pitch Error Compensation Data ..................................... 26

4 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS......................................................274.1 DATA TYPES ..............................................................................................27

4.2 REPRESENTATION OF PARAMETERS ....................................................28

4.3 STANDARD PARAMETER SETTING TABLES ..........................................29

4.4 SETTING PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 0000 AND LATER) .........................31

4.5 TIMER PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 0100 AND LATER)..............................40

4.6 AXIS CONTROL PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1000 AND LATER) ..............43

4.7 CHOPPING PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1181 AND LATER)......................66

4.8 COORDINATE SYSTEM PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1200 AND LATER) .69

4.9 FEEDRATE PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1400 AND LATER)......................74

TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63330EN/03

c - 2

4.10 ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL PARAMETERS

(DATA NO. 1600 AND LATER) ...................................................................99

4.11 SERVO PARAMETER

(DATA NO. 1700 TO 1999 AND 2600 AND LATER).................................111

4.12 DI/DO PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 2000 AND LATER).............................137

4.13 DISPLAY/MDI AND EDIT PARAMETERS

(DATA NO. 2200 AND LATER) .................................................................151

4.14 PROGRAM PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 2400 AND LATER) ....................169

4.15 SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT AND CS CONTOUR CONTROL

FUNCTION PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 3000 AND LATER) ....................180

4.16 SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT AND CS CONTOUR CONTROL

FUNCTION PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 3000 AND LATER) ....................181

4.17 DRAWING PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 4820 AND LATER) .....................192

4.18 DATA I/O PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 5000 AND LATER) .......................195

4.19 STROKE LIMIT PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 5200 AND LATER)..............203

4.20 PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION PARAMETERS

(DATA NO. 5420 AND LATER) .................................................................211

4.21 SPINDLE CONTROL PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 5602 AND LATER).....226

4.22 TOOL COMPENSATION PARAMETERS

(DATA NO. 6000 AND LATER) .................................................................267

4.23 CANNED CYCLE PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 6200 AND LATER)...........293

4.24 SCALING AND COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION PARAMETERS

(DATA NO. 6400 AND LATER) .................................................................298

4.25 CUSTOM MACRO PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 7000 AND LATER).........303

4.26 PROGRAM RESTART, BLOCK RESTART, AND TOOL RETRACTION

AND RETURN PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 7110 AND LATER) ...............317

4.27 SKIP FUNCTION PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 7200 AND LATER) ...........318

4.28 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT PARAMETERS

(DATA NO. 7400 AND LATER) .................................................................327

4.29 FIVE-AXIS CONTROL FUNCTION PARAMETERS

(DATA NO. 7514 AND LATER) .................................................................332

4.30 OTHER PARAMETERS.............................................................................341

4.31 SERVICE PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 8000 AND LATER) .......................370

4.32 MACRO EXECUTOR PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 8500 AND LATER).....371

B-63330EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS

c - 3

��

A CHARACTER CODE LIST .................................................................375

B LIST OF COMPATIBLE PARAMETERS FOR SERIES 15-MB..........376

B-63330EN/03 1.DISPLAYING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA

- 1 -

1 DISPLAYING PARAMETERS AND PITCHERROR COMPENSATION DATA

This chapter explains how to display parameters and pitch errorcompensation data.

1.DISPLAYING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA B-63330EN/03

- 2 -

1.1 DISPLAYING PARAMETERS

The Parameter screen displays the values specified for CNCparameters.

Parameter screen

Displaying the Parameter screenFollow either of the procedures described below to display theParameter screen.

Method 1Press the <SYSTEM> function key several times, until theParameter screen appears.

Method 2 (1) Press the <SYSTEM> function key.

(2) Click the [PARAMETER] soft key.

Fig. 1.1 (a) Parameter Screen


- 3 -

Displaying specified parametersThe Parameter screen consists of multiple pages.Follow one of the procedures described below to display the specifiedparameter.

Method 1Using the <PAGE ↑> <PAGE ↓> page keys, and the <↑> <↓><←> <→> cursor keys, move the cursor to display the desiredparameter.

Method 2 (1) Click the [NO. SEARCH] soft key.(2) Key in the number of the parameter to be displayed.(3) Click the [EXEC] soft key.

Method 3 (1) Key in the number of the parameter to be displayed.(2) Click the [NO. SEARCH] soft key.

Select Group screen

The Select Group screen can be used to display a selected group ofparameters.

Displaying the Select Group screenOn the Parameter screen, select the [SELECTGROUP] soft key.

Fig. 1.1 (b) Select Group Screen


- 4 -

Selecting a groupMove the cursor to the group to be displayed.

Method 1Use the <↑> <↓> <←> <→> cursor keys, move the cursor.

Method 2 (1) Click the [NO. SEARCH] soft key.(2) Key in the number of the group to be displayed.(3) Click the [EXEC] soft key.

Method 3 (1) Key in the number of the group to be displayed.(2) Click the [NO. SEARCH] soft key.

Ending group selectionClick the [SELECTEND] soft key to exit from the Select Groupscreen and return to the Parameter screen. The selected group ofparameters is displayed, starting with the first parameter.


- 5 -

1.2 DISPLAYING PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA

The Pitch Error Compensation screen displays the values specified forpitch error compensation data.

Pitch Error Compensation screen

Displaying the Pitch Error Compensation screenFollow either of the procedures described below to display the PitchError Compensation screen.

Method 1Press the <SYSTEM> function key several times, until the PitchError Compensation screen appears.

Method 2(1) Press the <SYSTEM> function key.

(2) Click the [PITCH ERROR] soft key.

Fig. 1.2 (a) Pitch Error Compensation Screen


- 6 -

Displaying specified pitch error compensation data

The Pitch Error Compensation screen consists of multiple pages.Follow one of the procedures described below to display specifiedpitch error compensation data.

Method 1Using the <PAGE ↑> <PAGE ↓> page keys, and the <↑> <↓><←> <→> cursor keys, move the cursor to display the desiredpitch error compensation data.

Method 2 (1) Click the [NO. SEARCH] soft key.(2) Key in the number of the pitch error compensation data to be

displayed.(3) Click the [EXEC] soft key.

Method 3 (1) Key in the number of the pitch error compensation data to

be displayed.(2) Click the [NO. SEARCH] soft key.

B-63330EN/03 2.SETTING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA

- 7 -

2 SETTING PARAMETERS AND PITCHERROR COMPENSATION DATA

This chapter explains how to set parameters and pitch errorcompensation data from the MDI.

2.SETTING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA B-63330EN/03

- 8 -

2.1 SETTING PARAMETERS

The Parameter screen is used to set parameters from the MDI.For an explanation of how to display the Parameter screen, seeSection 1.1, "Displaying Parameters."

Procedure for setting parameters

- Entering the modeEnter MDI mode. Alternatively, press the emergency stop button toenter the emergency stop status.

- Setting parameter PWEOn the Setting Parameter screen, set bit 0 of the setting/input-enabledparameter PWE (No. 8000) to 1.For the setting procedure, refer to Section II-9.3, "Displaying andSetting Setting Parameters" in the "FANUC Series 15i/150i-MAOPERATOR’S MANUAL (Operation)."

- Moving the cursorMove the cursor to the parameter to be set.

Method 1Using the <PAGE ↑> <PAGE ↓> page keys, and the <↑> <↓><←> <→> cursor keys, to move the cursor.

Method 2(1) Click the [NO. SEARCH] soft key.(2) Key in the parameter number.(3) Click the [EXEC] soft key.

Method 3(1) Key in the parameter number.(2) Click the [NO. SEARCH] soft key.

- Entering a setting (absolute input)Method 1

(1) Click the [INPUT] soft key.(2) Key in the desired setting.(3) Click the [EXEC] soft key.

Method 2(1) Key in the desired setting.(2) Click the [INPUT] soft key.

Method 3(1) Key in the desired setting.(2) Click the [INPUT] soft key.


- 9 -

- Entering a setting (incremental input)Method 1

(1) Click the [+INPUT] soft key.(2) Key in the value to be added to the current setting.(3) Click the [EXEC] soft key.

Method 2(1) Key in the value to be added to the current setting.(2) Click the [+INPUT] soft key.

NOTEFor bit/bit axis/bit spindle type parameters,incremental input is not possible. Even if the[+INPUT] soft key is clicked, absolute input isassumed.

- Bit ON:1By clicking the [ON:1] soft key, the bit of a bit/bit axis/bit spindletype parameter on which the cursor is displayed is set to 1.If the cursor is displayed on all bits, all the bits are set to 1.

- Bit OFF:0By clicking the [OFF:0] soft key, the bit of a bit/bit axis/bit spindletype parameter on which the cursor is displayed is set to 0.If the cursor is displayed on all bits, all the bits are set to 0.

- Ending the settingWhen parameters have been set, set bit 0 of the setting/input-enabledparameter PWE (No. 8000) to 0.

NOTEThe blank bits in the parameter list (Chapter 4,"DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS") and theparameters displayed on the Parameter screen butnot shown on the list are either reserved for futureexpansion or used internally in the CNC. Do notchange the values of these parameter bits.

2.SETTING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA B-63330EN/03

- 10 -

2.2 SETTING PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA

For an explanation of how to display the Pitch Error Compensationscreen, see Section 1.2, "Displaying Pitch Error Compensation Data."The Pitch Error Compensation screen is used to set pitch errorcompensation data.

Procedure for setting pitch error compensation data

- Entering the modeEnter MDI mode. Alternatively, press the emergency stop button toenter the emergency stop status.

- Setting parameter PWEOn the Setting Parameter screen, set bit 0 of the setting/input-enabledparameter PWE (No. 8000) to 1.For the setting procedure, refer to Section II-9.3, "Displaying andSetting Setting Parameters" in the "FANUC Series 15i/150i-MAOPERATOR’S MANUAL (Operation)."

- Moving the cursorMove the cursor to the pitch error compensation data to be set.

Method 1Using the <PAGE ↑> <PAGE ↓> page keys, and the <↑> <↓><←> <→> cursor keys, to move the cursor.

Method 2(1) Click the [NO. SEARCH] soft key.(2) Key in the pitch error compensation data number.(3) Click the [EXEC] soft key.

Method 3(1) Key in the pitch error compensation data number.(2) Click the [NO. SEARCH] soft key.

- Entering a setting (absolute input)Method 1

(1) Click the [INPUT] soft key.(2) Key in the desired setting.(3) Click the [EXEC] soft key.

Method 2(1) Key in the desired setting.(2) Click the [INPUT] soft key. B

Method 3(1) Key in the desired setting.(2) Click the [INPUT] soft key. B


- 11 -

- Entering a setting (incremental input)Method 1

(1) Click the [+INPUT] soft key.(2) Key in the value to be added to the current setting.(3) Click the [EXEC] soft key.

Method 2(1) Key in the value to be added to the current setting.(2) Click the [+INPUT] soft key.

3.INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS USING EXTERNAL INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES B-63330EN/03

- 12 -

3 INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTINGPARAMETERS USING EXTERNALINPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES

This chapter explains the procedures for inputting and outputtingparameters using the input/output device connected to thereader/punch interface or using a memory card, as well asinput/output formats.

B-63330EN/03 3.INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS USING EXTERNAL INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES

- 13 -

3.1 INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS ON THEPARAMETER SCREEN

This section explains the procedures for inputting and outputtingparameters on the Parameter screen.Before parameters can be input and output, the parameters related tothe input/output device must be set.

Displaying the Parameter screenFollow either of the procedures described below to display the

Parameter screen.Method 1

Press the <SYSTEM> function key several times, until theParameter screen appears.

Method 2(1) Press the <SYSTEM> function key.(2) Click the [PARAMETER] soft key.

Outputting parametersMethod 1 (neither the output file name nor number need be specified)

(1) Enter MDI mode.(2) Click the [PUNCH] soft key.(3) Click the [PARAMETER] soft key.

Method 2 (the output file name is specified)(1) Enter MDI mode.(2) Click the [PUNCH] soft key.(3) Click the ["FILE NAME] soft key.(4) Key in the file name.(5) Click the [FILE NAME"] soft key.(6) Click the [PARAMETER] soft key.

Method 3 (the file number is specified, one of three methods)(1) Enter MDI mode.(2) Click the [PUNCH] soft key.(3) Click the [(FILE#)] soft key.(4) Key in the file number.(5) Click the [PARAMETER] soft key.

Method 4 (the file number is specified, one of three methods)(1) Enter MDI mode.(2) Click the [PUNCH] soft key.(3) Click the <N> address key.(4) Key in the file number.(5) Click the [PARAMETER] soft key.

Method 5 (the file number is specified, one of three methods)(1) Enter MDI mode.(2) Click the <N> address key.(3) Key in the file number.(4) Click the [PUNCH] soft key. B


- 14 -

Inputting parametersMethod 1 (neither the input file name nor number need be specified)

(1) Enter MDI mode.(2) Enter the emergency stop status.(3) Click the [READ] soft key.(4) Click the [PARAMETER] soft key.

Method 2 (the input file is specified with its file name)(1) Enter MDI mode.(2) Enter the emergency stop status.(3) Click the [READ] soft key.(4) Click the ["FILE NAME] soft key.(5) Key in the file name.(6) Click the [FILE NAME"] soft key.(7) Click the [PARAMETER] soft key.

Method 3 (the input file is specified with its file number, one of threemethods)(1) Enter MDI mode.(2) Enter the emergency stop status.(3) Click the [READ] soft key.(4) Click the [(FILE#)] soft key.(5) Key in the file number.(6) Click the [PARAMETER] soft key.

Method 4 (the input file is specified with its file number, one of threemethods)(1) Enter MDI mode.(2) Enter the emergency stop status.(3) Click the [READ] soft key.(4) Click the <N> address key.(5) Key in the file number.(6) Click the [PARAMETER] soft key.

Method 5 (the input file is specified with its file number, one of threemethods)(1) Enter MDI mode.(2) Enter the emergency stop status.(3) Click the <N> address key.(4) Key in the file number.(5) Click the [READ] soft key.


- 15 -

NOTE1 When outputting and inputting parameters to and

from a FANUC Floppy Cassette, FANUC FA Card,and FANUC Handy File, you can specify theinput/output file with its file name or number.

2 When outputting and inputting parameters to andfrom a memory card, you can specify theinput/output file with its file name.

3 When method 1 (in which neither the output filename nor number need be specified), described in"Outputting parameters," is used to outputparameters to a FANUC Floppy Cassette, FANUCFA Card, FANUC Handy File, and memory card,the file name will be CNC-PARA.TXT.


- 16 -

3.2 INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS ON THEFLOPPY DIRECTORY SCREEN

This section explains the procedures for inputting and outputtingparameters on the Floppy Directory screen, using the FANUC FloppyCassette, FANUC FA Card, FANUC Handy File, or FANUCPROGRAM FILE Mate connected to the serial interface (RS-232-Cor RS-422).Before parameters can be input and output, the parameters related tothe input/output device must be set.

Displaying the Floppy Directory screenFollow either of the procedures described below to display the FloppyDirectory screen.Method 1

Press the <OFFSET/SETTING> function key several times, untilthe Floppy Directory screen appears.

Method 2(1) Press the <OFFSET/SETTING> function key.(2) Click the [RS232C] soft key.

Outputting parameters(1) Click the [DATA SELECT] soft key.(2) Click the [PARAMETER] soft key.

"PARAMETER" appears in IN/OUT DATA.(3) Follow either of the procedures described below to set the output

file nameMethod 1 (the file name is entered using MDI keys)(1) Click the [NAME INPUT] soft key.(2) Click the ["FILE NAME] soft key.(3) Enter the file name with MDI keys.(4) Click the [FILE NAME"] soft key.(5) Click the [EXEC] soft key.

Method 2 (the file name is selected from a file list)(1) Click the [DIR. VIEW] soft key.

A list of files contained in the input/output device isdisplayed. If the list cannot be displayed on a single page,"Prev Page" and "Next Page" are displayed in PAGESELECT to indicate that there are multiple pages.Press the <PAGE ↑> <PAGE ↓> key to display thespecified page.

(2) Move the cursor to the desired output file name.(3) Click the [NAME GET] soft key.(4) Enter MDI mode.(5) Click the [DATA PUNCH] soft key.(6) Click the [EXEC] soft key.


- 17 -

Inputting parameters(1) Click the [DATA SELECT] soft key.(2) Click the [PARAMETER] soft key.

"PARAMETER" appears in IN/OUT DATA.(3) Click the [DIR. VIEW] soft key.

A list of files contained in the input/output device is displayed. Ifthe list cannot be displayed on a single page, "Prev Page" and"Next Page" are displayed in PAGE SELECT to indicate thatthere are multiple pages.Press the <PAGE ↑> <PAGE ↓> key to display the specifiedpage.

(4) Move the cursor to the desired input file name.(5) Enter MDI mode.(6) Enter the emergency stop status.(7) Click the [DATA READ] soft key.(8) Click the [EXEC] soft key.


- 18 -

3.3 INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS ON THEMEMORY CARD SCREEN

This section explains the procedures for inputting and outputtingparameters on the Memory Card screen.Before parameters can be input and output, the parameters related tothe input/output device must be set.

Displaying the Memory Card screenFollow either of the procedures described below to display theMemory Card screen.Method 1

Press the <OFFSET/SETTING> function key several times, untilthe Memory Card screen appears.

Method 2(1) Press the <OFFSET/SETTING> function key.(2) Click the [MEMCARD] soft key.

Outputting parameters(1) Click the [DATA SELECT] soft key.(2) Click the [PARAMETER] soft key.

"PARAMETER" appears in IN/OUT DATA.(3) Follow either of the procedures described below to set the output

file name.Method 1 (the file name is entered using MDI keys)

(1) Click the [NAME INPUT] soft key.(2) Click the ["FILE NAME] soft key.(3) Enter the file name with MDI keys.(4) Click the [FILE NAME"] soft key.(5) Click the [EXEC] soft key.

Method 2 (the file name is selected from a file list)(1) Click the [DIR. VIEW] soft key.

A list of files contained in the input/output device isdisplayed. If the list cannot be displayed on a singlepage, "Prev Page" and "Next Page" are displayed inPAGE SELECT to indicate that there are multiplepages.Press the <PAGE ↑> <PAGE ↓> key to display thespecified page.

(2) Move the cursor to the desired output file name.(3) Click the [NAME GET] soft key.

(4) Enter MDI mode.(5) Click the [DATA PUNCH] soft key.(6) Click the [EXEC] soft key.


- 19 -

Inputting parameters(1) Click the [DATA SELECT] soft key.(2) Click the [PARAMETER] soft key.

"PARAMETER" appears in IN/OUT DATA.(3) Click the [DIR. VIEW] soft key.

A list of files contained in the input/output device is displayed. Ifthe list cannot be displayed on a single page, "Prev Page" and"Next Page" are displayed in PAGE SELECT to indicate thatthere are multiple pages.Press the <PAGE ↑> <PAGE ↓> key to display the specifiedpage.

(4) Move the cursor to the desired input file name.(5) Enter MDI mode.(6) Enter the emergency stop status.(7) Click the [DATA READ] soft key.(8) Click the [EXEC] soft key.


- 20 -

3.4 INPUT/OUTPUT FORMATS

This section explains the input/output formats for parameters andpitch error compensation data.

3.4.1 Input/Output Formats for Parameters

Parameters are classified according to data types, as follows.

- Bit type- Bit axis type- Bit spindle type- Integer type- Integer axis type- Integer spindle type- Real type- Real axis type- Real spindle type

Bit/bit axis/bit spindle type parameters are represented by 8-digitbinary numbers, with each digit occupying a single bit.The valid value ranges of the individual integer/integer axis/integerspindle/real/real axis/real spindle type parameters differ. For details,see the description of each parameter.

- KeywordsThe following alphabetic characters are used as keywords.The numeric values following the keywords have the meanings

described below.

Keyword Description of the numeric value following the keyword

N Parameter numberA Controlled axis number of an axis type parameter (1 or

above)S Spindle number of a spindle type parameter (1 or above)P Value of a parameter that does not depend on

inch/metric switchingM Metric-input-time value of a parameter dependent on

inch/metric switchingI Inch-input-time value of a parameter dependent on

inch/metric switching


- 21 -

- Inch/metric switchingThe data specified for parameters dependent on inch/metric switching,such as length and feedrate parameters, is determined to be in eitherinch or metric mode depending on the mode assumed at input time forinput from the MDI and depending on whether the keyword precedingthe data is I or M for input from an external input/output device.These I and M keywords are added to data as appropriate when thatdata is output from an external input/output device.If the mode assumed at input time or the keyword does not match themode assumed when the data is to be used, for example, the data inputin inch mode is to be used in metric mode, the CNC automaticallyconverts the data before use, eliminating the need to change the dataaccording to the mode change. In addition, in the display of parameterdata, data is converted according to the mode assumed at display time,before the data is displayed. When the data is to be output from theexternal input/output device, it is converted back to the original dataaccording to the keyword or mode.

- Bit type formatN ***** P ******** ;

The 8-digit binary number following P represents the values (0 or 1)of the bits of the parameter, with the first digit corresponding to bit 0and the eighth digit to bit 7. Leading zeros cannot be omitted.; is an end of block character (LF for ISO code and CR for EIA code).

ExampleN00010P00000001;Parameter number 10Parameter value Bit 0 is 1 and the others are 0.

- Bit axis type format

N ***** A ** P ******** A ** P ******** . . . . ;

The numeric value following N represents the parameter number.The numeric value following A represents the controlled axis number(1 or above).The 8-digit binary number following P represents the values (0 or 1)of the bits of the parameter for that controlled axis, with the first digitcorresponding to bit 0 and the eighth digit to bit 7. Leading zeroscannot be omitted.; is an end of block character (LF for ISO code and CR for EIA code).

ExampleN0005A1P10000001A2P10000001A3P10000001A4P00001001....;Parameter number 1005Parameter values

First axis: Bits 0 and 7 are 1 and the others are 0.Second axis: Bits 0 and 7 are 1 and the others are 0.Third axis: Bits 0 and 7 are 1 and the others are 0.Fourth axis: Bits 0 and 3 are 1 and the others are 0.


- 22 -

- Bit spindle type format

N ***** S * P ******** S * P ******** . . . . ;

The numeric value following N represents the parameter number.The numeric value following S represents the spindle number (1 orabove).The 8-digit binary number following P represents the values (0 or 1)of the bits of the parameter for that spindle, with the first digitcorresponding to bit 0 and the eighth digit to bit 7. Leading zeroscannot be omitted.; is an end of block character (LF for ISO code and CR for EIA code).

ExampleN05603S1P00001000S2P00001000S3P00000000S4P000000000;Parameter number 5603Parameter values

First spindle: Bit 3 is 1 and the others are 0.Second spindle: Bit 3 is 1 and the others are 0.Third spindle: All bits are 0.Fourth spindle: All bits are 0.

- Integer type formatN ***** P ****** ;

The numeric value following N represents the parameter number.The numeric value following P represents the value (integer) of theparameter.; is an end of block character (LF for ISO code and CR for EIA code).

ExampleN00100P31515;Parameter number 100Parameter value 31515


- 23 -

- Integer axis type format

N ***** A ** P ****** A ** P ****** . . . . ;

The numeric value following N represents the parameter number.The numeric value following A represents the controlled axis number(1 or above).The numeric value following P represents the value (integer) of theparameter.; is an end of block character (LF for ISO code and CR for EIA code).

ExampleN01020A1P88A2P89A3P90A4P66......;Parameter number 1020Parameter values

First axis: 88Second axis: 89Third axis: 90Fourth axis: 66

- Integer spindle type format

N ***** S * P ****** S * P ****** . . . . ;

The numeric value following N represents the parameter number.The numeric value following S represents the controlled axis number(1 or above).The numeric value following P represents the value (integer) of theparameter.; is an end of block character (LF for ISO code and CR for EIA code).

ExampleN05680S1P19S2P19S3P0S4P0;Parameter number 5680Parameter values

First spindle: 19Second spindle: 19Third spindle: 0Fourth spindle: 0


- 24 -

- Real type formatN ***** P ****** ;

N ***** M ****** ;

N ***** I ****** ;

The numeric value following N represents the parameter number.The numeric value following P, M, or I represents the value (real) ofthe parameter.; is an end of block character (LF for ISO code and CR for EIA code).

ExampleN01451P5000.0;Parameter number 1451Parameter number 000.0

- Real axis type formatN ***** A ** P ****** A ** P ****** . . . . ;

N ***** A ** M ****** A ** M ****** . . . . ;

N ***** A ** I ****** A ** I ****** . . . . ;

The numeric value following N represents the parameter number.The numeric value following A represents the controlled axis number(1 or above).The numeric value following P, M, or I represents the value (real) ofthe parameter.; is an end of block character (LF for ISO code and CR for EIA code).

ExampleN01220A1M50.0A2M60.0A3M70.0A4M0.0A5M0.0 ........;Parameter number 1220Parameter values

First axis: 50.0Second axis: 60.0Third axis: 70.0Fourth axis: 0.0Fifth axis: 0.0


- 25 -

- Real spindle type format

N ***** S * P ****** S * P ****** . . . . ;

N ***** S * M ****** S * M ****** . . . . ;

N ***** S * I ****** S * I ****** . . . . ;

The numeric value following N represents the parameter number.The numeric value following S represents the controlled axis number(1 or above).The numeric value following P, M, or I represents the value (real) ofthe parameter.; is an end of block character (LF for ISO code and CR for EIA code).

ExampleN05898S1P30.0S2P30.0S3P0.0S4P0.0;Parameter number 5898Parameter values

First spindle: 30.0Second spindle: 30.0Third spindle: 0.0Fourth spindle: 0.0

- Beginning and end of a recordA record of parameters begins with "%" and ends with "%."

Example%; ................................ Beginning of a recordN00000P00001100;N00002P00000000;:N09162P00000000;N09163P00000000;% ................................ End of the record

When parameters and pitch error compensation data are collected intoa single file, the file begins and ends with "%."


- 26 -

3.4.2 Input/Output Format for Pitch Error Compensation Data

- KeywordsThe following alphabetic characters are used as keywords.The numeric values following the keywords have the meanings

described below.

Keyword Description of the numeric value following the keyword

N Pitch error compensation data numberP Pitch error compensation data value

- FormatPitch error compensation data is output in the following format.

N ***** P **** ;

The 5-digit numeric value following N represents the pitch errorcompensation data number. Note that this number is equal to theactual pitch error compensation data number plus 10000.The numeric value following P represents the value (integer) of thepitch error compensation data, which is in the range of -128 to 127.; is an end of block character (LF for ISO code and CR for EIA code).

ExampleN10001P100;

Pitch error compensation data numberPitch error compensation data value

- Beginning and end of a recordA record of pitch error compensation data begins with "%" and endswith "%."

Example% ; .................................... Beginning of a recordN10000P10;N10001P100;:N11279P0;% .................................... End of the record

When parameters and pitch error compensation data are collected intoa single file, the file begins and ends with "%."

B-63330EN/03 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

- 27 -

4 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

4.1 DATA TYPESParameters are classified according to data types, as follows:

Data type Valid data range RemarksBit typeBit axis type

Bit spindle type0 or 1

Integer typeInteger axis typeInteger spindle type

0 to ±999999999Some parameters are handled asunsigned data.

Real typeReal axis typeReal spindle type

See the StandardParameter Setting

Tables.

NOTE1 Each of bit, bit axis, and bit spindle type parameters

contains eight bits (eight different meanings) for asingle data number.

2 The axis type means that independent data can beset for each controlled axis.

3 The spindle type means that independent data canbe set for each spindle.

4 The valid data ranges are general ones. The validdata range differs from one parameter to another.For details, see the explanation of each parameter.

4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-63330EN/03

- 28 -

4.2 REPRESENTATION OF PARAMETERS

Bit, bit axis, and bit spindle types

Types other than bit, bit axis, and bit spindle types

NOTEThe blank bits in the parameter list (Chapter 4,"DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS") and theparameters displayed on the Parameter screen butnot shown on the list are reserved for futureexpansion. Be sure to set these parameter bits to 0.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

0000 EIA NCR ISP CTV TVC

Datanumber

Data (#0 to #7 indicate bit positions.)

1023 Servo axis number of each axis

Datanumber

Data


- 29 -

4.3 STANDARD PARAMETER SETTING TABLES

OverviewThis section specifies the standard minimum data units and standardvalid data ranges of real, real axis, and real spindle type CNCparameters. The data type of each parameter and its unit of dataconform to the specifications of each function.

Explanations

(A) Length and angle parameters (type 1)

Unit of dataIncrement

systemMinimum data unit Valid data range

IS-A 0.01 -999999.99 to +999999.99IS-B 0.001 -999999.999 to +999999.999IS-C 0.0001 -99999.9999 to +99999.9999IS-D 0.00001 -9999.99999 to +9999.99999

mmdeg.

IS-E 0.000001 -999.999999 to +999.999999

IS-A 0.001 -99999.999 to +99999.999IS-B 0.0001 -99999.9999 to +99999.9999IS-C 0.00001 -9999.99999 to +9999.99999IS-D 0.000001 -999.999999 to +999.999999

inch

IS-E 0.0000001 -99.9999999 to +99.9999999

(B) Length and angle parameters (type 2)



IS-A 0.01 0.00 to +999999.99IS-B 0.001 0.000 to +999999.999IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999IS-D 0.00001 0.00000 to +9999.99999

mmdeg.

IS-E 0.000001 0.000000 to +999.999999


inch

IS-E 0.0000001 0.0000000 to +99.9999999


- 30 -

(C) Velocity and angular velocity parameters




mm/mindeg./min

IS-E 0.0001 0.0 to +1000.0


inch/min

IS-E 0.00001 0.0 to +1000.0

(D) Acceleration and angular acceleration parameters



IS-A 0.01IS-B 0.001IS-C 0.0001IS-D 0.00001

mm/sec2

deg./sec2

IS-E 0.000001

0.0 to +100000.0

IS-A 0.001IS-B 0.0001IS-C 0.00001IS-D 0.000001

inch/sec2

IS-E 0.0000001

0.0 to +10000.0

Notes(1) Values are rounded up or down to the nearest multiples of the

minimum data unit.(2) A valid data range means the limits on data entry. It may differ

from the numeric values representing actual performance.(3) For information on the ranges of commands to the CNC, refer to

Appendix, "List of Command Ranges," in the "FANUC Series15i/150i-MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Programming)" (B-63324EN).


- 31 -

4.4 SETTING PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 0000 AND LATER)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

0000 RDN EIA NCR ISP CTV TVC

[Input type] Setting input[Data type] Bit

#0 TVC Specifies whether TV check is performed.0: Do not perform.1: Perform.

#1 CTV Specifies whether characters are counted for TV check during controlout.0: Count.1: Do not count.

#2 ISP Specifies whether ISO codes contain a parity bit.0: Contain parity bit.1: Do not contain parity bit.A parity bit is located at channel 8 in a punched tape in the ISO code.

#3 NCR Specifies how to punch an EOB (end-of-block) code when using ISOcodes.0: Punch LF CR CR.1: Punch LF.

NOTEThis bit is disabled, when bit 2 (CRF) of parameterNo.0002 is set to 1.

#4 EIA Specifies the code system to use for punch codes.0: ISO code1: EIA code

#6 RDN Specifies whether the Remote Diagnostic Function is used0: Disable1: EnableThe device setting for Remote Diagnostic Function is used currentsetting when this bit is set to 1. After all device parameters are set,this bit should be set to 1. When the device parameters are changed,this bit must be set to 0.

NOTEDuring this bit is set to 1, the communication device isoccupied by Remote Diagnostic Function. So, whilethis bit is 1, don’t read data and don’t punch data fromCNC side.


- 32 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

0002 PZS CRF


#3 PZS0: Do not suppress the zeros of O numbers during the punching of a

part program.1: Suppress the zeros of O numbers during the punching of a part

program.#2 CRF Specifies how to punch an EOB (end-of-block) code when using ISO

codes.0: Use parameter NCR iNo.0#3).1: Punch CR LF.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

0010 SBO SBC SBM SB8 SB7 SQN INI


#0 INI Specifies whether the increment system is metric or in inches.0: Metric input1: Inch input

#1 SQN Specifies whether sequence numbers are automatically inserted.0: Do not insert.1: Insert.

#3 SB7 Specifies whether to stop after each block of custom macro statementsin programs O7000 to O7999.0: Do not stop after each block.1: Stop after each block.This bit is used to check programs O7000 to O7999 containingcustom macro statements.

#4 SB8 Specifies whether to stop after each block of custom macro statementsin programs O8000 to O8999.0: Do not stop after each block.1: Stop after each block.This bit is used to check programs O8000 to O8999 containingcustom macro statements.

#5 SBM Specifies whether to stop after each block of custom macro statementsin any program.0: Do not stop after each block. However, when stopping is

specified in SB7 or SB8, stopping will occur in programsaffected by these parameters.

1: Stop after each block.This bit is used to check programs containing custom macrostatements.


- 33 -

#6 SBC Specifies whether to stop after each block in hole-machining cannedcycles.0: Do not stop after each block.1: Stop after each block.This bit is used to check programs containing canned cycles.

#7 SBO Specifies whether to stop after each block automatically generated inthe NC for cutter or tool tip radius compensation.0: Do not stop after each block.1: Stop after each block.This bit is used to check programs containing cutter or tool tip radiuscompensation.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

0011 NOT TIM ND8 NE8


#0 NE8 Specifies whether to permit editing of O8000 to O8999 programs.0: Permit editing.1: Do not permit editing.

#1 ND8 Specifies whether to display the program being executed on thescreen for programs O8000 to O8999.0: Display program being executed.1: Do not display program being executed.When there is no need to display custom macros or other programsbeing executed, set this parameter to 1.

#4 TIM Specifies the information displayed on the screen for the program No.and name directory.0: Display program No., name, and memory used.1: Display program No., name, and processing time.

#5 NOT Specifies whether to use Tool Nos. to specify output of tool pot Nos.and tool offsets.0: Use tool Nos. (H/D codes cannot be used to specify tool length

compensation and cutter compensation.)1: Do not use tool Nos. (H/D codes can be used to specify tool

length compensation and cutter compensation.)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

0012 RMV SCL MIR

[Input type] Setting input[Data type] Bitaxis

#0 MIR For each axis, specifies whether to use its mirror image.0: Do not use mirror image (normal).1: Use mirror image (mirror).

#1 SCL For this axis, specifies whether scaling is used.0: Do not use scaling.1: Use scaling.


- 34 -

#7 RMV For each axis, specifies whether to detach the shaft corresponding tothe control axis.0: Do not detach.1: Detach.(Equivalent to the control axis detach signals DTCH1, DTCH2, andso on.)Effective when RMB (bit 7 of parameter No. 1005) is set to 1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

0013 DSL HDE HKE


#4 HKE Specifies whether to store the history of key operations.0: Do not store the history.1: Store the history.

#5 HDE Specifies whether to store the history of DI/DO.0: Do not store the history.1: Store the history.

#6 DSL Specifies whether to display the system log screen.0: Do not display the screen.1: Display the screen.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

0014 HD2 NIC ASG FAN


#1 FAN Specifies whether to ignore alarm FAN MOTOR STOP (OH002).0: Do not ignore the alarm.1: Ignore the alarm.

#4 ASG Specifies what compensation is to be changed in the Changing ActiveOffset Value with Manual Move mode for offset memory B/C, asfollows:0: Wear compensation1: Geometry compensationThis parameter is valid for offset memory B/C.

#5 NIC Specifies whether to perform an interference check whencompensation plane switching occurs during three-dimensional cuttercompensation.0: Perform.1: Do not perform.

#7 HD2 Specifies whether the size of one file can exceed 2000 m when usinga floppy cassette, the PROGRAM FILE Mate, HANDY FILE, or FAcard.0: Within 2000 m1: Can exceed 2000 m


- 35 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

0015 NDM EKE OHS HPC SPS SVS


#0 SVS Specifies whether to display the servo screen.0: Display the servo screen.1: Do not display the servo screen.Specifies whether to display or hide the servo setting screen, servoadjustment/monitor screen, servo function setting screen, servo alarmscreen, and backlash screen.

#1 SPS Specifies whether to display the spindle screen.0: Display the spindle screen.1: Do not display the spindle screen.

#2 HPC Specifies whether to enable the high-speed and high-precisionmachining setting screen.0: Enable the screen.1: Disable the screen.

#3 OHS Specifies whether to display the operation history screen and thesignal selection screen.0: Do not display the screens. (The alarm history screen can be

displayed.)1: Display the screens.

#4 EKE Specifies whether to enable the [ALL CLEAR] soft key that eraseshistory data.0: Disable the soft key.1: Enable the soft key.

#7 NDM The PROFIBUS-DP screen is0: Displayed.1: Not displayed.The change of this bit takes effect at the next startup.

0016 Screen saver start time

[Input type] Setting input[Data type] Integer

[Unit of data] min[Valid data range] 0 - 127

When the operator does not operate the keyboard for the periodspecified in this parameter, the saver screen is displayed. When 0 isspecified, the screen save function is disabled.

0020 Interface No. of input device for foreground


[Valid data range] 0 - 21This parameter specifies an interface number for a foreground inputdevice.


- 36 -

The device numbers for each device are listed below:Devicenumber

Device name

1 RS-232-C channel 1 (JD5A on the main CPU board)2 RS-232-C channel 2 (JD5B on the main CPU board)3 RS-232-C channel 3 (JD36A on the display unit)8 Memory card9 PMC C board

10 Remote buffer12 Remote Diagnose13 RS-422 channel 1 (JD6A on the display unit)14 Data server15 Open CNC DNC operation interface16 Open CNC Upload/Download interface20 RS-232-C channel 4 (JD5C on the additional-axis board)21 RS-422 channel 2 (JD6B on the additional-axis board)

0021 Interface No. of output device for foreground


[Valid data range] 0 - 21This parameter specifies an interface number for a foreground outputdevice.See the descriptions about parameter No. 0020 for the devicenumbers.

If the screen hard copy function is enabled (parameter HDC (bit 7 ofparameter No. 2240) = 1), set this parameter to 8 (memory card).

0022 Interface No. of input device for background


[Valid data range] 0 - 21This parameter specifies an interface number for a background inputdevice.See the descriptions about parameter No. 0020 for the devicenumbers.

0023 Interface No. of output device for background


[Valid data range] 0 - 21This parameter specifies an interface number for a background outputdevice.See the descriptions about parameter No. 0020 for the devicenumbers.


- 37 -

0024 Assignment of the communication with the PMC Ladder development tool

(FAPT LADDER-II, Ladder editing package)


[Valid data range] 0 - 255Assigns the communication with the PMC Ladder development tool(FAPT LADDER-II, Ladder editing package).The value of this parameter determines the communication to bestarted, as follows:0: At power-on, communication conforms to the settings on the

PMC setting screen (displayed by selecting [PMC], [SETING],and the [ONLINE] screen in this order).*1Communication stops if this parameter is changed from anothervalue to 0.

1: RS-232-C serial port 1 (JD5A)2: RS-232-C serial port 2 (JD5B)3: RS-232-C serial port 3 (JD36A)4: RS-422 serial port (JD6A)255: Do not allow communication with the PMC Ladder development

tool.

*1 When using HSSB, set the parameter to 0.

After system startup, communication settings can be changed withthis parameter or on the PMC setting screen.Refer to the PMC Ladder Language Programming Manual (B-61863E).

To use the online monitor function of the PMC Ladder developmenttool, set the desired communication port number in this parameter.To transfer sequence programs in offline mode, set this parameter to"0." In addition, on the PMC [ONLINE] screen, select "NOT USE" inthe "RS-232C" field.To forcibly stop the communication with the PMC Ladderdevelopment tool, set this parameter to "255."

0031 Initial value used for automatic setting of sequence Nos.


[Valid data range] 0 - 99999999

0032 Increment used for automatic setting of sequence No.


[Valid data range] 0 - 99999999If the increment is set to 0, no sequence Nos. are inserted.


- 38 -

0040 Serial port channel for Remote Diagnostic Function


[Valid data range] 1 - 3Selection of serial port channel for Remote Diagnostic Function. 1: RS-232-C Serial port1 (JD5A) 2: RS-232-C Serial port2 (JD5B) 3: RS-232-C Serial port3 (JD36A) 4: Modem card (PCMCIA card slot on the LCD unit)

0042 Password 1 for Remote Diagnostic Function

[Input type] Locked parameter[Data type] Integer


0043 Keyword 1 for Remote Diagnostic Function














[Valid data range] 0 - 99999999Parameters (No.0042, 0044, 0046) set passwords for using the remotediagnosis function.With the remote diagnostic function, three types of passwords areavailable for protecting data. These passwords help to prevent


- 39 -

unauthorized persons from accessing system parameters andmachining programs.

Password 1:Sets a password for all services of the remote diagnosis function.(No remote diagnosis function services are available until thispassword is entered on the host computer (personal or other)).

Password 2:Sets a password for part programs. (Program-related operationssuch as program data input/output and check cannot beperformed until this password is entered on the host computer(personal or other)).

Password 3:Sets a password for parameters. (Parameter-related operationssuch as parameter data input/output and cannot be performeduntil this password is entered on the host computer (personal orother)).

Parameters (No.0043, 0045, 0047) set the keywords for passwordsused with the remote diagnostic function.Keyword 1:

Keyword for password 1(parameter No.0042)Keyword 2:

Keyword for password 2(parameter No.0044)Keyword 3:

Keyword for password 3(parameter No.0046)

When a value other than 0 is specified as a password (parameterNo.0042, 0044, 0046), the password cannot be modified until thesame value is set in the corresponding keyword parameter.

NOTEOnce a value other than 0 is set as a password, thepassword cannot be modified until the same value isset in the corresponding keyword parameter(parameter No. 221 to 223). When a value other than0 is set as a password, only blanks are displayed.Care must be taken in setting a password.Upon power-up, the keyword parameters are set to 0.The parameter screen does not display any setkeyword value, only blanks are displayed.


- 40 -

4.5 Timer Parameters (Data No. 0100 and later)

0100 Time accumulated since power-on

[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] Integer


Stores the time accumulated since power-on.

0101 Time 1 accumulated during automatic operation


[Unit of data] msec[Valid data range] 0 - 59999

Stores the time accumulated during automatic operation that is lessthan one minute. The actual time accumulated during automaticoperation is the sum of this parameter and parameter No. 102.

0102 Time 2 accumulated during automatic operation



Stores the time accumulated during automatic operation that is equalto or greater than one minute. The actual time accumulated duringautomatic operation is the sum of this parameter and parameter No.101.

0103 Time 1 accumulated during cutting



Stores the time accumulated during cutting that is less than oneminute. The actual time accumulated during cutting is the sum of thisparameter and parameter No. 104.


- 41 -

0104 Time 2 accumulated during cutting



Stores the time accumulated during cutting that is equal to or greaterthan one minute. The actual time accumulated during cutting is thesum of this parameter and parameter No. 103.

0105 Time 1 accumulated by the general-purpose timer



Stores the time accumulated by the general-purpose timer that is lessthan one minute. The actual time accumulated by the general-purposetime is the sum of this parameter and parameter No. 106.

0106 Time 2 accumulated by the general-purpose timer



Stores the time accumulated by the general-purpose time that is equalto or greater than one minute. The actual time accumulated by thegeneral-purpose time is the sum of this parameter and parameter No.105.

0107 Total number of parts machined


[Valid data range] 0 - 999999999Stores the total number of parts machined.

0108 Total number of parts


[Valid data range] 0 - 999999999Stores the total number of parts.


- 42 -

0109 Number of parts required


[Valid data range] 0 - 999999999Sets the number of parts required. When the total number ofmachined parts exceeds the value of this parameter, a signalindicating that the number of parts required is exceeded is output.

0130 Time by which to go back to delete alarms from the history


[Unit of data] sec[Valid data range] 0 - 255

When the power to the NC is turned ON, the NC goes back from thetime the NC was turned OFF by the specified time and deletes fromthe history any alarms that occurred during this period.If this parameter is set to 0, one second is assumed.


- 43 -

4.6 AXIS CONTROL PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1000 ANDLATER)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1000 EMI EHM FPI XIK CSZ CIP

[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] Bit

#0 CIP Specifies what to confirm with an in-position check.0: Merely confirm that the specified feedrate reaches zero during

deceleration (the acceleration/deceleration delay becomes zero).1: Confirm that the specified feedrate reaches zero during

deceleration (the acceleration/deceleration delay becomes zero)and that the machine reaches the specified position (the servoposition deviation falls within the valid area set for parameter No.1827).

#1 CSZ Specifies whether to enable the in-position check signal (*CSMZ).0: Disable1: Enable

#2 XIK When axis interlock is applied during non-linear interpolationpositioning (when LRP, a bit of parameter No. 1400 is set to 0),specifies whether to stop only the axis to which interlock was appliedor all axes.0: Stop axis to which interlock was applied. Other axes continue

operation.1: Stop all axes.

#3 FPI Specifies whether to perform an in-position check at the temporarystop-point in G60 mode.0: Do not perform in-position check.1: Perform in-position check.

#5 EHM Specifies conditions when handle interruption is valid.0: When in G01, G02, or G03 mode, handle interruption is valid

during automatic operation startup, stopping, and resting.1: Handle interruption is only valid for G01, G02, and G03 blocks

during automatic operation startup.#6 EMI Specifies validity of manual interrupts and manual setup operations

during simultaneous manual-automatic operation.0: Manual interrupts are invalid and manual setup operations are

valid.1: Manual interrupts and manual setup operations are valid.


- 44 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1001 CAF PED PDC RPC


#0 RPC Specifies whether axes are switched when a reference position return(G29) is performed.0: Axes are not switched.1: Axes are switched.

#5 PDC Specifies whether the G10.9 code (for selecting diameter or radiusprogramming) and PDA (bit 3 of parameter No. 1009) are valid.0: Invalid.1: Valid.This parameter is related to DIA (bit 3 of parameter No. 1006). Alsosee the item on that parameter.

#6 PED Specifies whether to enable the external deceleration function in PMCaxis control.0: Disables the external deceleration function.1: Enables the external deceleration function.

#7 CAF Specifies whether to enable chopping axis and rate data to be set onthe setting screen, as follows:0: Enables.1: Disables.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1002 DC4 INM


NOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the power must beoff turned off then back on for the setting to becomeeffective.

#1 INM Specifies whether the least command increment for the linear axis ismetric or in inches.0: Metric. (The machine is a millimeter machine.)1: Inches. (The machine is an inch machine.)

#3 DC4 Specifies how to establish a reference position for a linear scalehaving reference marks.0: An absolute position is established by detecting three reference

marks.1: An absolute position is established by detecting four reference

marks.


- 45 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1004 DSP

[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] Bitaxis

#6 DSP Specifies whether to display axis positions in the position screen andthe program check screen.0: Display axis positions.1: Do not display axis positions.

NOTEWhen using the electronic gear box function (EGB),specify 1 for the dummy axis of the EGB to disableposition display.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1005 RMB MLE EDM EDP PLZ ALZ ZRN


#0 ZRN Specifies whether to issue an alarm if reference position return hasnot been performed since power-on and an attempt is made to executea command involving movement other than that with G28 duringautomatic operation.0: Issue an alarm ("PS181 ZERO RETURN NOT FINISHED").1: Do not issue an alarm but execute operation.

#2 ALZ Specifies the method to use for automatic reference position return(G28).0: Return to reference position using positioning (rapid traverse).If reference position return has not been performed since power-on, it

is performed using the same operation sequence for manualreference position return.

1: Use the same operation sequence as for manual referenceposition return.

Usually, set this bit to 0.#3 PLZ Specifies the condition for presetting the work coordinate system

when manual reference position return is performed.0: Preset only when in reset state (e.g. OP signal is off).1: Always preset.See ZNP, bit 2 of parameter No. 2402, which is common to all axes.

#4 EDP For each axis, specifies whether the external deceleration signal forthe positive direction is valid during cutting feed.0: Invalid.1: Valid.

#5 EDM For each axis, specifies whether the external deceleration signal forthe negative direction is valid during cutting feed.0: Invalid.1: Valid.


- 46 -

#6 MLE Specifies whether machine lock is valid for each axis.0: Invalid.1: Valid.

#7 RMB For each axis, specifies whether the control axis detach signal andsetting input RMV (bit 7 of parameter No. 0012) is valid.0: Invalid.1: Valid.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1006 NDC ZMI DIA ROP ROS ROT


NOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the power must be offturned off then back on for the setting to become effective.

#0 ROT Specifies whether the axis requires inch/metric conversion.0: Axis requires inch/metric conversion (linear axis).1: Axis does not require inch/metric conversion (rotation axis).

#1 ROS Specifies whether the machine coordinate system used for strokecheck and automatic reference position return is linear or rotational.0: Linear (linear axis)1: Rotation (rotation axis)For a rotation axis, the machine coordinate system is normalizedwithin the angular displacement per rotation specified for parameterNo. 1260. In this case, automatic reference position return (G28, G30)is performed in the same direction as manual reference position returnand the angular displacement does not exceed 360 degrees. Also seethe item on parameter No. 1260.

#2 ROP Specifies whether the machine coordinate system used to perform theretained pitch error compensation is linear or rotational.0: Linear (linear axis)1: Rotation (rotation axis)When the coordinate system used is rotational, up to the angle whichcorresponds to one cycle of retained pitch error compensation datacan be specified. This allows pitch compensation to be performed forpitch compensation cycles of other than 360 degrees. Also see theitem on parameter No. 5425.

#3 DIA Move commands for each axis are specified using:0: Radius specification1: Diameter specificationIf bit 5 (PDC) of parameter No. 1001 is 1, DIA has the followingmeaning:The scale of the parameter, offset, and graphic screens is indicatedusing:0: Radius specification1: Diameter specification


- 47 -

#5 ZMI Specifies the direction of manual reference position return.0: Positive direction1: Negative direction

#6 NDC Specifies the normal direction control function.0: Not normal direction control axis1: Normal direction control axisOnly one axis can be specified as the normal direction control axis.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1007 DOG GRD INC REL G90 RSR FAX


#0 FAX Specifies whether the fixture offset is valid for each axis.0: Invalid.1: Valid.

#2 RSR When an absolute command is executed (when INC, bit 5 ofparameter No. 1007, is set to 0), specifies whether the direction ofrotation is determined by the sign of the value specified by thecommand.0: Not determined.1: Determined by command value (counterclockwise when value is

positive and clockwise when value is negative)#3 G90 Specifies the type of commands used for the rotary control axes.

0: Either absolute or incremental commands determined by G90 orG91 mode

1: Absolute commands#4 REL Specifies whether the current position of rotary control axes in the

relative coordinate system is displayed with the value rounded offwithin one rotation.0: Not performed.1: Performed.

#5 INC In rotary axis control, when the NC converts the command value tothe corresponding value within one rotation and the current positionbeing regarded as the angular displacement through which the axis isto be rotated, this bit specifies whether to turn in whichever directionminimizes the displacement in G90 mode.0: Do not turn to closest direction.1: Turn to closest direction.

#6 GRD Dog-less reference position setting is0: Performed more than once.1: Not performed more than once.

#7 DOG In the manual reference position return mode0: Dog-less reference position setting is disabled.1: Dog-less reference position setting is enabled.


- 48 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1008 DCL SFD ROT



#1 ROT0: Not multiple rotary control axes.1: Multiple rotary control axes.

#4 SFD Specifies whether to enable the reference position shift function inreference position return with the grid method.0: Disable the function.1: Enable the function.

#7 DCL Specifies whether to use a linear scale having reference marks as aseparate position detector.0: Do not use a linear scale having reference marks.1: Use a linear scale having reference marks.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1009 NFF ZND PDA ROL


#2 ROL Specifies whether the roll-over function for a rotation axis isexecuted.0: Not executed.1: Executed.

NOTEThis bit is valid only for a rotation axis.

#3 PDA Specifies whether move commands are specified by means ofdiameter or radius programming in the program for each axis.0: Radius programming1: Diameter programmingThis bit is valid only when the PDC (bit 5 of parameter No. 1001) isset to "1." It can be changed by specifying G10.9 (for selectingdiameter or radius programming). The DIA bit (bit 3 of parameter1006) is automatically set to PDA at power-on and reset.

#4 ZND Specifies whether to display the value set on the workpiece referenceposition offset setting menu.0: Display the value.1: Do not display the value.


- 49 -

#7 NFF Specifies whether data is input from the high-speed and high-precision machining setting screen.0: Input1: Not inputThe data entered for the axis parameters on the high-speed and high-precision machining setting screen is effective to all axes. When thisbit is set to 1, no data is entered for the parameter for thecorresponding axis, including the settings with the automatic settingfunction and the automatic tuning function. This bit can be set to 1 forany axes used for purposes other than high-speed and high-precisionmachining.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1010 SYC


#0 SYC Specifies whether to use the synchronization alignment functionbased on machine coordinates in the synchronous control function.0: Not used1: UsedThis parameter can be set for a slave axis.When using synchronous error compensation, set this parameter to 0.

#1 RFD For rotation axis feedrate control:0: The conventional method is used.1: The method of feedrate specification on a virtual cicle for a

rotation axis is used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1012 ISE ISD ISC ISA



#0 ISA / #1ISC / #2 ISD / #3 ISE Increment system for each axisIncrement system #3 ISE #2 ISD #1 ISC #0 ISA

IS-A 0 0 0 1IS-B 0 0 0 0IS-C 0 0 1 0IS-D 0 1 0 0IS-E 1 0 0 0


- 50 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1013 WAM MCS NCG IM0


#0 IM0 Specifies whether to set the least input increment of each axis to tentimes the least command increment when a command is issuedwithout the decimal point.0: Do not set to ten times the least command increment.1: Set to ten times the least command increment.When IS-A is used as the increment system, the least input incrementcannot be set to ten times the least command increment.

#3 NCG In Cs contour control mode, the position gain:0: Coincides with the Cs contour control axis.1: Does not coincide with the Cs contour control axis.

NOTEEven if the position gain is set so that it coincideswith the Cs contour control axis, the following axesdo not coincide with the Cs contour control axis:Spindle positioning axis; index table index axis; PMCaxis; and drilling axis in rigid tapping mode

#6 MCS If the machine zero point shift of external data input/ output is inputfor the master axis under synchronization control:0: The same machine zero point shift as that for the master axis is

not effective to the slave axis.1: The same machine zero point shift as that for the master axis is

effective to the slave axis.For those slave axes under synchronization control to which the samemachine zero point shift is to be effective, set this bit to 1. For otheraxes, set the bit to 0.In synchronous operation, the same machine zero point shift as thatfor the master axis is always effective to those slaves for which thisbit is set to 1. In normal operation, however, this shift is noteffective to them.

#7 WAM WAM In the NC window function, the reading of the currentmachine position (machine coordinates with the servo delay and theacceleration/deceleration delay considered) is:0: Not performed.1: Performed.

NOTESet the bit to "0" to keep the load on the CNC lowunless the reading is required.


- 51 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1014 RAP RAM


#0 RAM Specifies whether to use the axis as the rotation axis for tool axisdirection tool length compensation, three-dimensional handle feed,and designation direction tool length compensation.0: Not used as the rotation axis.1: Used as the rotation axis.Select two axes from among rotation axes and set them as the rotationaxes for these purposes.

#1 RAP Specifies whether the rotation axis used for tool axis direction toollength compensation, three-dimensional handle feed, and designationdirection tool length compensation is an ordinary rotation axis.0: Ordinary rotation axis.1: Parameter axis. The rotation axis is not controlled in designation

direction tool length compensation.If this bit is set to 0, absolute coordinates are used as the coordinatesof rotation axes in tool axis direction tool length compensation mode,and machine coordinates are used in three-dimentional handle feedmode. If this bit is set to 1, the value set in parameter No. 7516 is usedas the coordinates of the rotation axes.When there is no rotation axis in the controlled axes, or when there isonly one rotation axis in the controlled axes, set 1 in bit 0 (RAM) andbit 1 (RAP) of parameter No. 1014 for the linear axes to which non-existent rotation axes belong, and set an angular displacement inparameter No. 7516.(Example 1)There are linear axes X, Y, and Z, and rotation axes A, B, and Cwhich rotate about the X-, Y-, and Z-axes, respectively. The tool axisdirection is controlled with the rotation axes A and C.

RAM (No.1014#0)

X 0Y 0Z 0A 1B 0C 1

(Example 2)The controlled axes include only the linear axes X, Y, and Z. Byusing the tool attachment, the tool axis is tilted in the same tool axisdirection as when the A- and C-axes are rotated.

RAM (No.1014#0) RAP(No.1014#1) Angle iNo.7516)

X 1 1 45.0Y 0 0 0.0Z 1 1 30.0


- 52 -

1020 Program axis name for each axis

[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] Integeraxis

[Valid data range] 65 - 90The programmed axis name of each controlled axis is set according tothe following table:

Axis name X Y Z A B C U V WSetting 88 89 90 65 66 67 85 86 87

NOTE1 When the option for tool axis direction tool

length compensation is provided, always set theA, B, or C value.

2 When the axis name extension function (option)is used, the following addresses can be used asaxis names:

Axis name Setting

I 73J 74K 75E 69

1021 Subscripts of the axis names of parallel, synchronous control, and tandem

control axes


[Valid data range] From 0 through 9 or 65 through 90To distinguish the axes controlled in parallel operation mode,synchronization control mode, and tandem control mode, specify asuffix for each axis.

Setting Meaning

0 Set 0 for those axes not controlled in parallel operation mode,synchronization control, or tandem control.

1 to 9 A set number is used as a suffix.65 to 90 A set alphabetic character (ASCII code) is used as a suffix.

Example: For an axis whose axis name is X, the following will beindicated:

Setting Axis name indicated on screens such as position displayscreen

0 X1 X1

77 XM83 XS


- 53 -

1022 Designation of each axis in relation to the basic coordinate system


[Valid data range] 0 - 7To determine the planes selected for circular interpolation, cuttercompensation, and so forth G17: Xp-Yp plane G18: Zp-Xp plane G19: Yp-Zp planeor the three-dimensional tool compensation space XpYpZp, set eachcontrolled axis to one of the basic three axes X, Y, and Z of the basiccoordinate system or an axis parallel to one of the basic axes.The basic three axes X, Y, and Z can each be set for just onecontrolled axis.Two or more controlled axes can be set as axes parallel to the samebasic axis.

Setting Meaning

0 Rotation axis (neither the basic three axes nor their parallel axes)1 X-axis of the basic three axes2 Y-axis of the basic three axes3 Z-axis of the basic three axes5 Axis parallel to the X-axis6 Axis parallel to the Y-axis7 Axis parallel to the Z-axis

NOTEFor cylindrical intepolation, special setting isneeded. Refer to the operator’s manual.


- 54 -

1023 Servo axis number of each axis



[Valid data range] 0 - Max axesSpecify the number of the servo axis that corresponds to each controlaxis. Normally, set each servo and control axis to the same numbers.The control axis number and servo axis number of an axis with anabsolute position detector must be the same.- If FSSB setting mode is automatic setting mode (bit 0 of

parameter No. 1090 is set to 0), setting is made automatically byinputting data to the FSSB setting screen. In manual settingmode (bit 0 of parameter No. 1090 is set to 1), however, datamust be entered directly.

- The servo axes are associated with servo amplifiers by settingparameter Nos. 1080 to 1089.

- For spindle motor axes such as the spindle positioning axis andCs contour control axis, 0 must be set.

- For axes under tandem control and electronic gear box (EGB)control, a pair of two axes must be set. Set these axes as follows:Tandem axis: Set 1, 3, 5, or 7 for the master axis. For the slave

axis to be used with the master axis, set a valuegreater than the value set for the master axis byone.

EGB axis: Set 1, 3, 5, or 7 for the slave axis. For the dummyaxis to be used with the slave axis, set a valuegreater than the value set for the slave axis.


- 55 -

1027 Spindle number of a spindle positioning axis



[Valid data range] 0 - 4Set the axis attribute for each control axis, in combination withparameter No. 1023.Specify the control axis on which to perform spindle positioning, bysetting the spindle number (not the motor number) for this parameter.The following restrictions are imposed:- Set 0 for those control axes on which spindle positioning is not to beperformed.- A single spindle cannot be allocated to multiple control axes.- As many spindle positioning axes as the number of spindles can

be set.- A spindle positioning axis must be placed from the end of a

control axis.Example 1) Servo axis: X, Y, Z Spindle positioning axis: C (S1) Number of spindles: 1

Controlled-axis number

ParameterNo. 1020

ParameterNo. 1023

ParameterNo. 1027

1 88 (X) 1 02 89 (Y) 2 03 90 (Z) 3 0S 67 (C) 0 1

Example 2) Servo axis: X, Z Spindle positioning axis: C (S1) , B (S2) Number of spindles: 2

Controlled-axis number

ParameterNo. 1020

ParameterNo. 1023

ParameterNo. 1027

1 88 (X) 1 02 90 (Z) 2 03 67 (C) 0 14 66 (B) 0 2

NOTENote that this parameter is changed whenautomatic setting is performed on the FSSBsetting screen.


- 56 -

1028 Spindle number of a Cs contour control axis




1029 Axis number of the linear axis to which a rotation axis belongs


[Valid data range] 0 - Max axesThis parameter is used for tool axis direction tool lengthcompensation, three-dimensional handle feed, or designation directiontool length compensation.When a rotation axis turns about a linear axis, the linear axis isreferred to as an axis to which the rotation axis belongs, and is setusing this parameter. For a rotation axis that belongs to no linear axis,or for a linear axis, 0 is set.Example:

Axis configuration: X, Y, Z, C, ALinear axis: X, Y, ZRotation axis: A (turning about the X-axis) , C (turning about the

Z-axis)In the above case, set the following:

Axis name Setting

1 X 02 Z 03 Y 04 C 25 A 1

1030 Command address of the second miscellaneous function


[Valid data range] 65 - 87Specify the command address of the second miscellaneous function asA, B, C, U, V, or W. However, any address already used as an axisname cannot also be used as the command address of the secondmiscellaneous function.

Name A B C U V WSetting 65 66 67 85 86 87


- 57 -

1031 Reference axis


[Valid data range] 0 - Max axesThe units of parameters common to all axes, such as the dry runfeedrate and feedrate specified by code F with one digit, varyaccording to the increment system. In the Series 15, the effectiveincrement system for each axis is selected using a parameter. Theunits of these parameters must match the increment system of thereference axis. Select the axis to use as the reference axis.

1032 Designation of axis (linear axis) used for polar coordinate interpolation


[Valid data range] 1 - Max axesSet the number of the linear control axis used for polar coordinateinterpolation.

1033 Destination of axis (rotation axis) used for polar coordinate interpolation


[Valid data range] 1 - Max axesSet the number of the rotation control axis used for polar coordinateinterpolation.

1038 Reserved parameter for customer’s board

NOTEAfter specifying this parameter, turn the power off, andthen on again, for the new setting to take effect.

[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] Integer axis

[Valid data range] 0 - Max axes

1039 Reserved parameter for customer’s board



[Valid data range] 0 - Max axes


- 58 -

1043 Series name of the servo program used



[Invalid data range] 0 to 8If using two or more different servo programs, set the last digit of theseries name of the servo program to be used for each axis (n in 90Bn).For a set of axes whose servo axis numbers (settings of parameter No.1023) are consecutive such as (1, 2) or (3, 4), set the same value forthis parameter.

Example: If using servo program 90B0 for controlled axes 1 and 3 (servo axes1 and 2) and servo program 90B3 for controlled axes 2 and 4 (servo axes 3 and 4)

Controlled axisnumber

Parameter 1023 Servo programused

Parameter 1043

P � 90B0 0Q 3 90B3 3R 2 90B0 0S 4 90B3 3

NOTEThis parameter is required if two or more servoprograms 90B0 or later are to be used. If using onlyone servo program, set 0 for this parameter for allaxes.If the setting for an odd-numbered servo axis differsfrom that for the succeeding axis, alarm SV0455 isissued.If the servo program specified for this parameter doesnot exist in FROM, alarm SV0455 is issued.


- 59 -

1049 Axis switching number


[Valid data range] 0 - 5Six axis switching combinations are available. To choose from the six,set a desired axis switching number. The machine axes x, y, and zcorrespond to program addresses X, Y, and Z as follows:

Program addressAxis switching number

X Y Z0 x y z1 x z y2 y x z3 y z x4 z x y5 z y x

Axis switching number 0 means that axis switching is not performed.

1056 Automatic override tolerance ratio for polar coordinate interpolation


[Unit of data] %[Valid data range] 0 - 100

Typical setting: 90% (treated as 90% when set to 0)Set the tolerance ratio of the fastest cutting feedrate to the speed ofthe rotation axis during automatic override of polar coordinateinterpolation.

1070 Synchronous control axis of each axis in PMC axis control


[Valid data range] 0 - Max axesSet the axis number of the axis to which each axis is to besynchronized.(Example)If the first to fifth axes are PMC axes, and the third and fourth axesare to be synchronized with the first (the second and fifth axes are notsynchronized)

Set the following values for the respective axes: 1st. Axis: 0/ 2nd. Axis: 0 / 3rd. Axis: 1 / 4th. Axis: 1 / 5th. Axis: 0


- 60 -

1080 Address conversion table value (ATR) for slave 1












[Valid data range] From 0 through 7 or 16 or 40 or 48This parameter is automatically specified when the FSSB settingmode is the automatic setting mode (bit 0 of parameter No. 1090 is setto 0) . When the mode is the manual setting mode (bit 0 of parameterNo. 1090 is set to 1) , be sure to directly enter the desired value.Set the address conversion table values for slaves 1 to 10.The term slave is a generic name for a servo amplifier or pulsemodule connected to the CNC via an FSSB optical cable. Slaves areassigned numbers 1 to 10, the slave nearest the CNC being assigned 1.A 2-axis amplifier consists of two slaves, and a 3-axis amplifierconsists of three slaves. Set the appropriate value for this parameterdepending on whether a slave exists and, if it exists, whether the slaveis an amplifier or pulse module, as follows:- If the slave is an amplifier:

Set the value equal to the setting of parameter No. 1023 for theaxis to which the amplifier is to be assigned, minus 1.

- If the slave is a pulse module:Set 16 for the first pulse module (connected nearer the CNC) and48 for the second (connected farther from the CNC) .

- If a slave does not exist:Set 40.


- 61 -

NOTE1 When using the electronic gear box (EGB) function

Although EGB and dummy axes do not requireamplifiers, assume that they are connected to dummyamplifiers. Thus, as the address conversion tablevalue for an non-existing slave, set the value equal tothe setting of parameter No. 1023 for the EGB axisminus 1, instead of "40."

2 For a system with 11 or more controlled axesParameters Nos.1100 to 1109 and 1110 to 1119 arealso available in addition to these parameters.Nos.1080 to 1089 : The parameters of the slaveslinked to the first axis card on main board.Nos.1100 to 1109 : The parameters of the slaveslinked to the second axis card on additional axisboard.linked to the third axis card on additional axis board.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1090 ASE FMD



#0 FMD Specify the FSSB setting mode:0: Automatic setting mode.

When the relationships between axes and amplifiers and otherinformation are entered from the FSSB setting screen andautomatic setting is performed, parameters Nos. 1023, 1027,1028, 1080 to 1089, and 1092 to 1097 are automaticallyspecified.

1: Manual setting mode.Parameters Nos. 1023,1027,1028, 1080 to 1089, and 1092 to1097 must be specified manually.

#1 ASE When the FSSB setting mode is the automatic setting mode (bit 0 ofparameter No. 1090 is set to 0) , automatic setting is:0: Not completed.1: Completed.This bit is automatically set to 1 when automatic setting is completed.


- 62 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1092 DSP



#0 DSP Usually, do not directly enter any value, because this parameter isspecified on the FSSB setting screen. This parameter need not bespecified in the manual setting mode.0: Two axes use a single DSP. (Ordinary axes)1: A single axis uses a single DSP exclusively.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1093 PM2 PM1 FSL



#0 FSL The interface between the servo amplifier and the servo software is:0: Fast type.1: Slow type.The servo data transfer interface is divided into two types, Fast andSlow. The following conditions must be satisfied:- When a 1-axis amplifier is used, either Fast or Slow type can be

used.- When a 2-axis amplifier is used, the Fast type cannot be used for

both types.The Slow type can be used for both axes.

- For a 3-axis amplifier, the condition for a 2-axis amplifierapplies to its first and second axes, while the condition for a 1-axis amplifier applies to its third axis.

- The Fast type must be used for an axis for which an odd numberis set for parameter No. 1023.The Slow type can, however, be used for EGB workpiece axes,learning control axes, high-speed current loop axes, and high-speed interface axes.

- Only the Slow type can be used for an axis for which an evennumber is set for parameter No. 1023.

(Be sure to set this bit to 1.)


- 63 -

#6 PM1 Specifies whether to use the first pulse module.0: Do not use.1: Use.

#7 PM2 Specifies whether to use the second pulse module.0: Do not use.1: Use.

1094 Connector number of the 1-st pulse module

1095 Connector number of the 2-nd pulse module



[Valid data range] 0 - 7This parameter is automatically specified when the FSSB settingmode is the automatic setting mode (bit 0 of parameter No. 1090 is setto 0) .When the mode is the manual setting mode (bit 0 of parameter No.1090 is set to 1) , be sure to directly enter the desired value.When using a pulse module, set the value equal to the connectornumber of the pulse module used on the axis, minus 1. Thus, set 0 to7 for connector numbers 1 to 8. In addition, bits 6 and 7 of parameterNo. 1093 must be set separately. For an axis on which a pulse moduleis not used, set 0.Any connector can be used on an axis. Connector numbers must,however, be used starting with the smallest one. For example,connector number 4 cannot be used without using connector number3.

1096 Slave and dummy axis numbers for the EGB function (on the FSSB setting

screen only)



[Valid data range] 0 - 8When using the EGB function, set consecutive odd and even numbersfor the slave and dummy axes.Usually, do not directly enter any value, because this parameter isspecified on the FSSB setting screen. This parameter need not bespecified in the manual setting mode.


- 64 -

1097 Master and slave numbers for tandem control (on the FSSB setting screen

only)



[Valid data range] 0 - 8When performing tandem control, set consecutive odd and evennumbers for the master and slave axes.Usually, do not directly enter any value, because this parameter isspecified on the FSSB setting screen. This parameter need not bespecified in the manual setting mode.

1120 Address translation table value (ATR) for slave 1 (second FSSB)










NOTEAfter specifying these parameters, turn the power off andthen on again for the new settings to take effect.


[Valid data range] 0 to 7, 16, 40, 48If the servo control card supporting HIGH SPEED HRV control is tobe used, these parameters must be specified in addition toconventional FSSB setup parameters.


- 65 -

If the FSSB setup mode is automatic setting (bit 0 of parameter No.1090 is 0), these parameters are automatically specified. Be sure tospecify the parameters if the mode is manual setting (bit 0 ofparameter no. 1090 is 1).

Set the address translation table values for slaves 1 to 10 of thesecond FSSB.For details of the settings and restrictions, see the description ofparameters Nos. 1080 to 1089.

NOTE1 A total of up to ten slave units (eight amplifiers and

two Separate Detector I/F Units) can be connectedto the first and second FSSBs. (For systems having11 or more controlled axes, a total of up to 30 slaveunits, 24 amplifiers and six Separate Detector I/FUnits, can be connected,.)

2 For systems having 11 or more controlled axes, theparameters for the address translation table valuesfor the second FSSB, Nos. 1130 to 1139 and 1140 to1149, are provided, in addition to parameters Nos.1120 to 1129.The usage of the parameters is summarized below:Nos. 1120 to 1129: Slaves connected to thesecond FSSB of the first servo control card (on themain board)Nos. 1130 to 1139: Slaves connected to thesecond FSSB of the second servo control card (firstservo control card on the additional axis board)Nos.1140 to 1149: Slaves connected to the secondFSSB of the third servo control card (second servocontrol card on the additional axis board)


- 66 -

4.7 CHOPPING PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1181 AND LATER)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1181 CRO


#5 CRO Specifies the type of override used within the range from thechopping start position to point R, as follows:0: Chopping override1: Rapid traverse override

1191 Chopping axis


[Valid data range] 1 - Max axesSet the number of the servo axis that corresponds to the choppingaxis.

1192 Chopping reference position (R position)

[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] Real

[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis

[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set data in absolute coordinates.

1193 Upper limit for chopping





- 67 -

1194 Lower limit for chopping




1195 Chopping rate


[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (input unit)[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis

[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)

1196 Chopping compensation coefficient



The chopping delay compensation amount is equal to the sum of theservo delay during chopping and the delay duringacceleration/deceleration, times the coefficient set for this parameter.If this parameter is set to 0, chopping delay compensation is notperformed.

1197 Maximum feedrate during chopping

[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] Realaxis

[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis

[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Set the value that will be used to limit the chopping rate. When thisparameter is set to "0" for the chopping axis, the rapid traverse rate(parameter No. 1420) will be used to limit the chopping rate.


- 68 -

1198 Chopping rate for enabling bottom dead point overshoot damp control when

the chopping rate is changed



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Bottom dead point overshoot damp control is enabled when thechopping rate (command-specified rate overridden with a certainvalue, not including a portion increased due to choppingcompensation) exceeds a value specified in this parameter. Bottomdead point overshoot damp control is disabled if the chopping rate islower than the value specified in this parameter.If bottom dead point overshoot damp control is enabled, changing theoverride value, changing the command-specified rate, andinterlocking are enabled only within the range between the top deadpoint and the bottom dead point. Any attempt to change them withinthe range between the bottom dead point and the top dead point isignored.This parameter can be specified only when chopping is canceled (hasnot been started) . Any attempt to change the parameter is ignoredduring chopping.If this parameter is 0, overshoot damp control is disabled for all rates.


- 69 -

4.8 COORDINATE SYSTEM PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1200AND LATER)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1200 ACP NZA DSC MNS FPC


#1 FPC Specifies whether to preset the relative position display to zero whenthe floating reference position is set using the appropriate soft key.0: Do not set to 0 (relative position display remains unchanged) .1: Set to 0.

#2 MNS Specifies whether to shift coordinate systems when data is writteninto the system variables which specifies the distance to be caused bya manual interrupt.0: Shift all workpiece coordinate systems and local coordinate

systems.1: Do not shift any workpiece coordinate system or local coordinate

system. (This is the same operation as that specified by the"cancel" soft key on the manual-interrupt-distance screen.)

#5 DSC Specifies the type of coordinates to be read when the skip signalposition is read using custom macro system variables #5061 to #5080(ABSKP) in three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode.0: Coordinates in the coordinate system for which coordinate

conversion is not performed (workpiece coordinate system)1: Coordinates in the coordinate system for which coordinate

conversion has been performed (program coordinate system)

NOTEWhen the skip signal position is read in a mode otherthan three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode(G69 mode), coordinates in the coordinate system forwhich coordinate conversion is not performed(workpiece coordinate system) are read.For an explanation of system variables #5041 to#5060 (ABSOT), see the explanation of D3M (bit 5 ofparameter No. 6400).

#6 NZA Specifies whether to issue the PS181 alarm if the machine is in thelock state when the reference position return function is enabled, anda move command is specified for an axis along which the referenceposition return is not completed.0: Issue the alarm.1: Do not issue the alarm.

#7 ACP Specifies whether to perform the automatic workpiece coordinatesystem preset when the machine lock signal switches from on to off inthe preset state.0: Do not perform the preset.1: Perform the preset.


- 70 -

1220 Common offset from the workpiece reference point for all axes

[Input type] Setting input[Data type] Realaxis

[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis

[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)This is one of the parameters that set the position of the origin in awork coordinate system (G54 to G59) . While the offset of the originof a workpiece coordinate system differ for each work coordinatesystem, this parameter provides an offset common to all workpiececoordinate systems. Normally, this parameter is set automatically bysignal input (external data input) from the machine.

1221 Offset of the origin of workpiece coordinate system 1 (G54)








[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the offset of the origin of each of the workpiece coordinatesystems 1 to 6 (G54 to G59) .


- 71 -

1240 Coordinates of the first reference position in the machine coordinate system



[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis

[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the coordinates of the reference position in the machinecoordinate system.

1241 Coordinates of the second reference position in the machine coordinate

system



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the coordinates of the second reference position in the machinecoordinate system.

1242 Coordinates of the third reference position in the machine coordinate

system



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the coordinates of the third reference position in the machinecoordinate system.


- 72 -

1243 Coordinates of the fourth reference position in the machine coordinate

system



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the coordinates of the fourth reference position in the machinecoordinate system.

1244 Floating reference position in G30.1


[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting

table (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the coordinates of the floating reference position in the machinecoordinate system.

1260 Movement of one rotation of a rotary axis



[Unit of data] degree[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard

parameter setting table (B) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +999999.999)Set the value of movement of one rotation of a rotary axis.


- 73 -

1280 Coordinates of diagonal vertex 1 of area 1 in automatic feedrate control by area








[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] Real number axis

[Unit of data] Machine unit[Minimum unit of data] The increment system of the axis in question is followed.

[Valid data range] Nine digits in least input increment (See standard parameter settingtable (A).)(For IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)The positions, in the machine coordinate system, of two diagonalvertexes of each of areas 1 to 4 in automatic feedrate control by areaare set.


- 74 -

4.9 FEEDRATE PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1400 AND LATER)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1400 AOV LRP SFP RPD TDR RDR


#0 RDR Specifies whether dry runs can be performed for the rapid traversecommand.0: Cannot be performed.1: Can be performed.

#1 TDR Specifies whether dry runs can be performed for the threading andtapping commands.0: Cannot be performed.1: Can be performed.

#2 RPD Specifies whether manual rapid traverse can be performed during theperiod from the power on to reference position return.0: Cannot be performed.1: Can be performed.

#3 SFP Specifies the feedrate of the skip function (G31) .0: Feedrate specified by the F code in the program1: Feedrate specified by parameter No. 1428

NOTESee the item on bit 5 of parameter No. 7200 formulti-step skip and high-speed skip.

#4 LRP Selects the method used for positioning (G00) .0: Non-linear interpolation (each axis moves independently at the

rapid traverse feedrate)1: Linear interpolation (tool path is linear)When using three-dimensional coordinate conversion, set 1.

#5 AOV Specifies whether to enable the secondary feedrate override.0: Disable.1: Enable.


- 75 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1401 RFO HTG NED


#1 NED Specifies effective range of external deceleration.0: Affects all feed movement.1: Affects only rapid traverse.

#2 HTG Specifies the type of feedrate that is used for velocity commands forhelical interpolation, helical involute interpolation, and three-dimensional circular interpolation, as follows:0: The velocity commands are specified using a tangential feedrate

for circular interpolation, involute interpolation, and three-dimensional circular interpolation.

1: The velocity commands are specified using a tangential feedratealso for a linear axis (or, for three-dimensional circularinterpolation, a specified axis other than the circularinterpolation axis) .

#3 RFO Specifies whether to stop during rapid traverse when the cuttingfeedrate override is set to 0%.0: Stop.1: Do not stop.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1402 CAFC POD ROV


#0 ROV Specifies override of the rapid traverse feedrate.0: The override is F0, F1, 50%, or 100%, as specified by input

signals ROV1 and ROV2.1: The override is determined by seven input signals *RV0B to

*RV6B (in 1% units) within a range from 0% to 100%.#2 POD Selects how to specify the PMC axis control override.

0: Specify in PMC axis control command block.1: Specify directly by input signal from PMC.

#5 CAFC Specifies whether to perform circular cutting point feedrate change incutter compensation mode and tool nose radius compensation modefor the inner arc only.0: Performed on the inner arc only.1: Performed on the inner and outer arcs.


- 76 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1403 OVR APO


#0 APO The least increment for the second feedrate override is0: 1%1: 0.01%This parameter is effective only when AOV (bit 5 of parameter No.1400) is 1.

#6 OVR In look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation and fineHPCC:0: Override is disabled for deceleration functions such as

deceleration based on feedrate difference and deceleration basedon acceleration rate.

1: Override is enabled for deceleration functions such asdeceleration based on feedrate difference and deceleration basedon acceleration rate.

This function allows the following feedrates to be overridden:- Feedrate decelerated by deceleration based on feedrate

difference in look-ahead acceleration/deceleration beforeinterpolation

- Feedrate decelerated by deceleration based on acceleration ratein fine HPCC.

- Feedrate decelerated by deceleration based on acceleration ratein circular interpolation

- Feedrate decelerated by acceleration clamp in involuteinterpolation

- Minimum feedrate for deceleration based on acceleration rate infine HPCC and circular interpolation

- Maximum feedrate of fine HPCCEven when the feedrate is overridden by this function, the resultingfeedrate does not exceed the maximum cutting feedrate (parameter No.1422).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1404 NDI POV PRO D3E


#0 D3E Specifies which external deceleration signal is effective duringcutting feed or linear interpolation positioning in three-dimensionalcoordinate conversion mode.0: The external deceleration signal of the program command axis is

effective.1: The external deceleration signal of the travel axis is effective.


- 77 -

#1 PRO Specifies whether to enable override for rapid traverse, referenceposition return, and positioning in the machine coordinate system inaxis control by PMC.0: Disables override.1: Enables override.

#2 POV Specifies the override signals that can be used for rapid traverse,reference position return, and positioning in the machine coordinatesystem in axis control by PMC.0: ROV1 and ROV2, or RV0B to RV6B (signals for CNC axes)1: ROV1E and ROV2E (signals for PMC axes only)

#7 NDI Specifies the behavior of PMC-based axis control when diameterprogramming is used for the PMC controlled axis, as follows:0: The actual amount of travel becomes twice the specified value,but the feedrate remains as specified.1: The actual amount of travel remains as is, but the feedrate

becomes half the specified value.The parameter affects the amount of travel specified in the Rapidtraverse (00h) , Cutting feed (feed per minute) (01h) , Cutting feed(sec/block specification) (02h) , Feed per revolution (12h) , Skip(13h) , and External pulse synchronization (1Bh) commands.

It also affects the feedrate specified in the Cutting feed (feed perminute ) (01h) , Feed per revolution (12h) , and Skip (13h)commands. If parameter RPD (bit 2 of parameter No. 1409) = 1, thefeedrate specified in the Rapid traverse (00h) , Machine coordinatesystem selection (06h) , and 1st. to 4th. reference position return (17hto 1Ah) commands are also affected by this parameter, because therapid traverse rate is specified using the PMC signal. If parameterRPD (bit 2 of parameter No. 1409) = 0, the actual feedrate is notaffected by this parameter, because it is set to the rapid traverse ratespecified in the corresponding parameter.For the Cutting feed (sec/block specification) (02h) command, thetravel time remains unchanged from the value specified in command;it is not affected by this parameter.For the Machine coordinate system selection (06h) command, thetarget position is not affected by this parameter. Instead, it is specifiedin diameter, if bit 3 of parameter No. 1006 (specification by diameter)= 1.

(Example) If the specified amount of travel is 100.000 mm and thespecified feedrate is 100 mm/min

PMC signal-based commandNDI = 0 NDI = 1

Memory operation-based command

Feedrate 100mm/min 50mm/min 100mm/minPosition display 200.000mm 100.000mm 100.000mmActual machinetravel

100.000mm 50.000mm 50.000mm

Travel time 60 sec 60 sec 30 sec


- 78 -

CAUTION1 This parameter is valid only when parameter DIA

(bit 3 of parameter No. 1006) = 1.2 If a programmable diameter/radius switching is

used, that is, parameter PDC (bit 5 of parameterNo. 1001) = 1, parameter PDA (bit 3 of parameterNo. 1009) usually specifies whether diameter orradius is to be used. For the PMC axis, however,parameter NDI and parameter DIA (bit 3 ofparameter No. 1006) are used to determine theamount of travel and the feedrate. On the otherhand, whether the position display is displayed asa diameter or radius is determined by parameterPDA (bit 3 of parameter No. 1009) .

NOTEThis bit is effective only when DIA (bit 3 ofparameter No. 1006) is set to 1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1406 F1O


#0 F1O Specifies whether to enable feedrate override, second feedrateoverride, and override cancellation for the feedrates of F codes with aone-digit number (F1 to F9) .0: Disable them.1: Enable them.

NOTERapid traverse override is enabled for the feedrate ofF0, regardless of the setting of this parameter.


- 79 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1409 JFM FR2 FR1 POS TQF RPD F10


#1 F10 Specifies the unit of feedrate data specified in the Cutting feed (feedper minute) , Skip--feed per minute, and Continuous feed commandsunder PMC-based axis control, as follows:0:

Unit of dataIS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E

unit

Metric input 10.0 1.0 0.1 0.01 0.001 mm/minLinearaxis Inch input 1.0 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001 inch/min

Rotary axis 10.0 1.0 0.1 0.01 0.001 deg/min

1:Unit of data

IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-Eunit



#2 RPD Sets the feedrate of PMC-controlled axis in rapid traverse, machinecoordinate system selection, and 1st to 4th reference position return inaxis control by PMC.0: Feedrate set in parameter No. 14201: Feedrate specified as the feedrate data in the axis control

command#3 TQF Specifies whether to perform follow-up for torque control.

0: Not performed.1: Performed.

#4 POS The constant velocity command for PMC axis control is:0: A velocity command.1: A position command.

#5 FR1#6 FR2 FR1 and FR2 specify the unit of the feedrate data specified in the

cutting feed (feed per revolution) command under PMC axis control.FR2 FR1 Metric input Inch input

0 0 0.01 mm/rev 0.0001 inch/rev0 1 0.1 mm/rev 0.001 inch/rev1 0 1 mm/rev 0.01 inch/rev


- 80 -

#7 JFM This sets the command increment of feedrate data in the continuousfeed command (16H) during PMC axis control.0: The unit of feedrate data depends on the setting of parameter

F10 (bit 1 of parameter No. 1409) .1:

Unit of dataIS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E

unit



NOTEIf this parameter is set to 1, parameter F10 (bit 1 ofparameter No. 1409) must also be set to 1.

1410 Dry run feedrate


[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis

[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Set the dry run feedrate for when the jog feedrate dial is turned to100%. The unit of data depends on the increment system of the basicaxes.

1411 Arbitrary manual angle feedrate


[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min (machine unit)[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis

[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Set the arbitrary manual angle feedrate for when the jogging feedratedial is turned to 100%. The unit of data depends on the incrementsystem of the basic axes.

1412 Percentage value for rapid traverse override F1



Set the percentage value to use for rapid traverse override F1.


- 81 -

1413 Maximum number of buffered manual handle feed pulses


[Valid data range] 0 - 4The permissible flow amount is set. If such a handle feed thatmomentarily exceeds the rapid traverse rate is specified, the handlepulses for the excess of the rapid traverse rate are not discarded, butare accumulated according to the setting.

��

�)setting(

)rate traverserapid(amount flow ePermissibl

×=

Normally, 0 may be set.

1414 Magnification m of manual handle feed


[Valid data range] 0 - 2000Set the magnification m for when movement selection signals MP1and MP2 for manual handle feed are 0 and 1, respectively.Travel amount select signal

MP4 MP2 MP1Amount of travel

(manual handle feed)

0 0 0 Least input increment × 10 0 1 Least input increment × 100 1 0 Least input increment × m 1

0 1 1 Least input increment × n 2

*1 To be set in parameter No.1414.*2 To be set in parameter No.1418.

1417 Rapid traverse ratio during the period from the power on to manual

reference position return



Set the rapid traverse ratio to use in the below expression. Thisexpression is used to calculate the effective rapid traverse feedrateduring the power on to manual reference position return. (rapid traverse feedrate) = (feedrate set in parameter No. 1420) x(value set in this parameter) /100When 0 is set, the feedrate is assumed to be 100%.


- 82 -

1418 Magnification n of manual handle feed


[Valid data range] 0 - 2000Set the magnification rate for when movement selection signals MP1and MP2 for manual handle feed are 1.

Travel amount select signalMP4 MP2 MP1

Amount of travel (manual handle feed)

0 0 0 Least input increment × 10 0 1 Least input increment × 100 1 0 Least input increment × m 1

0 1 1 Least input increment × n 2

*1 To be set in parameter No.1414.*2 To be set in parameter No.1418.

1420 Rapid traverse feedrate along each axis



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Set the rapid traverse feedrate for each axis for when rapid traverseoverride is 100%.

1421 F0 feedrate for each axis for rapid traverse override



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Set the F0 feedrate for each axis for rapid traverse override.

1422 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Set the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis.


- 83 -

1423 Jogging feedrate for each axis



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Set the jogging feedrate for each axis for when the jog feedrate dial isturned to 100%.

1425 FL feedrate for each axis for manual reference position return




1426 External deceleration rate during cutting feed



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Set the external deceleration rate used during cutting feed andpositioning using linear interpolation (G00) .

1427 External deceleration rate for each axis during rapid traverse



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)This parameter sets the external deceleration feedrate used in rapidtraverse.


- 84 -

1428 Skip function (G31) feedrate


[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)

(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Set the feedrate for the skip function (G31) . This parameter is validwhen SKF, a bit of parameter No. 1400, is set to 1, namely the skipfunction feedrate is the value set in this parameter.

NOTESee parameter Nos. 7211 to 7214 for multi-step andhigh-speed skip.

1430 Upper limit on the feedrate for feed per minute under PMC axis control



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)This parameter specifies the upper limit on the feedrate for feed perminute under PMC axis control.

1450 Resolution of the feedrate specified by the F code with a one-digit number


[Valid data range] 1 - 127Set the constant used to determine the change in the feedrate when themanual pulse generator is rotated one graduation while that F codewith a one-digit number is specified. Fmaxi∆F = (i = 1, 2) 100XThis parameter is represented in the above expression as the letter X.Set X to determine how many times the manual pulse generator needsto be rotated for the feedrate to become Fmax. Fmax in the aboveexpression represents the upper limit for the feedrate specified by theF code with a one-digit number. The limit is set in parameter Nos.1460 and 1461.Fmax1: Upper feedrate limit for F1 to F4 (1460)Fmax2: Upper feedrate limit for F5 to F9 (1461)


- 85 -

1451 F1 feedrate

1452 F2 feedrate

1453 F3 feedrate

1454 F4 feedrate

1455 F5 feedrate

1456 F6 feedrate

1457 F7 feedrate

1458 F8 feedrate

1459 F9 feedrate

[Input type] Setting input[Data type] Real


[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Specify the feedrate assigned to the F code with a one-digit numberFn (n=1 to 9) . When the feedrate is changed by the manual pulsegenerator, this parameter changes along with the change in thefeedrate.

1460 Upper feedrate limit for F1 to F4



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Set the upper limits for the feedrates specified by the F codes with aone-digit number. When the feedrate is increased by turning themanual pulse generator, these upper limits are used to clamp thefeedrate. The upper limit of feedrates for F1 to F4 is specified in thisparameter.


- 86 -

1461 Upper feedrate limit for F5 to F9



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Set the upper limits for the feedrates specified by the F codes with aone-digit number. When the feedrate is increased by turning themanual pulse generator, these upper limits are used to clamp thefeedrate. The upper limit of feedrates for F5 to F9 is specified in thisparameter.

1472 Feedrate when the normal-direction control axis swivels


[Unit of data] degree/min[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis

[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Set the feedrate used when the normal-direction control axis swivels.

1478 Allowable feedrate difference for corner deceleration based on the feedrate

difference



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)When the deceleration based on the corner feedrate difference is used,if a change in a feedrate component on each axis at a boundarybetween blocks is about to exceed the value set in this parameter,acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is applied to reduce thefeedrate to the value obtained for that purpose. This reduces theimpact on the machine around corners and the machining error.


- 87 -

1483 Lower feedrate limit for the deceleration function based on the acceleration

of fine HPCC



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)The deceleration function based on the acceleration of fine HPCCautomatically calculates the optimum feedrate according to thegeometry.Depending on the geometry, the calculated feedrate may become verylow.If this occurs, to prevent the feedrate from becoming too low,deceleration to a feedrate below that specified for this parameter canbe suppressed.If, however, the override by the deceleration function based on thecutting load is enabled, the feedrate may become lower than the lowerfeedrate limit.The lower feedrate limit in deceleration based on the accelerationduring circular interpolation in a mode other than fine HPCC modecan be specified for parameter No. 1491.

NOTEDuring involute interpolation, the lower feedrate limitfor the "acceleration clamp in the vicinity of the basiccircle" of involute interpolation automatic feedratecontrol is applied.

1491 Lower feedrate limit for the deceleration function based on the acceleration

during circular interpolation (for normal mode)



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)The deceleration function based on the acceleration during circularinterpolation automatically calculates the optimum feedrate so that theacceleration resulting from changes in the travel direction duringcircular interpolation does not exceed the allowable accelerationspecified for parameter No. 1665.If the arc radius is very small, the calculated feedrate may becomevery low.If this occurs, to prevent the feedrate from becoming too low,deceleration to a feedrate lower than that specified for this parametercan be suppressed.


- 88 -

The lower feedrate limit for the deceleration function based on theacceleration in fine HPCC mode can be specified for parameter No.1483.

NOTEDuring involute interpolation, the lower feedrate limitfor the "acceleration clamp in the vicinity of the basiccircle" of involute interpolation automatic feedratecontrol is applied.

1493 Cutting feedrate




[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Set the cutting feedrate in this parameter for machines that do notrequire changes in the cutting feedrate during machining. By usingthis parameter, cutting feedrates (F codes) do not need to be specifiedin NC command data.

1494 Feedrate during reverse movement



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Set the feedrate to use during reverse movement. When set to 0,reverse movement is performed at the feedrate specified in theprogram.

NOTEThis parameter is not effective to blocks in rapidtraverse during reverse movement.


- 89 -

1496 Critical angle in the automatic exact stop check


[Unit of data] degree[Valid data range] 1 - 179

1497 Distance to travel of minute blocks in the automatic exact stop check


[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis

[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standardparameter setting table (B) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +999999.999)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1517 FCC FNW ATDF LAA ROU MED FIN SET


#0 SET Specifies whether the automatic setting function is enabled on theHPCC (SETTING) screen.0: Enabled.1: Disabled.

#1 FIN Specifies whether the automatic tuning function (FINE) is enabled onthe HPCC (SETTING) screen.0: Enabled.1: Disabled.

#2 MED Specifies whether the automatic tuning function (MEDIUM) isenabled on the HPCC (SETTING) screen.0: Enabled.1: Disabled.

#3 ROU Specifies whether automatic tuning function (ROUGH) is enabled onthe HPCC (SETTING) screen.0: Enabled.1: Disabled.

#4 LAA Bit related to the enabling and disabling ofacceleration/deceleration before look-ahead interpolation0: Whether acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead

interpolation is enabled or disabled depends on theG05.1/G05 command and the state of MBF, bit 6 ofparameter No. 2401.

1: It is assumed that G05.1Q1 is always issued.When this parameter bit is set to 1, acceleration/decelerationbefore look-ahead interpolation is always specified regardless ofthe G05.1/G05 command.


- 90 -

NOTE1 If this parameter bit is set to 1, MBF, bit 6 of

parameter No. 2401 must also be set to 1.2 Under those conditions where

acceleration/deceleration before look-aheadinterpolation is not performed, such as threading,tapping mode, and a canned cycle,acceleration/deceleration before look-aheadinterpolation is automatically disabled.

3 When using an electronic gearbox, set thisparameter bit to 0.

4 When fine HPCC is used, and a multi-buffer offcommand (G05P1) is issued, deceleration withacceleration for linear interpolation is disabled.

#5 ATDF If processing-specific parameters are selected with the G05.1 Q1Rx: or G10 L80 Rx: command, execution parameters arechanged so that machining can be performed with the settingsfor each mode. When the fine HPCC mode is turned off afterthe end of machining,0: The execution parameters remain changed.1: The execution parameters are restored to the values prior to

the change (defaults).Conditions under which the parameters are restored- G05.1 Q0: is issued.- G05.1 Q1: is issued.- The CNC is reset.If this parameter bit is set to 1, the machining mode cannot bechanged by operating on MDI keys on the high-speed highprecision machining setup screen.

#6 FNW Specifies whether the method of determining the feedrate based onthe feedrate difference in acceleration/deceleration before look-aheadinterpolation and the method of determining the feedrate based on theacceleration of fine HPCC are the same as those of the 15B.0: Same as those of the 15B. Thus, the highest feedrate that does

not exceed the allowable feedrate difference or allowableacceleration for each axis is assumed.

1: In addition to the condition that the feedrate must not exceed theallowable feedrate difference and allowable acceleration, thecondition that the deceleration feedrate must be constant if thegeometry is the same must be satisfied in determining thefeedrate.

When this parameter is set to 1, the feedrate determined with thefeedrate difference or acceleration may be lower by up to 30% thanthat determined when it is set to 0.


- 91 -

#7 FCC If, in acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead interpolation, thereis an axis for which the acceleration time is one second or longer:0: The specified feedrate may not be attained because the precision

is important.1: The specified feedrate will be attained because the feedrate is

important.

NOTEWhen this parameter is set to 1, the precision ofcurve interpolation such as circular and NURBSinterpolation may reduce.

1518 Minimum value of the feed-forward factor for automatic calculation


[Valid data range] 0 - 10000Stores the minimum value of the feed-forward factor used forautomatic tuning. When automatic setting is performed on the HPCC(SETTING) screen, the minimum value is automatically initialized to94.0% (parameter value 9400) .

1519 Active parameter set number


[Valid data range] 0 - 2Stores the current active parameter set. Usually, the active parameterset is selected by pressing the [SLCT ACTIVE] soft key on the HPCC(SETTING) screen and, therefore, this parameter need not be directlyspecified.

1520 Finishing level (for finishing)


[Valid data range] 0 - 100Stores the finishing level for the finishing parameter set. Usually, thefinishing level is entered from the HPCC (SETTING) screen and,therefore, this parameter need not be directly specified.


- 92 -

1522 Post-interpolation acceleration/deceleration time constant (for finishing)



Stores the post-interpolation acceleration/deceleration time constantfor the finishing parameter set. Usually, the time constant is enteredfrom the HPCC (SETTING) screen. If a different value needs to beset for an axis, this parameter must be directly specified. To make thesetting effective during operation, the "SELECT ACTIVE" key mustbe pressed on the HPCC (SETTING) screen.

1524 Corner feedrate difference (for finishing)



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Stores the corner feedrate difference for the finishing parameter set.Usually, the difference is entered from the HPCC (SETTING) screen.If a different value needs to be set for an axis, this parameter must bedirectly specified. To make the setting effective during operation, the"SELECT ACTIVE" key must be pressed on the HPCC (SETTING)screen.

1529 Feed-forward factor (for finishing)


[Valid data range] 0 - 10000Stores the feed-forward factor for the finishing parameter set. Usually,the factor is entered from the HPCC (SETTING) screen. If a differentvalue needs to be set for an axis, this parameter must be directlyspecified. To make the setting effective during operation, the"SELECT ACTIVE" key must be pressed on the HPCC (SETTING)screen.

1533 Acceleration level (for finishing)



Stores the acceleration level for the finishing parameter set. Usually,the level is entered from the HPCC (SETTING) screen and, therefore,this parameter need not be directly specified.


- 93 -

1534 Tangent direction acceleration (for finishing)


[Unit of data] mm/sec/sec, inch/sec/sec, degree/sec/sec (machine unit)[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis

[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D) (When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 - +100000.0. Whenthe machine system is inch system, machine, 0.0 - +10000.0)Stores the tangent direction acceleration for the finishing parameterset. Usually, the acceleration is entered from the HPCC (SETTING)screen. If a different value needs to be set for an axis, this parametermust be directly specified. To make the setting effective duringoperation, the "SELECT ACTIVE" key must be pressed on the HPCC(SETTING) screen.

1535 Normal direction acceleration (for finishing)



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D) (When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 - +100000.0. Whenthe machine system is inch system, machine, 0.0 - +10000.0)Stores the normal direction acceleration for the finishing parameterset. Usually, the acceleration is entered from the HPCC (SETTING)screen. If a different value needs to be set for an axis, this parametermust be directly specified. To make the setting effective duringoperation, the "SELECT ACTIVE" key must be pressed on the HPCC(SETTING) screen.

1536 Time required to reach the maximum acceleration of pre-interpolation bell-

shaped acceleration/deceleration (for finishing)



Stores the pre-interpolation bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration timeconstant for the finishing parameter set. Usually, the time constant isentered from the HPCC (SETTING) screen. If a different value needsto be set for an axis, this parameter must be directly specified. Tomake the setting effective during operation, the "SELECT ACTIVE"key must be pressed on the HPCC (SETTING) screen.


- 94 -

1540 Finishing level (for medium finishing)


[Valid data range] 0 - 100Stores the finishing level for the medium machining parameter set.Usually, the level is entered from the HPCC (SETTING) screen and,therefore, this parameter need not be directly specified.

1542 Post-interpolation acceleration/deceleration time constant (for medium

finishing)



Stores the post-interpolation acceleration/deceleration time constantfor the medium machining parameter set. Usually, the acceleration isentered from the HPCC (SETTING) screen. If a different value needsto be set for an axis, this parameter must be directly specified. Tomake the setting effective during operation, the "SELECT ACTIVE"key must be pressed on the HPCC (SETTING) screen.

1544 Corner feedrate difference (for medium finishing)



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Stores the corner feedrate difference for the medium machiningparameter set. Usually, the difference is entered from the HPCC(SETTING) screen. If a different value needs to be set for an axis, thisparameter must be directly specified. To make the setting effectiveduring operation, the "SELECT ACTIVE" key must be pressed on theHPCC (SETTING) screen.

1549 Feed-forward factor (for medium finishing)


[Valid data range] 0 - 10000Stores the feed-forward factor for the medium machining parameterset. Usually, the factor is entered from the HPCC (SETTING) screen.If a different value needs to be set for an axis, this parameter must bedirectly specified. To make the setting effective during operation, the"SELECT ACTIVE" key must be pressed on the HPCC (SETTING)screen.


- 95 -

1553 Acceleration level (for medium finishing)



Stores the acceleration level for the medium machining parameter set.Usually, the level is entered from the HPCC (SETTING) screen and,therefore, this parameter need not be directly specified.

1554 Tangent direction acceleration (for medium finishing)



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D) (When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 - +100000.0. Whenthe machine system is inch system, machine, 0.0 - +10000.0)Stores the tangent direction acceleration for the medium machiningparameter set. Usually, the acceleration is entered from the HPCC(SETTING) screen. If a different value needs to be set for an axis, thisparameter must be directly specified. To make the setting effectiveduring operation, the "SELECT ACTIVE" key must be pressed on theHPCC (SETTING) screen.

1555 Normal direction acceleration (for medium finishing)



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D) (When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 - +100000.0. Whenthe machine system is inch system, machine, 0.0 - +10000.0)Stores the normal direction acceleration for the medium machiningparameter set. Usually, the acceleration is entered from the HPCC(SETTING) screen. If a different value needs to be set for an axis, thisparameter must be directly specified. To make the setting effectiveduring operation, the "SELECT ACTIVE" key must be pressed on theHPCC (SETTING) screen.


- 96 -


shaped acceleration/deceleration (for medium finishing)



Stores the pre-interpolation bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration timeconstant for the medium machining parameter set. Usually, the timeconstant is entered from the HPCC (SETTING) screen. If a differentvalue needs to be set for an axis, this parameter must be directlyspecified. To make the setting effective during operation, the"SELECT ACTIVE" key must be pressed on the HPCC (SETTING)screen.

1560 Finishing level (for rough finishing)


[Valid data range] 0 - 100Stores the finishing level for the rough machining parameter set.Usually, the level is entered from the HPCC (SETTING) screen and,therefore, this parameter need not be directly specified.

1562 Post-interpolation acceleration/deceleration time constant (for rough

finishing)



Stores the post-interpolation acceleration/deceleration time constantfor the rough machining parameter set. Usually, the acceleration isentered from the HPCC (SETTING) screen. If a different value needsto be set for an axis, this parameter must be directly specified. Tomake the setting effective during operation, the "SELECT ACTIVE"key must be pressed on the HPCC (SETTING) screen.

1564 Corner feedrate difference (for rough finishing)



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Stores the corner feedrate difference for the rough machiningparameter set. Usually, the difference is entered from the HPCC(SETTING) screen. If a different value needs to be set for an axis, thisparameter must be directly specified. To make the setting effective


- 97 -

during operation, the "SELECT ACTIVE" key must be pressed on theHPCC (SETTING) screen.

1569 Feed-forward factor (for rough finishing)


[Valid data range] 0 - 10000Stores the feed-forward factor for the rough machining parameter set.Usually, the factor is entered from the HPCC (SETTING) screen. If adifferent value needs to be set for an axis, this parameter must bedirectly specified. To make the setting effective during operation, the"SELECT ACTIVE" key must be pressed on the HPCC (SETTING)screen.

1573 Acceleration level (for rough finishing)



Stores the acceleration level for the rough machining parameter set.Usually, the level is entered from the HPCC (SETTING) screen and,therefore, this parameter need not be directly specified.

1574 Tangent direction acceleration (for rough finishing)



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D) (When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 - +100000.0. Whenthe machine system is inch system, machine, 0.0 - +10000.0)Stores the tangent direction acceleration for the rough machiningparameter set. Usually, the acceleration is entered from the HPCC(SETTING) screen. If a different value needs to be set for an axis, thisparameter must be directly specified. To make the setting effectiveduring operation, the "SELECT ACTIVE" key must be pressed on theHPCC (SETTING) screen.


- 98 -

1575 Normal direction acceleration (for rough finishing)



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D) (When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 - +100000.0. Whenthe machine system is inch system, machine, 0.0 - +10000.0)Stores the normal direction acceleration for the rough machiningparameter set. Usually, the acceleration is entered from the HPCC(SETTING) screen. If a different value needs to be set for an axis, thisparameter must be directly specified. To make the setting effectiveduring operation, the "SELECT ACTIVE" key must be pressed on theHPCC (SETTING) screen.


shaped acceleration/deceleration (for rough finishing)



Stores the pre-interpolation bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration timeconstant for the rough machining parameter set. Usually, the timeconstant is entered from the HPCC (SETTING) screen. If a differentvalue needs to be set for an axis, this parameter must be directlyspecified. To make the setting effective during operation, the"SELECT ACTIVE" key must be pressed on the HPCC (SETTING)screen.


- 99 -

4.10 ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROLPARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1600 AND LATER)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1600 NEX JGE CTE REX


#0 REX Specifies acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse as follows:0: constant-acceleration acceleration/deceleration.1: constant-time acceleration/decelerationWhen setting this parameter to 1, set the acceleration/decelerationtime constant for parameter No. 1628.

#4 CTE Specifies method of acceleration/deceleration used during cuttingfeed and dry runs.0: Linear acceleration/deceleration is used. However, when the

bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration option is selected, bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is used.

1: Exponential acceleration/deceleration#5 JGE Specifies the method of acceleration/deceleration used during

jogging.0: Linear acceleration/deceleration is used. However, when the

bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration option is selected, bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is used.

1: Exponential acceleration/deceleration#7 NEX Specifies the rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration type when the

acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse is constant-accelerationtime (bit 0 of parameter No. 1600 (REX) = 1) .0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration1: Linear or bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration. Which of them

is effective depends on bit 5 of parameter No. 1601 (RTB) .

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1601 RTB


#5 RTB Specifies acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse as follows:0: Linear acceleration/deceleration1: Bell-shaped acceleration/decelerationTo apply bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration to the correspondingaxis, specify time constant T1 in parameter No. 1620 and timeconstant T2 in parameter No. 1636, in addition to setting this bit to 0.


- 100 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1603 FRP


#5 FRP To linear type rapid traverse:0: Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied.

The type of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation isdetermined by bit 0 (REX) of parameter No. 1600, bit 7 (NEX)of parameter No. 1600, and bit 5 (RTB) of parameter No. 1601.

1: Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is applied.The maximum allowable acceleration for each axis is set inparameter No. 1671.When using bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration beforeinterpolation, set the acceleration change period in parameter No.1672.

When this parameter is set to 1, acceleration/deceleration beforeinterpolation is also applied to rapid traverse if the conditions listedbelow are all satisfied. In this case, acceleration/deceleration afterinterpolation is not applied.- Bit 4 (LRP) of parameter No. 1400 = 1: Linear interpolation

type positioning- A non-zero value is set for any axis in parameter No. 1671.- Look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (or

fine HPCC) mode is currently set.- The conditions for look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before

interpolation are satisfied.If the conditions listed above are not satisfied, acceleration/

deceleration after interpolation is applied.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1604 MNJ


#0 MNJ Specifies whether both cutting feed acceleration/deceleration and jogfeed acceleration/deceleration are applied to manual handle interruptor simultaneous manual-automatic operation (interrupt type) .0: Both cutting feed acceleration/deceleration and jog feed

acceleration/deceleration are applied.1: Only cutting feed acceleration/deceleration is valid, and jog feed

acceleration/deceleration is invalid.


- 101 -

1620 Time constant (T) for linear acceleration/deceleration or time constant (T1)

for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse along each axis



Example: Linear type

FeedrateRapid traverse rate

(parameter No. 1420)

TimeTT

T: Value set in parameter No. 1620

Bell-shaped type



Time

T1

T2 T2 T2 T2

T1

T1: Value set in parameter No. 1620T2 : Value set in parameter No. 1636 (Set these parameters so thatT1 ≥ T2 .)Total acceleration (deceleration) time: T1 + T2Time of the linear portion: T1 - T2Time of the curved portions: T2 × 2


- 102 -

1621 FL feedrate for linear or bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration for rapid

traverse along each axis



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Specify the FL feedrate for linear or bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration or rapid traverse along each axis.

Example: Linear type

Feedrate Rapid traverse rate

(parameter No.1420)

TimeT

FL feedrate

T: Value set in parameter No. 1620 Bell-shaped type



Time

T1

T2 T2

FL feedrate

T1: Value set in parameter No. 1620T2: Value set in parameter No. 1636

NOTEWhen the feedrate is decelerated to the value set inthis parameter at any point regardless of whetherduring a linear or nonlinear feedrate increase, thetool moves at that feedrate for the remainingdistance then stops.


- 103 -

1622 Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration time constant for each axis



For each axis, set the time constant used for acceleration/decelerationduring cutting feed.The time constant is fixed irrespective of the feedrate (fixed timeconstant method) .

Feedrate

TimeTime constant

Linear acceleration/deceleration after

cutting feed interpolation

Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after

cutting feed interpolation

Feedrate

TimeTime constant

NOTEHowever, note that the valid range is 0 to 2000 whenthe bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration option isprovided.Except in special cases, this time constant should beset to the same value for all axes. When differentvalues are specified, the desired straight and curvedlines will not be obtained.


- 104 -

1623 FL feedrate for cutting feed acceleration/deceleration after interpolation

along each axis




NOTEBe sure to always set 0 in this parameter for all axes,except for a special application. Otherwise, correctlinear or circular figures cannot be obtained.

1624 Jog acceleration/deceleration time constant for each axis



For each axis, set the time constant used for acceleration/decelerationduring jog feed.

1625 FL feedrate for each axis for acceleration/deceleration during jog feed



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)For each axis, set the FL feedrate used for acceleration/decelerationduring jog feed.

1626 Time constant for each axis for acceleration/deceleration during threading

cycle



For each axis, set the time constant used for exponentialacceleration/deceleration during the threading cycle (G76 and G78(G92 in G code system A) ) .


- 105 -

1627 FL feedrate for each axis for acceleration/deceleration during the threading

cycle



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)For each axis, set the FL feedrate used for acceleration/decelerationduring the threading cycle. Except in special cases, set this parameterto 0.

NOTEThe time constant in parameter No. 1622 and the FLfeedrate in parameter No. 1623 are used duringnormal threading (G33 (G32 in G code system A)).

1628 Time constant for rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration with constant

time for individual axes



Specifies the time constant for rapid traverse with constant time forindividual axes.This parameter is effective only when bit 0 of parameter No. 1600(REX) is set to 1.

1629 FL feedrate for rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration with constant time

for each axis



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Specify the FL feedrate for rapid traverse acceleration/decelerationwith constant time along each axis.


- 106 -

1635 Time constant for cutting feed acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in

the mode of look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation



In the mode of look-ahead acceleration/deceleration beforeinterpolation and in fine HPCC mode, this parameter is used insteadof the ordinary time constant (parameter No. 1622) .Be sure to always set the same time constant in this parameter for allaxes, except for a special application. Otherwise, correct linear orcircular figures cannot be obtained.

1636 Time constant for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse

along each axis (T2)



Set time constant T2 of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration forrapid traverse along each axis. Specify this parameter so that it doesnot exceed the value of parameter No. 1620 (T1) .

1644 Parameter 1 to set acceleration/deceleration for each axis when a constant

feedrate command for PMC axis control is specified


[Unit of data] min-1


Parameter 1(No.1644)

Parameter 2(No.1645)

Feedrate

Time


- 107 -

1645 Parameter 2 to set acceleration/deceleration for each axis when a constant

feedrate command for PMC axis control is specified



Specify the time it takes to reach the feedrate set in parameter 1.

NOTEWhen this parameter is set to 0, theacceleration/deceleration function is disabled.

1656 Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before

interpolation



This parameter sets the acceleration change period in bell-shapedacceleration/deceleration before interpolation (the time taken for thechange from the constant speed state (A) to the certainacceleration/deceleration state (C) using an acceleration calculatedbased on the acceleration set in parameter No. 1660: the period of (B)in the following figure) .

Tangential feedrate

Optimum inclination is automatically

calculated based on the value set in

parameter No. 1660.

Set the period in parameter No.

1656.

(A) (B) (B) (B) (B)(A) (A)(C) (C)


- 108 -

1660 Maximum allowable acceleration of acceleration/deceleration before

interpolation for each axis



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D) (When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 - +100000.0. Whenthe machine system is inch system, machine, 0.0 - +10000.0)Specify the maximum allowable acceleration ofacceleration/deceleration before interpolation for each axis.If a value greater than 100000.0 is set, it is clamped to 100000.0.If 0 is set, it is regarded to be 100000.0. If 0 is set for all axes, look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation will not beperformed.

If the allowable acceleration for one axis is twice as large as that foranother or more, the feedrate may temporarily reduce around cornerswhere the direction to travel changes suddenly.

1663 Allowable acceleration in the deceleration function based on the

acceleration for each axis of fine HPCC



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D) (When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 - +100000.0. Whenthe machine system is inch system, machine, 0.0 - +10000.0)Specify the allowable acceleration that may occur due to changes inthe direction of tool travel.For an axis for which this parameter is set to 0, the decelerationfunction based on the acceleration is disabled. If 0 is set for all axes,the feedrate is not determined based on the acceleration.In the 15B, the time for the maximum cutting rate (parameter No.1422) was set for parameter No. 1643 to set the allowableacceleration. In the 15i, on the other hand, the acceleration is directlyspecified for this parameter.

NOTEDuring involute interpolation, the allowableacceleration for the "acceleration clamp in thevicinity of the basic circle" of involuteinterpolation automatic feedrate control isapplied.


- 109 -

1665 Allowable acceleration in the deceleration function based on the

acceleration during circular interpolation for each axis (for normal mode)



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D) (When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 - +100000.0. Whenthe machine system is inch system, machine, 0.0 - +10000.0)Specify the allowable acceleration in the deceleration function basedon the acceleration during circular interpolation for each axis.The feedrate is controlled so that the acceleration resulting fromchanges in the direction of travel during circular interpolation doesnot exceed the value of this parameter.For an axis for which 0 is set for this parameter, the accelerationfunction based on the acceleration is disabled.If different values are set for this parameter for different axes, thefeedrate is determined based on the lower acceleration of thespecified two circular axes.This parameter is effective when fine HPCC mode is not used(ordinary mode) . In fine HPCC mode, parameter No. 1663 is used.The "deceleration function based on the acceleration during circularinterpolation" is equivalent to the "feedrate clamp with the arc radius"in the 15B.In the 15B, the upper feedrate limit, lower feedrate limit, and arcradius were specified for parameters Nos. 1490 to 1492. In thefeedrate clamp based on the acceleration in the 15i, the allowableacceleration is set for this parameter.

NOTEDuring involute interpolation, the allowableacceleration for the "acceleration clamp in the vicinityof the basic circle" of involute interpolation automaticfeedrate control is applied.

1670 Acceleration for each axis for deceleration stop at power failure


[Unit of data] mm/sec/sec, inch/sec/sec, degrees/sec/sec (machine unit)[Minimum unit of data] The increment system of the axis in question is followed.

[Valid data range] See the standard parameter setting table (D).(For millimeter machines, 0.0 to +100000.0. For inch machines, 0.0to +10000.0)Set an acceleration value to be applied to deceleration stop of thetarget axis upon a power failure.If this parameter is set to 0 for an axis, deceleration is not performedfor that axis upon a power failure.


- 110 -

1671 Maximum allowable acceleration for each axis in acceleration/deceleration

before interpolation to linear-type rapid traverse


[Unit of data] mm/sec/sec, inch/sec/sec, degrees/sec/sec (machine unit)[Minimum unit of data] The increment system of the axis in question is followed.

[Valid data range] See the standard parameter setting table (D).(For millimeter machines, 0.0 to +100000.0; for inch machines, 0.0 to+10000.0)This parameter sets the maximum allowable acceleration ofacceleration/deceleration before interpolation to linear-type rapidtraverse. If a value in excess of 100000.0 is set, the acceleration isclamped to 100000.0.If 0 is set, the following value is assumed: 1000.0 mm/sec/sec 100.0 inch/sec/sec 100.0 degrees/sec/secIf 0 is set for all axes, acceleration/deceleration before interpolation isnot performed.

1672 Acceleration change period of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before

interpolation to linear-type rapid traverse


[Unit of data] msec[Valid data range] 0 to 200

This parameter sets the acceleration change period of bell-shapedacceleration/deceleration before interpolation to linear type-rapidtraverse (the period during which the acceleration changes from theconstant feedrate state (A) to the constant acceleration/decelerationstate (C) with the acceleration calculated based on the accelerationvalue set in parameter No. 1671: portion (B) in the followingfigure).

Tangential feedrate

Maximum acceleration is calculated

automatically so that the maximum

allowable acceleration for each axis set in

parameter No. 1671 is not exceeded.

Set period in parameter No. 1672.

(A) (B) (B) (B) (B)(A) (A)(C) (C)


- 111 -

4.11 SERVO PARAMETER (DATA NO. 1700 TO 1999 AND 2600AND LATER)

The following parameters are not explained in this manual. Refer to FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α seriesPARAMETER MANUAL (B-65150E) .

No. Data type Contents1702 Word axis Fine acceleration/deceleration time (BELLTC)1703 Word axis Magnetic saturation compensation (base/coefficient)1704 Word axis Deceleration torque limit (base/coefficient)1705 Word axis AMR conversion coefficient 11706 Word axis Center frequency of notch filter (Hz)1707 Word axis (Reserve)1708 Word axis (Reserve)1709 Word axis DPFB SPSY1713 Word axis Limit speed for enabling position gain switching (in units of 0.01 min-1)1714 Word axis Limit speed for disabling low-speed integration in acceleration1715 Word axis Limit speed for enabling low-speed integration in deceleration1718 Word axis Number of position feedback pulse1719 Word axis Vibration-damping control gain1724 Word axis Stage 2 offset for two-stage backlash acceleration1727 Word axis Abnormal load detection dynamic friction, cancel1729 Word axis Dual position feedback: Level on which the difference in error between the semi-closed

and full-closed modes becomes too large1730 Word axis Non-interference control coefficient1732 Word axis Conversion coefficient for the number of feedback pulses1733 Word axis Detection resistance conversion coefficient1737 Word axis Position feedback switching time constant1735 Word axis Non-interference control coefficient1736 Word axis Magnetic flux decrease compensation (coefficient)1740 Bit axis ABGO IQOB1741 Bit axis CPEE SPVC CROF1742 Bit axis DUAL OVS1 FAGO1743 Bit axis FRC21749 Bit axis FADL1752 Word axis Magnetic flux decrease compensation (base/limit)1753 Word axis Correction of two thrust ripples per magnetic pole pair1754 Word axis Correction of four thrust ripples per magnetic pole pair1755 Word axis Correction of six thrust ripples per magnetic pole pair1761 Word axis AMR conversion coefficient 21765 Word axis Unexpected disturbance detection threshold in rapid traverse1766 Word axis Fine acceleration/deceleration time constant 2 (in ms)1767 Word axis Position feed-forward coefficient for cutting1768 Word axis Velocity feed-forward coefficient for cutting1788 Word axis Maximum amplifier current1806 Bit axis AMR7 AMR6 AMR5 AMR4 AMR3 AMR2 AMR1 AMR01807 Bit axis VFSE PFSE1808 Bit axis V0FS OVSC BLEN NPSP PIEN OBEN TGAL1809 Bit axis DLY01852 Word axis Current loop integral gain (PK1)1853 Word axis Current loop proportional gain (PK2)1854 Word axis Current loop gain (PK3)


- 112 -

No. Data type Contents1855 Word axis Velocity loop integral gain (PK1V)1856 Word axis Velocity loop proportional gain (PK2V)1857 Word axis Velocity loop incomplete integral gain (PK3V)1858 Word axis Velocity loop gain (PK4V)1859 Word axis Observe parameter (POA1)1860 Word axis Backlash acceleration amount1861 Word axis Dual position feedback maximum amplitude1862 Word axis Observe parameter (POK1)1863 Word axis Observe parameter (POK2)1865 Word axis Current dead-zone compensation (PPMAX)1866 Word axis Current dead band compensation (PDDP)1867 Word axis Current dead-zone compensation (PHYST)1868 Word axis Back electromotive force compensation (EMFCMP)1869 Word axis Current phase compensation (PVPA)1870 Word axis Current phase compensation (PALPH)1871 Word axis Back electromotive force compensation (EMFBAS)1872 Word axis Torque limit1873 Word axis Back electromotive force compensation (EMFLMT)1874 Word axis Motor number1875 Word axis Load inertia ratio1876 Word axis Number of velocity pulses1877 Word axis Overload protection coefficient (OVC1)1878 Word axis Overload protection coefficient (OVC2)1879 Word axis1883 Bit axis SFCM BRKC FEED1884 Bit axis DCBE ACCF SPVE PKVE SBSM FCBL1891 Word axis Number of position pulses1892 Word axis Software disconnection alarm level1893 Word axis Overload protection coefficient (OVCLMT) (OVCLMT)1894 Word axis 250 s̊es acceleration feedback1895 Word axis Torque command filter1951 Bit axis FRCA FAD1952 Bit axis LAXD PFBS VCTM SPPC SPPR VFBA TNOM1953 Bit axis BLST BLCU ADBL IQOB SERD1954 Bit axis POLE HBBL HBPE BLTE LINE1955 Bit axis RCCL FFALWY SYNMOD1956 Bit axis STNG VCM2 VCM1 MSFE1957 Bit axis BLAT TDOU SSG1 PGTW1958 Bit axis NFL8 NFL7 NFL5 K2VC ABNT1959 Bit axis PK25 OVCR RISC HTNG DBST1960 Bit axis PFBC MOVO1961 Word axis Feed forward coefficient1962 Word axis Velocity feed forward coefficient1963 Word axis Backlash acceleration timing1964 Word axis Time during which backlash acceleration is effective1965 Word axis Static friction compensation1966 Word axis Stop state judgement parameter1967 Word axis Current loop gain variable with velocity1969 Word axis 1-ms acceleration feedback gain1970 Word axis Overshoot prevention counter1971 Word axis Dual position feedback conversion coefficient (numerator)1972 Word axis Dual position feedback conversion coefficient (denominator)1973 Word axis Primary delay time constant of dual position feedback


- 113 -

No. Data type Contents1974 Word axis Dual position feedback zero-point amplitude1975 Word axis Backlash acceleration stop amount1976 Word axis Brake control timer (ms)1977 Word axis Numerator of the flexible feed gear1978 Word axis Denominator of the flexible feed gear1979 Word axis Rated current parameter1980 Word axis Torque offset1981 Word axis Machine feedback gain1982 Word axis Base pulse of backlash acceleration1984 Word axis Nonlinear control parameter1985 Word axis Advanced control feed-forward coefficient1990 Word axis Static friction compensation stop parameter1991 Word axis Current phase compensation coefficient1992 Word axis N-pulse suppression level1994 Word axis Overshoot compensation valid level1995 Word axis Final clamp value for the actual-current limit1996 Word axis Track back amount applied when an unexpected disturbance is detected1997 Word axis Unexpected disturbance detection threshold in cutting1998 Word axis Torque constant


- 114 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1707 HR3

[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] Bit axis

#0 HR3 HIGH SPEED HRV mode is0: Disabled.1: Enabled.Refer to the "FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series PARAMETERMANUAL (B-65150E)" for details.

1716 Torque command difference threshold for torque difference alarm detection

for synchronous control


[Valid data range] 0 - 14564An alarm is issued if the absolute value of a torque commanddifference between two axes subjected to synchronous controlexceeds this value. Specify the same value for master and slave axesof synchronous control.If the value is 0, torque difference alarm detection is disabled.A servo axis number combination for master and slave axes subjectedto synchronous control must be, for example, (1, 2) or (3, 4) , inwhich the master axis is assigned an odd number and the slave axis isassigned the even number that is one greater than the master axisnumber.

1738 Abnormal load detection alarm timer


[Unit of data] msec[Valid data range] From 0 through 32767

Specify the period of time from when an abnormal load is detected towhen a servo alarm is issued.If 0 is set, it is regarded to be 200 msec.

1764 Offset output time of the Inductosyn-type absolute-position detector



When the offset output time of the Inductosyn-type absolute-positiondetector is 20 ms or longer, use this parameter to specify the outputtime.For an explanation of offset output time, refer to the manual suppliedwith the scale used.


- 115 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1800 IVO SAK CIN CCI RFW FVF CVR


#1 CVR Specifies whether to issue a servo alarm if velocity control readysignal VRDY turns on before position control ready signal PRDYturns on.0: Does not issue a servo alarm.1: Issues a servo alarm.Normally, set CVR to 1.

#2 FVF Specifies whether to perform follow-up in the servo-off mode.0: Does not perform follow-up (mechanical clamp in the servo off

mode) .1: Performs follow-up (mechanical handle in the servo off mode) .

#3 RFW Specifies whether to enable forward feed control during rapidtraverse.0: Disables forward feed control.1: Enables forward feed control.Normally, forward feed control is enabled only when cutting feed isperformed. When this parameter is set to 1, forward feed is alsoenabled during rapid traverse. This decreases positional deviation inthe servo, reducing the time for entering an effective area duringpositioning.

#4 CCI Specifies the value to be used as the effective area during cutting feed(cutting-feed effective area) .0: Uses parameter 1826, which is also used for rapid traverse.1: Uses parameter 1838, which is used only for cutting feed.When a positioning block is specified or an exact stop is specified in acutting feed block, the block decelerates the tool at the end of theblock for a position check. The cutting/rapid traverse position checkfunction allows the effective area (parameter 1838) to be setseparately for cutting feed in addition to the effective area (parameter1826) for rapid traverse.For example, a larger effective area can be set for rapid traverse,while an ordinary small effective area is set for cutting feed. This canreduce machining time (positioning time) without reducing machiningprecision. The CCI bit (bit 4) of parameter 1800 is used to selectwhether this new function or the standard position check function isused. When this position check function is selected, it is effective forall axes. For axes that do not require this function, set the same datain parameters 1826 and 1838. When a rapid traverse block terminatesa position check is performed using the value set in rapid-traverse-specific parameter 1826. When a cutting feed block terminates andthe next block specifies cutting feed, a position check is performedusing the value set in cutting-specific parameter 1838; if the nextblock specifies rapid traverse, however, a position check is performedusing the value in rapid-traverse-specific parameter 1826.Furthermore, when a cutting feed block terminates, cutting-specificparameter 1838 can always be used for a position check regardless ofthe next block. This is specified by bit 5 of parameter 1800.


- 116 -

#5 CIN When CCI is 1, the CIN bit specifies the condition under which thecutting feed parameter defines the cutting-feed effective area.0: Used only when the next block specifies cutting feed.1: Always used regardless of the next block.The relationship of parameter between a rapid and a cutting isthe following graph.

Parameter CIN (No.1800 #5)

0 1

Rapid →Rapid

No.1827Rapid →

RapidNo.1827

Rapid →Cutting

No.1827Rapid →Cutting

No.1827

Cutting →Cutting

No.1827Cutting →

CuttingNo.1827

0

Cutting →Rapid

No.1827Cutting →

RapidNo.1827

Rapid →Rapid

No.1827Rapid →

RapidNo.1827

Rapid →Cutting

No.1827Rapid →Cutting

No.1827

Cutting →Cutting

No.1838Cutting →

CuttingNo.1838

ParameterCCI

(No.1800#4)

1

Cutting →Rapid

No.1827Cutting →

RapidNo.1838

Two parameter of CCI and CIN mentioned above can be applied for Cs axis.

#6 SAK Specifies whether to change the state of the servo ready signal SAwhen the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal DVAL is 1 or when theVRDY OFF alarm ignore signal for each axis, DVALn, is 1.0: The servo ready signal SA changes to 0.1: The servo ready signal SA retains its state of 1.

#7 IVO Specifies whether to release the emergency stop state when anemergency stop occurs with the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signalbeing 1.0: Does not release the emergency stop state until the VRDY OFF

alarm ignore signal changes to 0.1: Releases the emergency stop state.

NOTEEven when the system is reset when the VRDYOFF alarm ignore signal is at 1 and the motor isde-energized, the reset state can be released.


- 117 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #0

1801 FFN



#1 FFN Specifies whether to enable the feed-forward function in a mode otherthan Look-ahead acc/dec before interpolation mode0: Enable the function in a mode other than Look-ahead acc/dec

before interpolation mode.1: Enable the function only in Look-ahead acc/dec before

interpolation mode.To use the feed-forward function, set bit 1 of parameter No. 1883 to1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1802 TQO FUP SVF


#1 SVF Specifies whether to validate the servo off signal.0: Does not validate the servo off signal.1: Validates the servo off signal.

#3 FUP Whether follow-up is performed for each axis when the servo isturned off0: Not performed.1: Performed.Effective when FVF (bit 2 of parameter No. 1800) is 0.

#4 TQO Specifies whether to enable the torque override function.0: Disable the function. (100% override)1: Enable the function.


- 118 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1803 MVB CLP ADJ


#1 ADJ Specifies the axis along which to move in adjustment mode insynchronous control.0: Not an axis along which to move in adjustment mode.1: Axis along which to move in adjustment mode.When this parameter is set to "1," the axis enters adjustment mode.For an axis for which this parameter is set to "1," movement isperformed with a master axis move command.Specify the bit for only one of the master and slave axes.If a single master axis has multiple slave axes, set this bit to 1 for thataxis for which a synchronous error alarm is issued to recover the axis.When alarms are issued for multiple axes, recover one axis, thenchange this parameter to recover another axis.

#2 CLP Specifies whether to compensate for synchronous error insynchronous control.0: Compensates for synchronous error.1: Does not compensate for synchronous error. (Set this bit only for the master axis.)

#3 MVB Specifies whether to validate a command to move the machine in thedirection of increasing the synchronous error in the adjustment mode.0: Ignores the command.1: Validates the command.If a single master axis has multiple slave axes, reducing thesynchronous error on one axis by means of movement along themaster axis may result in increase in the synchronous error on anotherslave axis. When this parameter is set to "0," the master axis cannotmove in either direction. Use ADJ (bit 1 of parameter No. 1803) toallow movement along a slave axis, and perform the appropriateadjustment operation.


- 119 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1804 CNT RBK DGP PLC



#0 PLC PLC01 Specifies whether the value set in parameter No. 1876(number of speed feedback pulses) or parameter No. 1891 (number ofposition feedback pulses) exceeds 32767.0: The value set in parameter No. 1876 or No. 1891 does not

exceed 32767.1: The value set in parameter No. 1876 or No. 1891 exceeds 32767.When this parameter is set to 1, set parameter No. 1876 or 1891 toY10 of the original value.

#1 DGP Specifies whether to set the digital servo parameters specific to themotor at power-on.0: Sets the digital servo parameters specific to the motor.1: Does not set the digital servo parameters specific to the motor.When this bit is set to 0 after the motor type is specified, the standardsettings for the motor type are automatically set at power-on. This bitis also set to 1 at power-on.

#6 RBK Cutting feed/rapid traverse backlash compensation is:0: Not performed.1: Performed.

#7 CNT Specifies whether to specify spindle contour control for the serialinterface spindle.0: Does not specify spindle contour control.1: Specifies spindle contour control.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1810 NAD SCI



#1 SCI During servo-off, an in-position check is0: Not performed.1: Performed.


- 120 -

NOTEFor the FS15B, this parameter bit was specified asfollows. (This was not described in the manual.)#1 SCI During servo-off, an in-position check is0: Performed.1: Not performed.

#6 NAD Specifies whether to perform A/D conversion of spindle or servomotor current.0: Performs A/D conversion.1: Does not perform A/D conversion.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1815 APC APZ OPT



#1 OPT Specifies whether to use a separate pulse coder as the positiondetector.0: Does not use any separate pulse coder.1: Uses a separate pulse coder.

NOTERefer to PSL (bit 3 of parameter No. 1807).

#4 APZ Indicates whether relative positioning of the machine position andabsolute-position detector is complete when an absolute-positiondetector (absolute pulse coder) is used as the position detector.0: Not complete1: CompleteWhen an absolute-position detector is used: Set this bit to 0 whenprimary at-site adjustment is done or the absolute pulse coder isreplaced. Then turn on the power, and set the origin of the absolute-position detector by using, or example, manual reference positionreturn. Relative positioning of the machine position and absolute-position detector is complete and APZx is automatically set to 1.

#5 APC Indicates whether the position detector is0: a detector other than an absolute position detector.1: an absolute position detector (absolute pulse coder) .


- 121 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1816 ACM



#7 ACM Specify whether to use an optional command multiplication factor1/N.0: Does not use the factor.1: Uses the factor.This bit is effective only when an optional command multiplicationfactor option is provided.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1817 TDM HYB SYN



#1 SYN Specifies whether to execute synchronous control.0: Executes synchronous control when the synchronous control

selection signal SYNCx for the slave axis is "1."1: Always executes synchronous control.Set this parameter only for a slave axis.

#2 HYB Dual position feedback compensation clamp is:0: Not performed.1: Performed.

NOTEWith the FANUC Series 15i, the use of a functionequivalent to FANUC Series 15B hybrid control requiresthe dual position feedback function. When thecompensation clamp function for dual positionfeedback is used, therefore, a setting to enable dualposition feedback is required in addition to the setting ofthis bit.

#6 TDM Specifies whether to validate tandem control.0: Does not validate tandem control.1: Validate tandem control.Set this parameter for both master and slave axes.


- 122 -

1820 Command multiplier for each axis (CMR)



[Valid data range] See the following descriptions.i) When CMR = 0.5 to 48

Set ACM (bit 7 of parameter No. 1816) to 0.Then specify the value given by the following expression.Setting = CMR*2Valid range: 1 to 96

ii) When CMR = 1/2 to 1/27(An optional command multiplier (option) is required)Set ACM (bit 7 of parameter No. 1816) to 1.Then specify the value given by the following expression.Setting = 1/CMRValid range: 1 to 27

1821 Value of the numerator of a command multiplier for each axis (optional

command multiplier)



[Valid data range] 0 - 9999Specify the value of the numerator of a command multiplier for eachaxis. The optional command multiplier is required.


- 123 -

1822 Value of the denominator of a command multiplier for each axis (optional

command multiplier)



[Valid data range] 0 - 9999Specify the value of the denominator of a command multiplier foreach axis. The optional command multiplier is required. To use theoptional command multiplier n/m (n: 1821, m: 1822) , set a valueother than 0 in parameter No. 1821 and No. 1822.

1825 Servo loop gain for each axis


[Unit of data] 0.01/sec[Valid data range] 1 - 9999

Specify the position control loop gain for each axis.For a machine which performs linear or circular interpolation(cutting) , specify the same value for all axes. For a machine whichrequires only positioning, different values may be specified fordifferent axes. The larger the specified loop gain, the higher theposition control response. If the loop gain is too large, the servosystem becomes unstable.The relationships between the positioning deviation (amount of pulsesstored in the error counter) and feedrate are expressed as follows: Positioning deviation = feedrate/ (60*loop gain) Unit: Positioning deviation mm, inches, or deg Feedrate mm/min, inches/min, or deg/min loop gain 1/sec

1827 Axis-by-axis in-position width


[Unit of data] Detection unit[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999

Set an in-position width for each axis.If the difference between the machine position and specified position(absolute positional deviation value) is smaller than the in-positionwidth, it is assumed that the machine has reached the specifiedposition, that is, the machine is in position.When bit 4 (CCI) of parameter No. 1800 is set to 1, this parameterspecifies an in-position width for each axis at rapid traverse time.


- 124 -

1828 Positioning deviation limit for each axis while it is moving


[Unit of data] detection unit[Valid data range] 0 - 99999999

Specify the positioning deviation limit for each axis while it ismoving.If the positioning deviation limit of the axis is exceeded while the axisis moving, a servo alarm is issued and the machine stops immediately(same as an emergency stop) .Generally, specify a value larger than the positioning deviation in therapid traverse mode.

1829 Positioning deviation limit for each axis when it is stopped



Specify the positioning deviation limit for each axis when it isstopped.If the positioning deviation limit of the axis is exceeded when the axisis stopped, a servo alarm is issued and the machine stops immediately(same as an emergency stop) .

1830 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in the servo off mode



Specify the positioning deviation limit for each axis in the servo offmode.If the positioning deviation limit of the servo off mode is exceeded, aservo alarm is issued and the machine stops immediately (same as anemergency stop) .Generally, specify the same value as for the positioning deviationlimit for an axis when it is stopped.


- 125 -

1832 Feed-stop position deviation for each axis



Specify the feed-stop position deviation for each axis. If thepositioning deviation of an axis while it is moving exceeds the feed-stop position deviation for the axis, pulse distribution andacceleration/deceleration control are temporarily stopped. When thepositioning deviation becomes less than the feed-stop positiondeviation, pulse distribution and acceleration/deceleration control arerestarted.The feed-stop function is mainly used for decreasing overshoot whena large servo motor is accelerated or decelerated.Generally, specify the intermediate value between the positioningdeviation limit while the tool moving and the positioning deviationlimit for the axis in the rapid traverse mode as the feed-stop positiondeviation.

1837 Positioning deviation limit while the tool is moving in the rigid tapping mode



Specify the positioning deviation limit for a drilling axis while thetool is moving in the rigid tapping mode. In the rigid tapping mode,the position gain of a drilling axis is the same as that of the spindle.Generally, the position gain of the spindle must not be excessivelylarge. In the rigid tapping mode, therefore, the position gain of adrilling axis is smaller than the position gain in other modes. Thepositioning deviation limit for the drilling axis while the tool ismoving in the rigid tapping mode is provided separately because thepositioning deviation increases if the position gain decreases at thesame speed.

1838 Axis-by-axis in-position width at cutting feed time


[Unit of data] Detection uni[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999

Set an in-position width at cutting feed time for each axis.This parameter is used when bit 4 (CCI) of parameter No. 1800 is setto 1.


- 126 -

1841 Servo error amount with which reference position return assumed possible



Set the servo error amount with which reference position return isassumed possible.Usually, set 0. (If a value equal to or less than 0 is set, it is regardedto be 128.)If, during reference position return, a feedrate that exceeds thespecified value is not attained by the time the tool leaves the limitswitch for deceleration (the deceleration signal *DEC is restored to"1") , alarm "PS200 PULSCODER INVALID ZERO RETURN" isissued.If, during reference position return, a feedrate that exceeds thespecified servo error amount is not attained by the time the tool leavesthe limit switch for deceleration (the deceleration signal DEC i isrestored to "1") , alarm PS200 is issued.

1842 Torque difference alarm detection timer



Specify the time allowed before the beginning of torque differencealarm detection for synchronous control after the servo ready signal(SA[F000#6]) becomes 1.If the parameter is 0, 512 ms is assumed.

1843 Position deviation limit at torque limit skip



Set the position deviation limit during a torque limit skip commandfor each axis. If the position deviation exceeds the position deviationlimit, SP alarm (SV0109) is issued and the system stops instantly.


- 127 -

1844 Grid shift amount of the reference position shift function



[Unit of data] detection unit[Valid data range] -999999999 - 999999999

Distance to the first grid point found since the deceleration dog isturned off when the reference position shift amount (parameter No.1850) is set to 0.

NOTEWhen SFD (bit 4 of parameter No. 1008) is setto 1, the grid amount (parameter No. 1844) isset to 0, and the reference position shift amount(parameter No. 1850) is set to 0, a value isautomatically set. The automatically set valuemust not be changed.

1846 Distance with which the second-stage smooth backlash compensation is

started



For each axis, set a distance from the point where the direction of axismovement is reversed to the point where the second-stage smoothbacklash compensation is started.

1847 Distance with which the second-stage smooth backlash compensation is

terminated



For each axis, set a distance from the point where the direction of axismovement is reversed to the point where the second-stage smoothbacklash compensation is terminated.


- 128 -

1848 First-stage smooth backlash compensation amount


[Unit of data] Detection unit[Valid data range] -9999 to 9999

For each axis, set a first-stage smooth backlash compensation amount.

1849 Backlash compensation amount used for rapid traverse for each axis



Set the backlash compensation amount used in rapid traverse for eachaxis. (This parameter is valid when RBK, #6 of parameter 1804, isset to 1.)More precise machining can be performed by changing the backlashcompensation amount depending on the feedrate, rapid traverse or thecutting feed for positioning. Let the measured backlash at cutting feed be A and the measuredbacklash at rapid traverse be B. The backlash compensation amount isshown below depending on the change of feedrate (cutting feed orrapid traverse) and the change of the direction of movement.

Change of feed mode

Change ofmovement direction

Cutting feed↓

Cutting feed

Rapid traverse↓

Rapid traverse

Rapid traverse↓

Cutting feed

Cutting feed↓

Rapid traverse

Same direction 0 0 ±α ± (-α)Opposite direction ±A ±B ±(B+α) ± (B+α)

Note 1) α= (A-B)/2Note 2) The signs(±) of compensation values indicate the same directions as thoseused for indicating movement directions.


- 129 -

1850 Grid shift/reference position shift for each axis




Specify the grid shift for each axis.The grid position can be shifted by the amount specified in theparameter to move the reference position. The grid shift must notexceed the reference counter capacity (RC1x to RC4x (bits 0 to 3 ofparameter No. 1816) or parameter No. 1896) .

NOTEWhen SFD (bit 4 of parameter No. 1008) is set to 1, thisparameter indicates the "reference position shiftamount for each axis." In this case, the valid range is:-999999999 to 999999999.

1851 Backlash compensation for each axis



Specify the backlash compensation for each axis.When an axis moves in the direction opposite to the referenceposition return direction after power-on, the first backlashcompensation is made.

1862 Velocity control observer


[Valid data range] 0 - 32767The set value should be 3559.If the velocity loop observer is used (parameter no.1808#2=1) , the setvalue should be 956.

1863 Velocity control observer


[Valid data range] 0 - 32767The set value should be 3329.If the velocity loop observer is used (parameter no.1808#2=1) , the setvalue should be 510.


- 130 -

1875 Load-inertia ratio


[Valid data range] 0 - 32767 (Load inertia) / (Motor inertia) * 256For tandem control, set (Load inertia) / (Motor inertia) * 256/2to both the master and the slave axis.

1879 Direction of the motor revolution



[Valid data range] -111 - 111Specify the direction of the motor revolution.In the tandem control, switch over the revolution direction by thisparameter if it is different among the master axis and the slave axis.

1881 Permissible error at start of chopping compensation



Chopping compensation is made when the difference between theunderrun amounts at the top and bottom dead centers due to the servoposition control delay is less than the setting. When 0 is specified forthis parameter, no compensation is made.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1883 BCT


#6 BCT Setting of the vertical axis drop prevention function0: Does not delay the de-energizing timing. (The function is

disabled.)1: Delays the de-energizing timing. (The function is enabled.)


- 131 -

1896 Capacity of the reference counter for each axis




Specifies a desired reference counter capacity. When 0 is specified forthis parameter, the standard setting (data No. 1816) is used. In casedistance coded linear scale, specifies a distance of mark to mark ondistance coded scale. Even when PLC01 of data No. 1804 is set to 1,the unit of data is not multiplied by 10. Turn the power on again after specifying this parameter.

1910 Multiplication of the maximum permissible synchronous error immediately

after power-on



[Valid data range] 1 - 100Synchronous error alarm 2 is checked with the value equal to themaximum permissible error (parameter No. 1913) multiplied by thevalue of this parameter until synchronization is establishedimmediately after power-on.If the value exceeds 32767, it is clamped to 32767.

1912 Dead zone for the synchronous error on each axis



When the synchronous error does not exceed the setting, it is notcompensated for.Specify this parameter only for a slave axis.


- 132 -

1913 Maximum permissible synchronous error for synchronous error alarm 2




Specify the maximum permissible synchronous error for synchronouserror alarm 2.Specify this parameter only for a slave axis.

1914 Maximum permissible synchronous error for synchronous error alarm 1



Specify the maximum permissible synchronous error for synchronouserror alarm 1.Specify this parameter only for a slave axis.

1915 Compensation gain of the synchronous error for each axis


[Valid data range] 1 - 1024The gain of synchronization error compensation is set.As many pulses as the number of compensation pulses for every 8-msec sampling period, obtained from the following equation, areoutput to the slave axis.This setting is made for the slave axis only.

1024erroration synchronizpulseson Compensati

Ci×=

Ci: Compensation gain

1917 Synchronous error zero width 2 for an individual axis



Specify the synchronous error zero width 2 for synchronous errorsmoothing suppression.Specify this parameter only for a slave axis.The setting made for this parameter must be smaller than the valuespecified in parameter No. 1912.


- 133 -

NOTEThe setting made for this parameter must be smallerthan the value specified in parameter No. 1912.

1918 Synchronous error compensation gain 2 for an individual axis


[Valid data range] 0 - 1024Specify the synchronous error compensation gain 2 for synchronouserror smoothing suppression.Specify this parameter only for a slave axis.The setting made for this parameter must be smaller than the valuespecified in parameter No. 1915.

NOTEThe setting made for this parameter must be smallerthan the value specified in parameter No. 1915.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1930 SMS STH


#0 STH Turning mode of dual position feedback is:0: Disabled.1: Enabled.

#4 SMS Specifies whether to enable the synchronous error compensationsmoothing suppress function.0: Disabled1: EnabledSpecify this parameter only for a slave axis.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1951 TQC


#7 TQC Specifies whether to perform torque control for the relevant axis.0: Torque control is not performed for the axis.1: Torque control is performed for the axis.


- 134 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1952 VFA


#2 VFA In the tandem control, the averaging function of the velocity feedbackis,0: valid.1: invalid.This parameter should be set only for the master axis.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1955 EGB


#0 EGB Specifies the axis on which to perform synchronization when usingthe electronic gear box function (EGB) .0: Axis on which to perform synchronization with the EGB.1: Not an axis on which to perform synchronization with the EGB.Set 1 for both the EGB slave and dummy axes.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1957 TQO


#5 TQO Specifies which to output to the check board for each axis.0: Torque command1: Estimated load torque

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1958 ABN


#0 ABN Specifies whether the estimated load torque output function is enabledfor each axis.0: Disabled1: EnabledWhen the excessive-load alarm function is used, the estimated loadtorque output function must be enabled.


- 135 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1959 HNG


#4 HNG Specifies whether to detect a separate detector disconnection alarm infeedrate command mode under PMC axis control, as follows:0: Separate detector disconnection alarm to be detected1: Separate detector disconnection alarm not to be detected

1980 Pre-load value for each axis (Tcmd offset)


[Unit of data] (Amplifier limit) /7282[Valid data range] -1821 - 1821

In the tandem control, this parameter is used to suppress the backlash.The set value should be slightly bigger than the friction.A typical value is the 1/3 of the rated torque.

1996 Retract amount on detecting an irregular load



If an abnormal load is detected, the direction of the motor rotation canbe reversed. This parameter sets the amount of reverse motor rotation.When a specified feedrate is not higher than the feedrate listed below,and so the motor turns at a low speed, the motor stops immediatelywithout reversing the motor rotation. This is to prevent the motorfrom turning in the reverse direction excessively.

Let A be this parameter value. When the feedrate is higher than thefeedrate indicated below in the detection unit used, the motor turns inthe reverse direction by A from the point at which an abnormal load isdetected, then stops.

Detection unit Feedrate 10 µm 1 µm 0.1 µm 0.01 µm 0.001 µm

A / 0.8 mm/ min A / 8 mm/ min A / 80 mm/ min A / 800 mm/ min A / 8000 mm/ min

If this parameter is set to 0, the motor rotation will not reversed, but itwill stop immediately when an abnormal load is detected.For details, refer to “FANUC AC Servo Amplifier MaintenanceManual.”


- 136 -

1997 Threshold value for the detection of an irregular load


[Unit of data] Unit of the torque command[Valid data range] From 0 through 7282 (7282 denotes the maximum available torque

from the motor)The irregular load alarm is generated when the load for a servo axisexceeds this value.The set value should be bigger than the maximum value of the loadtorque observed in the setting of the parameter TDO (no.1957#5) =1.The set value 7282 corresponds 4.4V of the observed value.

1998 Torque constant


[Unit of data] 0.00001Nm/ (1 torque command)[Valid data range] 1 - 32767

This parameter is set according to the torque character of the motor.

NOTEIn case of using linear motor, the data unit is0.001N/(1 torque command).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2603 SBL

[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] Bit axis

#0 SBL Smooth backlash compensation is:0: Disabled.1: Enabled.


- 137 -

4.12 DI/DO PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 2000 AND LATER)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2000 OPS STR STJ RWM RSD


#0 RSD The resetting (RST) signal is output:0: Whenever the system is reset.1: Only when the reset button is pressed on the MDI panel.

#1 RWM The rewinding signal (RWD) :0: Not output.1: While the reset and rewind signal searches memory for the

beginning of a program.#2 STJ The signal indicating that automatic operation is being activated

(STL) :0: Not output during operation by manual numeric commands.1: Output during operation by manual numeric commands.

#3 STR Specifies whether the STL signal is output when programs are loadedby the cycle start signal in the part program edit mode (see RDS inparameter No. 2200) .0: Not output1: Output

#4 OPS Specifies whether the automatic operation in-process signal (OP) isturned on when a sequence number is searched for.0: Not turned on1: Turned on

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2001 PSO MPN MOC ENR



#0 ENR At emergency stop:0: The system is reset.1: The system is not reset, but an alarm is raised. When the system

is reset, the emergency stop state is released.#1 MOC If all the mode selection signals are turned off:

0: No mode is assumed.1: The previously selected mode is assumed.


- 138 -

#3 MPN Specifies whether the incremental feed is specified with theincremental feed selection signals DIST0 to DIST26 or with themanual handle feed selection signals MP1, MP2, and MP4.0: Specified with the incremental feed selection signals DIST0 to

DIST26.1: Specified with the manual handle feed selection signals MP1,

MP2, and PM4.#4 PSO Specifies whether override signals OV1 to OV8, ROV1, and ROV2

use positive or negative logic.0: Negative1: PositiveThis bit is valid only when the FS3 interface is used. Usually, set thisbit to 0. When the FS3 interface is selected, set POV to 1 if necessary.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2002 BSC NGA


#2 NGA Specifies whether the timeout of the response from the PMC ischecked with the G10.1 command.0: Checked1: Not checkedThis bit is used to debug the PMC program.

#4 BSC Specifies when to check the block start interlock signal (*BSL) if acommand for a single block performs multiple operations as in acanned cycle.0: At the start of the first cycle only.1: At the start of each cycle.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2003 BSN TSN SSN MSN


#0 MSN Specifies whether a minus (-) can be used in an M code.0: Cannot be used1: Can be used

NOTETo enable the use of a minus (-) in an M code, theallowable number of digits in an M code must benine or less.


- 139 -

#1 SSN Specifies whether a minus (-) can be used in an S code.0: Cannot be used1: Can be used

NOTETo enable the use of a minus (-) in an S code, theallowable number of digits in an S code must be nineor less.

#2 TSN Specifies whether a minus (-) can be used in a T code.0: Cannot be used1: Can be used

NOTETo enable the use of a minus (-) in a T code, theallowable number of digits in an T code must be nineor less.

#3 BSN Specifies whether a minus (-) can be used in the specification of the2nd auxiliary function.0: Cannot be used1: Can be used

NOTETo enable the use of a minus (-) in the 2nd auxiliaryfunction, the allowable number of digits in the 2ndauxiliary function must be nine or less.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2004 MHI


#0 MHI The strobe and completion signals for the M, S, T, or B codes aretransmitted in the:0: Normal system.1: High-speed system.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2005 SKE D3A PDT DIT


#1 DIT Specifies whether to enable the all-axis/axis-by-axis interlockfunction for the axes controlled by PMC axis control.0: Enable the all-axis/axis-by-axis interlock function along axes

under PMC control.1: Disable the all-axis-axis-by-axis interlock function along axes

under PMC control. (Movements along the axes are notstopped.)


- 140 -

#2 PDT Specifies axis selection signals used for the simultaneous startcommand for the PMC axis control function.0: Use the FDxX15 to FDxX0 signals.1: Use the DTxX31 to DTxX0 signals.

#4 D3A In three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode, axis movementsignals are:0: Output to the program command axis.1: Output to the axis of travel.

#7 SKE Specifies which skip signal is to be used for PMC axis control asfollows:0: SKIP1 (same skip signal as that for the CNC)1: PCSKP (signal specific to PMC axis control)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2007 CTR G5S EWN


#1 EWN When a search by workpiece number is made, a workpiece number isspecified by using:0: Workpiece number search signals (WN1 to WN16)

(A number from 1 to 31 can be specified.)1: Extended workpiece number search signals (EWN0 to EWN26)

(A number from 1 to 99999999 can be specified.)#3 G5S In binary input operation mode, single-block stop is:

0: Disabled.1: Enabled.

#4 CTR At power-on, the status of the toggle-type custom soft key functionsignal (CTSF) immediately before the previous power-off is:0: Not restored.1: Restored.

2010 Delay time of the MF, SF, TF, or BF strobe signal



Specify the time waited before the MF, SF, TF, or BF signal is sentafter the M, S, T, or B code is sent.

M, S, T, B code

MF, SF, TF, BF signal

Delay time


- 141 -

2011 Minimum width of the M, S, T, or B function completion (FIN) signal



Specify the minimum signal width at which the M, S, T, or B functioncompletion signal (FIN) is assumed to be valid.

M, S, T, B code

MF, SF, TF, BF signal

FIN signal

Shorter thanminimum signalwidth, so ignored.

Longer than minimumsignal width, sorecognized.

2012 Output time of the MF, SF, TF, or BF strobe signal



M, S, T, or B code

MF, SF, TF, or BF signal

Delay Signal width

2014 Time that mode unselected status is ignored


[Unit of data] msec[Valid data range] From 0 through 2000

If parameter 2001 is specified to ignore the mode selection, when allthe mode selection signals are off (MOC in parameter 2001 = 0) , thisparameter enables the previously selected mode to be maintained forthe specified time that mode unselected status is ignored.Normally, specify the time needed to ignore mode signal chatter.


- 142 -

2015 Time that invalid mode selected status is ignored



If an invalid combination of mode signals is input, the previouslyselected mode is maintained for the specified time that the invalidmode selected status is ignored. After that, the mode unselected statusis specified.Normally, specify the time needed to ignore mode signal chatter.

2016 Manual feedrate override clamp value


[Unit of data] 0.01%[Valid data range] 0 - 65534

This parameter specifies the value used to clamp the manual feedrateoverride when an override value larger than the manual feedrateoverride clamp value is input. This parameter is valid only when thebasic machine interface (BMI) is used.

2020 Positive (+) direction command button on the software operator’s panel


[Valid data range] 0 - 9Specify the number of the numeric (arrow) key on the MDI panelwhich instructs manual feed in the positive (+) direction on thesoftware operator’s panel for each axis. The setting of 5 cannot beused because the numeric key 5 is fixed to the manual rapid traverseswitch.This parameter can be used for the first to sixth axes. It is ignored forthe seventh and subsequent axes.Specifying 0 means that the MDI panel does not have any numerickey that instructs the positive (+) direction.

ExampleIf 6 is set for the 1st axis:

Numeric key 6 instructs the + direction of the 1st axis.If 9 is set for the 2nd axis:

Numeric key 9 instructs the + direction of the 2nd axis.If 8 is set for the 3rd axis:

Numeric key 8 instructs the + direction of the 3rd axis.


- 143 -

2021 Negative (-) direction command button on the software operator’s panel


[Valid data range] 0 - 9Specify the number of the numeric (arrow) key on the MDI panelwhich instructs manual feed in the negative (-) direction on thesoftware operator’s panel for each axis. The setting of 5 cannot beused because the numeric key 5 is fixed to the manual rapid traverseswitch.This parameter can be used for the first to sixth axes. It is ignored forthe seventh and subsequent axes.Specifying 0 means that the MDI panel does not have any numerickey that instructs the negative (-) direction.

ExampleIf 4 is set for the 1st axis:

Numeric key 4 instructs the - direction of the 1st axis.If 1 is set for the 2nd axis:

Numeric key 1 instructs the - direction of the 2nd axis.If 2 is set for the 3rd axis:

Numeric key 2 instructs the - direction of the 3rd axis.

2030 Allowable number of digits in an M code


[Valid data range] 1 - 10Specify the allowable number of digits in an M code.

NOTETo set the allowable number of digits in an Mcode to 10, the use of a minus "-" in an M codemust be disabled.

2031 Allowable number of digits in an S code


[Valid data range] 1 - 10Specify the allowable number of digits in an S code.

NOTETo set the allowable number of digits in an Scode to 10, the use of a minus "-" in an S codemust be disabled.


- 144 -

2032 Allowable number of digits in a T code


[Valid data range] 1 - 10Specify the allowable number of digits in a T code.

NOTETo set the allowable number of digits in a T codeto 10, the use of a minus "-" in a T code must bedisabled.

2033 Allowable number of digits in a B code (2nd auxiliary function)


[Valid data range] 1 - 10Specify the allowable number of digits in a 2nd auxiliary function.When 0 is set, the allowable number of digits is assumed 3.To enable the input of the decimal point, the number of decimalplaces must be set for parameter No. 2428. In this case, the allowablenumber of digits to be set for this parameter must include the numberof decimal places.

NOTETo set the allowable number of digits in the 2ndauxiliary function to 10, the use of a minus "-" inthe 2nd auxiliary function must be disabled.

2034 Type of auxiliary function to be used in binary input operation mode (remote

buffer)


[Valid data range] 0 - 3Specify the type of auxiliary function to be used in binary inputoperation mode.0 : Second auxiliary function1 : M function2 : S function3 : T function


- 145 -

2049 Correspondence between a workpiece number and a program number in an

external workpiece number search (PN)


[Valid data range] -1 - 999999The meaning of the parameter varies depending on the value to be setas follows: (1) If bit 1 (EWN) of parameter No. 2007 is set to 0:

Let WN be the workpiece number specified by the workpiecenumber search signal (WN1 to WN16) .<1> If PN is 0 to 999999:

Program number = PN * 100 + WNPN indicates the upper six digits of the program number.

<2> If PN is a negative value or a value exceeding 999999:The upper six digits of the program number are set to thesmallest number among existing programs.For example, when the workpiece number is 21, a programwith the smallest number is searched for among existingprograms having program numbers such as O00000021,O00000121, and O00000221. Therefore, the upper sixdigits of a program number cannot be specified. When thismethod is used, programs with program numbers of whichlower two digits are the same must not be registered inmemory at the same time.

(2) This parameter is not used if bit 1 (EWN) of parameter No. 2007is set to 1. In this case, the program number is assumed to equalthe workpiece number.

2052 Rapid traverse rate for a drilling cycle in the three-dimensional coordinate

conversion mode



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Specify the rapid traverse rate for a drilling cycle in the three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode. (1) Rapid traverse to point R (2) Retraction to point R (3) Rapid traverse to the initial pointWhen 0 is specified, a dry run feedrate is used. A cutting override isapplied to motions (1) to (3) because cutting-mode operation isperformed in the three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode.


- 146 -

2060 Area override for area 1 in automatic feedrate control by area





[Unit of data] %[Valid data range] 0 to 127

The area overrides for areas 1 to 4 in automatic feedrate control byarea are set as percentages. If 0 is set for an area, the setting for thearea becomes invalid.The area override is applied to the feedrate resulting from override ofa specified feedrate.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2070 IH3 IH2 IH1



#0 IH1 Specifies whether to use an I/O-Link-connected manual handle for thefirst manual handle.0: Not used. (An ordinary manual handle is used.)1: Used.

NOTEWhen this parameter is set to "1" and the power isturned off and then on again, if the appropriateaddress value is not set for parameter No. 2071, thisparameter is automatically set to "0" so that the I/O-Link-connected manual handle cannot be used.


- 147 -

#1 IH2 Specifies whether to use an I/O-Link-connected manual handle for thesecond manual handle.0: Not used. (An ordinary manual handle is used.)1: Used.


#2 IH3 Specifies whether to use an I/O-Link-connected manual handle for thethird manual handle.0: Not used. (An ordinary manual handle is used.)1: Used.


2071 Address value of the first I/O-Link-connected manual handle



[Valid data range] 0 - 127Specifies the address value (X address of the PMC) of the first I/O-Link-connected manual handle.

NOTEWhen an I/O-Link-connected manual handle isspecified for the first manual handle, but thespecified address value is not appropriate, thisparameter is automatically set to -1.


- 148 -

2072 Address value of the second I/O-Link-connected manual handle



[Valid data range] 0 - 127Specifies the address value (X address of the PMC) of the second I/O-Link-connected manual handle.

NOTEWhen an I/O-Link-connected manual handle isspecified for the second manual handle, but thespecified address value is not appropriate, thisparameter is automatically set to -1.

2073 Address value of the third I/O-Link-connected manual handle



[Valid data range] 0 - 127Specifies the address value (X address of the PMC) of the third I/O-Link-connected manual handle.

NOTEWhen an I/O-Link-connected manual handle isspecified for the third manual handle, but thespecified address value is not appropriate, thisparameter is automatically set to -1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2080 PPE PMN SLV


#0 SLV Specifies whether to use multiple-slave displays (for up to fourslaves) in the Power Mate CNC manager function, as follows:0: Do not use.1: Use.


- 149 -

#3 PMN Specifies whether to enable the Power Mate CNC manager function,as follows:0: Enable.1: Disable.This parameter is set if it is necessary to give preference to ladder-based commands for each connected slave (to stop communicationwith the Power Mate CNC manger function) after the data needed bythe slave has been set up or confirmed.

#4 PPE Specifies whether to enable parameter setting for the Power MateCNC manger function if parameter PWE (data number 8000) is set to0, as follows:0: Enable.1: Disable.

2081 Program number for which data is to be input or output (Power Mate CNC

manager)


[Valid data range] 0 - 99999999This parameter specifies the program number for which the slave-sidedata (parameter) is to be input or output using the Power Mate CNCmanager function.A slave in I/O link group n uses the following program number: Setvalue + n*10

If the set value is 0, it is impossible to input or output data(parameter) . (Do not specify a number that leads to a program number larger than99999999.)


- 150 -

2090 Axis name for Power Mate CNC manager function slave 1









[Valid data range] 65 - 90These parameters specify the axis name of a slave for a positiondisplay used by the Power Mate CNC manager function.If the set value is 0, the axis name becomes 1.


- 151 -

4.13 DISPLAY/MDI AND EDIT PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 2200AND LATER)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2200 RDS PAL NM9 NPE RAL REP RDL


#0 RDL When all programs are loaded simultaneously in the foreground(including external I/O device control) :0: All the programs are loaded after previously loaded programs.1: Previously loaded programs are deleted first, then all the

programs are loaded. Edition-prohibited programs, however, arenot deleted.

#1 REP If an attempt is made to load a program whose program number is thesame as that of a previously loaded program:0: An alarm occurs.1: The previously loaded program is deleted first, then the

attempted program is loaded. Edition-prohibited programs,however, are not deleted. In this case, an alarm occurs.

#2 RAL Specifies whether a single program or all programs are loaded underexternal I/O device control (during both foreground and backgroundeditions) or by a cycle start signal.0: Single program1: All programs

#3 NPE While a program is loaded, M02, M30, or M99 is:0: Assumed to be a program end.1: Not assumed to be a program end. In this case, the first block of

the program must contain the program number.#4 NM9 While a program is loaded, M99 is:

0: Assumed to be a program end.1: Not assumed to be a program end.The setting of this parameter is valid only when NPE = 0. Namely, tospecify the parameter so that not M99, but M02 or M30 is assumed tobe a program end during program loading, set NPE to 0 and NM9 to1.

#6 PAL Specifies whether a single program or all programs are punched underexternal I/O device control (only during foreground edition) .0: Single program1: All programs

#7 RDS Specifies whether loading programs by a cycle start signal is valid.0: Invalid1: ValidThis parameter is used to load programs externally, such as from thePMC or similar devices.


- 152 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2201 NCO EDT SB9 ND9 NE9


#0 NE9 Specifies whether editing programs 09000 to 09999 is prohibited.0: Not prohibited1: Prohibited

#1 ND9 Specifies whether programs 09000 to 09999 are displayed while theyare executed.0: Displayed1: Not displayed

#2 SB9 Specifies whether a single block stop is valid for the macro statementsof programs 09000 to 09999.0: Not valid1: Valid

NOTESpecify 1 when you want to check programs 09000 to09999 containing custom macro statements.

#6 EDT Specifies whether program edition is enabled when the mode selectoris set to the MEMORY position.0: Disabled1: Enabled

NOTE1 When 1 is specified

After the program is stopped in the MEMORY modewith the single block or feed hold function, the mode ischanged to the EDIT mode, enabling the program tobe edited.Editing while the main program is run- Exactly the same as the normal edit functionEditing while the subprogram is run- The program can be edited only in units of word.- The programs called in the TAP or MDI mode

cannot be edited.- Only the program can be edited.

2 When this parameter is changed, the power must beturned off, then turned on again.

3 Before restarting the operation in the MEMORY mode,be sure to return the cursor to the original position.

#7 NCO Specifies whether the memory for the selected program isautomatically arranged when background editing is completed.0: Arranged1: Not arranged


- 153 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2202 DVM DSM DEV DES DCR DTL DSE D10


#0 D10 The position data (excluding the machine position) is displayed on theCRT0: In least input increments.1: In the unit obtained by multiplying the least increment unit by

10.#1 DSE Specifies whether the coordinate system of the incremental positions

displayed on the CRT is specified.0: Not specified1: SpecifiedSetting 1 (specified) refers to the following:(i) Manual reference position return(ii) Specification of the coordinate system with G92 (G50 for G-

code system A for the lathe system)(iii) When G92.1 (G50.3 for G-code system A for the lathe system) ,

which presets the workpiece coordinate system, sets the absolutepositions displayed on the CRT, the displayed incrementalpositions are also set to the same values as the displayed absolutepositions.

#2 DTL Specifies whether the incremental and absolute positions displayed onthe CRT include the distance traveled by tool lengthcompensation/tool length compensation in tool axis direction.0: The positions include the distance traveled.1: The positions do not include the distance traveled. (The

positions specified by the program are displayed.)When using three-dimensional coordinate conversion, set this bit to 1.

#3 DCR Specifies whether the incremental and absolute positions displayed onthe CRT include the distance traveled by cutter compensation.0: The positions include the distance traveled.1: The positions do not include the distance traveled. (The

positions specified by the program are displayed.)When using three-dimensional coordinate conversion, set this bit to 1.

#4 DES Specifies whether the incremental and absolute positions displayed onthe CRT include the acceleration/declaration control delay.0: The positions do not include the acceleration/deceleration

control delay.1: The positions include the acceleration/deceleration control

delay.#5 DEV Specifies whether the incremental and absolute positions displayed on

the CRT include the servo delay(position deviation) .0: The positions do not include the servo delay(position deviation) .1: The positions include the servo delay(position deviation) .


- 154 -

#6 DSM Specifies whether the machine positions displayed on the CRTinclude the acceleration/deceleration control delay.0: The positions do not include the acceleration/deceleration

control delay.1: The positions include the acceleration/deceleration control

delay.#7 DVM Specifies whether the machine positions displayed on the CRT

include the servo delay (positional deviation) .0: The positions displayed on the CRT do not include the servo

delay (positional deviation) .1: The positions displayed on the CRT include the servo delay

(positional deviation) .

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2203 NNO TLN MCN


#1 MCN The machine positions are displayed on the CRT:0: In millimeters for a millimeter machine or in inches for an inch

machine irrespective of the unit of data.1: In millimeters for metric input or in inches for inch input.

#4 TLN T codes displayed on the program check screen and T codes that canbe read with system variables indicate0: Pot numbers1: Tool numbers

#7 NNO When operator messages are set by external data input/output,messages set with different numbers are:0: Line-fed.1: Not line-fed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2204 DAK NOS


#0 NOS Specifies whether the actual spindle speed is displayed.0: Displayed1: Not displayedThe actual spindle speed is displayed based on the feedback by theposition coder installed in the spindle. For serial spindles, the actualspindle speed can be displayed based on the speed monitor data fromthe spindle motor, depending on the setting of ASD (bit 4 ofparameter No. 5820) .Specify 1 for the machine without the position coder because themachine does not require threading and feed each rotation or if you donot want to display the actual spindle speed.


- 155 -

#2 DAK Specifies whether to display coordinates in the program coordinatesystem or workpiece coordinate system as absolute coordinates whenthe three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode is set.0: Display coordinates in the program coordinate system.1: Display coordinates in the workpiece coordinate system.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2205 SPA ITA FRE GER JPN ENG

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2206 SWE


Set the display language according to the following table:Display language SWE SPA ITA FRE GER JPN ENG

English 0 0 0 0 0 0 1Japanese 0 0 0 0 0 1 0German 0 0 0 0 1 0 0French 0 0 0 1 0 0 0Italian 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

Spanish 0 1 0 0 0 0 0Swedish 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

When a language other than English and Japanese is specified, theoption for changing the display language is required.

NOTE1 When all the bits are set to 0, English is used as the

display language.2 When this parameter is set, the power must be

turned off before operation is continued.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2207 GTL GTR GST


#1 GST While background drawing is executed, a non-graphic G code is usedto:0: Continue the drawing.1: Stop the drawing.

#6 GTR Specifies whether cutter compensation is enabled while backgrounddrawing is executed.0: Disabled1: Enabled

#7 GTL Specifies whether tool length compensation is enabled whilebackground drawing is executed.0: Disabled1: Enabled


- 156 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2208 D3D D3T DMK


#0 DMK Specifies whether the manual overlap screen is displayed with theprogram coordinate system or workpiece coordinate system.0: Program coordinate system (coordinate system after conversion)1: Workpiece coordinate system (coordinate system before

conversion)#4 D3T From the values in the current position display, the tool length

compensation along the tool axis is0: Not subtracted.1: Subtracted.

#5 D3D For three-dimensional coordinate conversion, the remaining distancethe tool must be moved is displayed0: About the program coordinate system.1: About the workpiece coordinate system.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2209 BGM


#2 BGM The coordinates used in background drawing are:0: Absolute coordinates1: Machine coordinates

2210 Password (PSW)


[Valid data range] 0 - 99999999Specify a password (PSW) . When a value other than 0 is specified,the password is assumed. When the password is specified, the displayof this parameter becomes blank, and program edition is locked. Thisparameter can be specified when password (PSW) = 0, i.e., the key isin a normal state or when password (PSW) = key (KEY) , i.e., the keyis unlocked.

2211 Key (KEY)


[Valid data range] 0 - 99999999Specifying the same value as the setting of PSW unlocks the key.The specified value is not displayed.When the power is turned on, this parameter is automaticallyinitialized to 0. If, therefore, the power is turned off with the key


- 157 -

unlocked, and then turned on again, the key is automaticallyunlocked.

2212 Minimum value for the program protection range (PMIN)

2213 Maximum value for the program protection range (PMAX)


[Valid data range] 0 - 99999999Programs in the range specified by these parameters can be protected.Specify the range of program numbers to be protected.PMAX must be greater than PMIN.The range can be specified when password (PSW) = 0, i.e., the key isin a normal state or when password (PSW) = key (KEY) , i.e., the keyis unlocked.

[Example]Parameter No.2212 = 70000000Parameter No.2213 = 84999999Under the above conditions, programs O70000000 to O84999999 areprotected.

When PMIN is set to 0, it is regarded to be 9000. When PMAX is setto 0, it is regarded to be 9999. Thus, with the default settings of theseparameters, programs 09000 to 09999 are protected.

NOTE1 Parameters Nos. 2210 to 2213 are not punched or

read.2 Parameters Nos. 2210 to 2213 are not cleared even if

a parameter file clear operation is performed at IPLtime.

3 The password (PSW) and the key (KEY) are notdisplayed.When the password (PSW) is set to 0, however, 0 isdisplayed for parameter 2210 to indicate that the keyis in a normal state.

4 In setting the password (PSW) and the key (KEY),[+INPUT] is equivalent to [INPUT]. For example,when the key (KEY) is set to 99, entering 1 andpressing [+INPUT] causes 1 to be set.


- 158 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2214 APL 3HN


#0 3HN Specifies whether to update the amount of manual interrupt duringthree-dimensional handle interrupt mode.0: Updated.1: Not updated.

#7 APL Specifies whether to preset the relative position indicatorautomatically when the manual feed-based active offset change modeis selected, as follows:0: Do not preset.1: Preset.This bit is used to restore the previous value of an offset when it hasbeen changed in the Changing Active Offset Value with ManualMove mode. Making axis movement by manual feed in such a waythat the relative position indicator (counter) becomes 0 can restore theprevious value of the offset.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2217 GDM NOM


#2 NOM Specifies whether to automatically switch to the operator messagescreen if an operator message is set with external data input/output orcustom macro system variable #3006.0: Switched.1: Not switched.

#4 GDM Specifies whether to perform tool path drawing at the tool position inthe machine coordinate system.0: Not performed. (Performed in the workpiece coordinate system.)1: Performed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2218 ODR NIS RVS


#1 RVS Specifies whether to enable display in reverse video for amonochrome LCD.0: Disabled.1: Enabled.

#6 NIS Specifies the insertion position assumed when INSERT editing isperformed on the program text screen.0: Inserted after the cursor position.1: Inserted before the cursor position.


- 159 -

#7 ODR Specifies the units of the program sizes on the program directoryscreen.0: KB units.1: Page units. (The page refers to the management unit within the

CNC.)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2219 MLC TPC


#0 TPC Specifies whether to display the touch panel compensation screen.0: Not displayed.1: Displayed.Usually, set this bit to 0. Touch panel compensation is required onlywhen a new panel is installed, when the existing panel is replaced, orwhen memory is all cleared. Set the bit to 1 only when touch panelcompensation is to be performed. After the end of compensation, set itto 0.

#3 MLC At power on, the 2-LCD-unit connection function selects:0: the LCD unit specified for parameter No.2221.1: the LCD unit selected before the power was disconnected.

2221 Number of the LCD unit to be selected at power on


[Valid data range] 0 and 1Enter the number of the first LCD unit to be selected at power onusing the 2-LCD-unit connection function.Entering 0 causes LCD unit 1 to be selected. Entering 1 causes LCDunit 2 to be selected.If a number larger than the number of mounted LCD units is entered,the last LCD unit will be selected.

2231 Axis number on the load meter for the first servo axis

2232 Axis number on the load meter for the second servo axis

2233 Axis number on the load meter for the third servo axis


[Valid data range] 0 - Max axesSpecify the axis number to be displayed on the load meter for theservo axis.


- 160 -

2234 Rated load to be displayed on the load meter of the 1st analog spindle motor


[Valid data range] From 0 through 128Specify the rated load of the motor corresponding to the load meter.Example) When the load meter is at 100% and the input to the ADconverter is 6 [V], Set 128 x 6 [V]/10 [V] = 77.

2238 Program check screen position display type


[Valid data range] 0 - 2Specify the type of the current position display on the program checkscreen.

Setting Position display type0 Relative position display1 Absolute position display2 Machine position display

The current position display type can be changed using theappropriate soft key on the program check screen. When the type ischanged using the soft key, this parameter is automatically changed.

2239 Percentage at which a life warning is displayed on the periodic maintenance

screen


[Unit of data] %[Valid data range] 0 – 99

If, on the periodic maintenance screen, the remaining time reaches thespecified percentage of the lifetime, the item names and the remainingtime are displayed red to give a warning.


- 161 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2240 HDC NDO


#6 NDO Specifies the processing performed by screen hard copy functionwhen the shift key is pressed or when the hard copy execution requestsignal is issued, as follows:0: Screen data is obtained, and immediately output to the memory

card.1: Only screen data is obtained, but data is output from the memory

card screen.The obtained screen data is saved to memory in the CNC. Even if thisparameter is set to 0, therefore, the most recently obtained screen datacan be output from the memory card screen.

#7 HDC Specifies whether to enable the screen hard copy function, as follows:0: Disable.1: Enable.

2246 Operating time display type 1 on the program check screen

2247 Operating time display type 2 on the program check screen


[Valid data range] 0 – 5

Specify the types of the operating time displayed on two lines on theprogram check screen.

Setting Operating time display type1 Automatic operation time2 Cutting time3 Cycle time4 General-purpose timer time5 Number of machined parts

When 0 is set, the automatic operation time is displayed on the firstline, while the cycle time is displayed on the second line.


- 162 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2248 SRV



#0 SRV If the display unit is monochrome (with graphic display capabilities),the cursor and the title characters on operation screens are displayed:0 : In a normal way. (Characters are displayed black.)1 : In reverse video. (Characters are displayed white.)

2249 Cursor/title line background color brightness


[Valid data range] 0 - 8If the display unit is monochrome (with graphic display capabilities),specify the brightness of the background color of the cursor and titles.If 0 is entered, the standard brightness of the system is assumed.

2250 Background color brightness


[Valid data range] 0 - 8If the display unit is monochrome (with graphic display capabilities),specify the brightness of the background on the screen.If 0 is entered, the standard brightness of the system is assumed.

2274 Number of the program to start background drawing

2275 Number of the sequence to start background drawing

2276 Number of the program to end background drawing

2277 Number of the sequence to end background drawing



To draw only part of a program, specify drawing start and end blockswith the program number and sequence number. When the above


- 163 -

parameters are set to 0, the function is ignored, and the wholeprogram is drawn. Normally, specify 0.

NOTEBlocks Oxxxxxxxx and Nxxxxxxxx, which correspondrespectively to the program and sequence numbers tobe specified in the above parameters, must be singleblocks or contain NC statements. If a subprogram,macro program, or command for calling a macroprogram is specified for the block, the block isignored.

2278 Background drawing program number


[Valid data range] 0 - 99999999Specify the number of the desired drawing program. Press the HEADsoft key to move the drawing program pointer to the head of theprogram number specified by this parameter.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2286 NDP JIS PDS MDC JSP


#1 JSP Display the following on the overall position display screen or theprogram check screen.In manual operation mode:

Jog feed rate (X-axis) with any override included.Automatic operation mode:

Dry run speed with any override included.0: Does not display the jog feed rate or dry run speed.1: Displays the jog feed rate or dry run speed.

#3 MDC Specifies whether to allow erasing of all maintenance information.0: Not allowed.1: Allowed.

#5 PDS Specifies whether to display the status when a life warning is issuedfor data registered on the periodic maintenance screen.0: Not displayed.1: Displayed.


- 164 -

#6 JIS Specifies whether to output the kanji/hiragana characters of itemnames as FANUC or JIS codes on the periodic maintenance screen.0: FANUC codes.1: JIS codes.

NOTEWhen data is already registered and the datacontains kanji/hiragana characters, characters arenot displayed correctly if this bit is changed.To solve this problem, the data must be re-registered.

#7 NDP Specifies whether to display the periodic maintenance screen.0: Displayed.1: Not displayed.

2311 Name of the general-purpose switch 1 on the software operator’s panel (first

character)

2312 Name of the general-purpose switch 1 on the software operator’s panel

(second character)

2313 Name of the general-purpose switch 1 on the software operator’s panel (third

character)


(fourth character)

2315 Name of the general-purpose switch 1 on the software operator’s panel (fifth

character)


(sixth character)


(seventh character)


(eighth character)


character)


(second character)


character)


- 165 -


(fourth character)


character)

2326 N Name of the general-purpose switch 2 on the software operator’s panel

(sixth character)


(seventh character)


(eighth character)


character)


(second character)


character)


(fourth character)


character)


(sixth character)


(seventh character)


(eighth character)


character)


(second character)


- 166 -


character)


(fourth character)


character)


(sixth character)


(seventh character)


(eighth character)


character)


(second character)


character)


(fourth character)


character)


(sixth character)


(seventh character)


(eighth character)


character)


- 167 -


(second character)


character)


(fourth character)


character)


(sixth character)


(seventh character)


(eighth character)


character)


(second character)


character)


(fourth character)


character)


(sixth character)


(seventh character)


(eighth character)


- 168 -


character)


(second character)


character)


(fourth character)


character)


(sixth character)


(seventh character)


(eighth character)


[Valid data range] -128 - 127Specify the names of the general-purpose switches on the softwareoperator’s panel, using the character-to-code correspondence table(attached) . The name of a switch can be up to eight characters.

Parameter numbers 2311 to 2318: Name of general-purpose switch 1Parameter numbers 2321 to 2328: Name of general-purpose switch 2Parameter numbers 2331 to 2338: Name of general-purpose switch 3Parameter numbers 2341 to 2348: Name of general-purpose switch 4Parameter numbers 2351 to 2358: Name of general-purpose switch 5Parameter numbers 2361 to 2368: Name of general-purpose switch 6Parameter numbers 2371 to 2378: Name of general-purpose switch 7Parameter numbers 2381 to 2388: Name of general-purpose switch 8


- 169 -

4.14 PROGRAM PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 2400 AND LATER)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2400 DWL M30 G70 F41 DPI


#0 DPI If the decimal point is omitted in an address in which the decimalpoint can be used:0: The least input increment is assumed. (Ordinary decimal point

input)1: The mm, inch, degree, and sec units are assumed. (Fixed

decimal point input)#1 F41 If the feed per minute of F code (G94 mode) is entered in metric

without the decimal point, the unit is:0: 1 mm/min1: 0.1 mm/minIf it is entered with the decimal point, the unit is always mm/min.

NOTEIt is not effective if the increment system is IS-A.

#2 G70 Inch input and metric input are specified as shown below:0: G20 (inch input) and G21 (metric input)1: G70 (inch input) and G71 (metric input)

#4 M30 If M30 is entered in memory operation:0: Only M30 is sent to the machine, and the program head is

searched for by the reset and rewind signal (RRW) .1: If M30 is sent to the machine, the program head is automatically

searched for at the same time. Therefore, when completionsignal FIN for M30 is returned before reset or reset and rewind,the program is reexecuted from the beginning.

#5 DWL Dwell (G04) is:0: Always dwell in seconds1: Dwell in seconds in case of feed per minute mode (G94) or

dwell in revolutions in case of feed per revolution mode (G95)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2401 NCM MBF G18 G95 G44 G43 G90 G01


#0 G01 Mode at power on and in clear status0: G00 mode (positioning)1: G01 mode (linear interpolation)

#1 G90 Mode at power on and in clear status0: G91 mode (incremental command)1: G90 mode (absolute command)


- 170 -

#2 G43#3 G44 G43 and G44 set G43, G44, or G49 mode to be entered when power is

turned on and when clear operation is performed (for M series only) .G43 G44 G43, G44, or G49 mode

0 0 G49 mode0 1 G44 mode1 0 G43 mode

#4 G95 Mode at power on and in clear status0: G94 mode (feed per minute)1: G95 mode (feed per revolution)

#5 G18 Mode at power on and in clear status0: G17 mode1: G18 mode

#6 MBF Selects or cancels the multibuffer mode at power on and in the clearstate.0: Cancels the multibuffer mode.1: Selects the multibuffer mode. (When the optional multibuffer

15-block/100-block function is not provided, five buffer blocksare used for the look-ahead operation.)

When the multibuffer mode is selected, acceleration/decelerationbefore look-ahead interpolation is enabled at the same time.If the fine HPCC option is provided, fine HPCC mode is enabled atthe same time.

NOTEThis parameter becomes valid when the system isreset.

#7 NCM Specifies whether the following modal information is cleared byreset:0: Cleared1: Not cleared but saved.G00 to G03 (except G06.2) , G17 to G19, G17.1, G93 to G95, G96 toG97, G90 to G91, F codes, S codes, and T codes

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2402 SMX PRN ZNP INO


#1 INO After manual intervention by manual absolute on, INC specifieswhether the travel command path for absolute (G90) and forincremental (G91) are the same.0: Same (path for absolute)1: Different


- 171 -

NOTEThis parameter is no longer effective. Regardlessof whether this parameter is set to 0 or 1, the travelcommand paths for absolute (G90) and forincremental (G91) are different after manualintervention by manual absolute on.If the travel command paths for absolute (G90) andfor incremental (G91) must be the same, set ABS (bit3 of parameter No. 2409).See the item for ABS (bit 3 of parameter No. 2409).

#2 ZNP When the manual reference position return is completed, the workcoordinate system is:0: Preset only under the reset condition (OP signal is OFF) .1: Always preset.

NOTEIf this bit is set to 1, all axes are always presetregardless of the setting of bit 3 (PLZx) of parameterNo. 1005.

#4 PRN With a linear scale having reference marks and with a referenceposition return without dogs, during a manual reference positionreturn after origin establishment, the presetting of the coordinatesystem:0: Is always performed.1: May or may not be performed depending on bit 3 (PLZ) of

parameter No. 1005, bit 2 (ZNP) of No. 2402, and bit 1 (NOZ) ofNo. 2403.

#6 SMX S code instructed in the same block as G92 (a coordinate systemsetting) is:0: The maximum spindle speed command is assumed.1: The maximum spindle speed command is not assumed.

(Spindle speed command is assumed.)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2403 PCM ENS NOZ M02


#0 M02 When M02 is transmitted during memory operation0: M02 is only sent to the machine, and reset and rewind signal

(RRW) is used for program heading.1: M02 is sent out to the machine, and a program heading is

automatically executed. Consequently, when completion signalFIN for M02 is returned without reset or reset and rewind, theprogram is restarted from the beginning.


- 172 -

#1 NOZ0: When the manual reference position is returned, whether the

coordinate system is preset depends on parameter No. 1005PLZx or 2402 ZNP.

1: The coordinate system is always not preset when the manualreference position is returned in all axes. (Except for the firstmanual reference position return after power on)

#3 ENS When a blank code (not a punched hole) of EIA code wascommanded in the significant information section:0: It shall be an alarm.1: It shall be ignored.

#5 PCM Counting the total number of machined parts and the number ofmachined parts is specified by:0: M02, M30, or M code set by parameter No. 24261: Only M code set by parameter No. 2426

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2404 SFL


#5 SFL Specifies whether to specify a program number or file number for theaddress P format in an external device subprogram call.0: Specify a program number.1: Specify a file number.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2405 RSO FPR NPA SNM


#0 SNM At reset and power on, G43.9 mode and the compensation vector are:0: Cleared.1: Not cleared.

#5 NPA When movement along the PMC control axis is specified by an NCprogram:0: The alarm PS0450 occurs.1: The alarm PS0450 does not occur.

NOTEIf 1 is selected, the CNC move command is ignored.

#6 FPR Specifies whether the function for feed per rotation without a positioncoder (the function for converting feed-per-rotation F into feed-per-minute F) is used in the feed-per-rotation mode (G95) .0: Not used.1: Used.


- 173 -

#7 RSO Specifies whether spindle override is enabled when the function forfeed-per-rotation without a position coder (the function for convertingfeed-per-rotation F into feed-per-minute F) is being used in the feed-per-rotation mode (G95) .0: Disabled.1: Enabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2407 PLE


#0 PLE Whether plane conversion is performed for a G92 or G92.1 command0: Not performed1: Performed

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2409 KWZ K43 G26 ABS O52


#2 O52 Specifies whether the G52 command suppresses buffering.0: Suppressed.1: Not suppressed.

NOTEIf G52 is specified so that it does not suppressbuffering, the first move command since theG52 command must be specified as absolute.

#3 ABS After manual intervention by manual absolute on, this bit specifieswhether the travel command path for absolute (G90) and forincremental (G91) are the same.0: Different1: Same (path for absolute)

#4 G26 Specifies whether G25 or G26 mode is selected when the power isswitched on, or in a cleared condition, as follows:0: G25 mode (spindle speed fluctuation detection disabled)1: G26 mode (spindle speed fluctuation detection enabled)

#5 K43 Specifies whether to clear the tool length compensation vector, G43to G49 in the modal G code group, and H codes when the system isreset.0: Cleared.1: Not cleared but saved.

#6 KWZ Specifies whether to clear G54 to G59 in the modal G code groupwhen the system is reset.0: Cleared. (Initialized to G54.)1: Not cleared but saved.When fixture offset is used, whether to clear fixture offset mode whenthe system is reset depends on the setting of this parameter.


- 174 -

2410 Arc radius error limit value



[Valid data range] 0 - 999999999Specify a valid limit value as the difference between the radius valueat the start and end points for circular interpolation command.Standard setting: 20

2411 M code 1 which does not put the following block in the buffer register












Specify M codes that do not put the following block in the bufferregister. If there is an M code whose next block should not be put inthe buffer register until the M function processing terminates in themachine specify these M codes.M00, M01, M02, and M30 are treated as M codes that do not put thefollowing block in the buffer register even though these parametersare not specified for them. M98, M99, M codes set for parametersNos. 7071 to 7089, and those defined by parameters Nos. 7096, 7098,7099, and 7010 are treated as M codes that put the following block inthe buffer register even though these parameters are specified forthem.


- 175 -

2426 M code for counting up the number of parts


[Valid data range] 0 - 999999999Specifies the M code for counting up the number of parts. To specifyno code, set 0. (Counting up is not performed with M00.) M98 andM99 cannot be used for counting up. (If they are set, they areignored and counting up is not performed.)

2428 Number of decimal places of the 2nd auxiliary function (B)


[Valid data range] 0 - 8Set the number of decimal places of the 2nd auxiliary function.If 0 is set, the decimal point cannot be input.

2429 M code for tool replacement


[Valid data range] From 0 through 99999999 (excluding 01, 02, 30, 98, 99 and calling Mcode)Set the M code for a tool replacement command in tool lifemanagement and in tool offset by the tool number. If 0 is set, isregarded as 6 (M06) .

2431 M code to execute external device subprogram calls


[Valid data range] 0 - 99999999Set the M code to execute external device subprogram calls. When 0is set, M198 is used. M01, M02, M30, M98, and M99 cannot be usedto execute external device subprogram calls. When a negative number,1, 2, 30, 98, or 99 is set for this parameter, M198 is used to executeexternal device subprogram calls.


- 176 -

2440 Minimum radius to which a specified feedrate is kept in spiral interpolation

or conical interpolation



[Valid data range] (In case of IS-B, from 1.0 through 999999.999 for mm input andfrom 1.0 through 99999.9999 for inch input)

If this parameter is set to 0 or out of range, it is assumed that theminimum value in the data range is specified. In spiral interpolationand conical interpolation, the feedrate is usually kept constant. Whenthe radius of a spiral becomes small near the center of the spiral,however, the corresponding angular velocity may become very high.To prevent this from occurring, the system keeps the angular velocityconstant when the radius of a spiral reaches the value specified in thisparameter, resulting in a lower velocity than before.

2450 Range of M codes without buffering (1) (lower limit)

2451 Range of M codes without buffering (1) (upper limit)

2452 Range of M codes without buffering (2) (lower limit)

2453 Range of M codes without buffering (2) (upper limit)


[Valid data range] 3 – 99999999Specify the upper and lower limits of M codes without buffering. Ifthe specified upper and lower limits are found to be incompatible, theentered parameters are invalidated.Example)To specify M10 to M19 and M90000000 to M99999999 as M codeswithout buffering, specify the following:No. 2451 = 10No. 2452 = 19No. 2453 = 90000000No. 2454 = 99999999

NOTEM00, M01, M02, and M30 are treated as M codeswithout buffering even if they are not contained in theparameter limits. M98, M99, the M codes set forparameters Nos. 7071 to 7089, and those defined byparameters Nos. 7096, 7098, 7099, and 7101 are nottreated as M codes without buffering even if they arecontained in the parameter limits.


- 177 -

2454 Range of 2nd auxiliary function codes without buffering (1) (lower limit)

2455 Range of 2nd auxiliary function codes without buffering (1) (upper limit)




[Valid data range] 1 - 99999999Specify the upper and lower limits of 2nd auxiliary function codeswithout buffering. If the specified upper and lower limits are found tobe incompatible, the entered parameters are invalidated.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

2458 MCL MER MZE M16


#0 M16 MDI operation is:0: For the FS15 type.1: For the FS16 type.

#5 MZE After the start of MDI operation, program editing during operation is:0: Not inhibited.1: Inhibited.This setting is valid only when bit 0 (M16) of parameter No. (2458) isset to 1.

#6 MER In single-block operation mode in MDI, when the last block of aprogram has been executed, the executed program is:0: Not erased.1: Erased.This setting is valid only when bit 0 (M16) of parameter No. 2458 isset to 1.

NOTEEven when this bit is set so that program erasure isnot performed, a program is erased if it is executedwith "%" (end of record) read. ("%" is insertedautomatically at the end of a program.)

#7 MCL When a reset is made, a program created in MDI mode is:0: Not erased.

The cursor is placed at the end of the program after reset.1: Erased.This setting is valid only when bit 0 (M16) of parameter No. 2458 is1.


- 178 -

2510 Involute interpolation allowable error limit



[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standardparameter setting table (B)) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +999999.999)The involute interpolation command is used to specify the limit valueallowed as a shift between the involute curve passing through the startpoint and the involute curve passing through the end point.A negative value is compared as its absolute value.

2511 Permissible difference between the positions of the specified end point and

the end point calculated from the increment or decrement and number of

circles in spiral or conical interpolation


[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis

[Valid data range] 0 - 999999999Specify the maximum permissible difference (absolute value)between the positions of the specified end pint and the end pointcalculated from the increment or decrement and number of circles inspiral or conical interpolation.

2524 Radius of virtual circle for feedrate specification on virtual circle for rotation

axis


[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)[Minimum unit of data] The increment system of the axis is followed.

[Valid data range] 0 or a positive 9-digit least input increment (See Standard ParameterSetting Table (B).)(0.0 to +999999.999 for IS-B)Set the radius of a virtual circle when using the method of feedratespecification on a virtual circle for a rotation axis.When 0.0 is specified for a rotation axis, the rotation axis is excludedfrom feedrate calculation.


- 179 -

2590 First character to be made to blink in G05.1 Q1 mode

2591 Second character to be made to blink in G05.1 Q1 mode

2592 Third character to be made to blink in G05.1 Q1 mode

2593 Fourth character to be made to blink in G05.1 Q1 mode

2594 Fifth character to be made to blink in G05.1 Q1 mode

2595 Sixth character to be made to blink in G05.1 Q1 mode

2596 Seventh character to be made to blink in G05.1 Q1 mode

NOTETo enable changes made to these parameters, turnthe power off and on again.


[Valid data range] 0 to 95Specify the first to seventh characters that should blink in G05.1 Q1mode (acceleration/deceleration mode before look-ahead interpolationand fine HPCC mode) using ASCII codes in decimal format.If all the parameters are reset to 0, the character string "HPCC"blinks.Any code No. from 032 to 095 in the "Character versus Code Table"can be specified in these parameters.


- 180 -

4.15 SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT AND CS CONTOUR CONTROLFUNCTION PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 3000 AND LATER)

A detailed description of parameters between 3000 and 3999 isomitted.See FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series PARAMETERMANUAL (B-65160E) for details.


- 181 -

4.16 SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT AND CS CONTOUR CONTROLFUNCTION PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 3000 AND LATER)

4601 Output format of files


[Valid data range] 0 - 1Specify the format to use when the data obtained by tracing with thewaveform diagnosis function is to be output to an externalinput/output device.0: FS15i format1: FS15B format (old format)

4602 Servo alarm trigger


[Valid data range] 0 - 1If the trace condition is either type 2 or 3, specify whether theoccurrence of a servo alarm should be considered a trigger event.0: The occurrence of a servo alarm is considered a trigger event.1: The occurrence of a servo alarm is not considered a trigger event.

4603 Machine signal trigger


[Valid data range] 0 - 3If the trace condition is either type 2 or 3, specify whether a machinesignal should be considered a trigger event.0: An on machine signal is considered a trigger event.1: An off machine signal is considered a trigger event.2: A machine signal change is considered a trigger event.3: A machine signal is not considered a trigger event.

4604 Trace time



Specify the time in which data is to be traced.


- 182 -

4606 Trace condition


[Valid data range] 0 - 2Set a trace condition.0: Type 1 - Data within a specified time immediately after [Trace]

is pressed is acquired.1: Type 2 - Data within a specified time immediately after the

occurrence of an event is acquired after [Trace] is pressed.2: Type 3 - Data within a specified time immediately before the

occurrence of an event is acquired after [Trace] is pressed.

4607 Machine signal trigger (address)


[Valid data range] 0 - 49997Specify the machine signal to be considered a trigger event.Number of ten thousands: Signal type (1: G, 2: F, 3: X, and 4: Y)Number of thousands, number of hundreds, and number of tens:Signal addressNumber of units: Bit number[Example] 10043 = G4.3(SBK)

4608 Delay time



If the trace condition is type 3, specify the time by which the end of atrace after the occurrence of an event is to be delayed.

4610 Horizontal axis graduation unit



Specify the value equivalent to one graduation on the horizontal axis(time axis).

4611 Axis number 1


[Valid data range] 1 - 24Specify the axis number of trace data 1.


- 183 -

4612 Axis number 2



4613 Data type 1


[Valid data range] 0 - 10Specify the data type of trace data item 1.0: None1: Servo error2: Servo pulses to be generated3: Servo torque4: Servo pulses after acc/dec5: Actual speed6: Servo electric current command7: Data during heat simulation8: Composite speed for all axes9: Spindle speed10: Spindle load meter

4614 Data type 2


[Valid data range] 0 - 10Specify the data type of trace data item 2.The settings are given in the explanation of parameter 4613.

4615 Vertical axis graduation unit 1


[Valid data range] 1 - 500000Specify the value equivalent to one graduation on the horizontal axisof trace data item 1.





- 184 -

4619 Machine signal 1


[Valid data range] 0 - 49997Specify machine signal 1 to be traced.Number of ten thousands: Signal type (1: G, 2: F, 3: X, and 4: Y)Number of thousands, number of hundreds, and number of tens:Signal addressNumber of units: Bit number[Example] 10043 = G4.3(SBK)



[Valid data range] 0 - 49997Specify machine signal 2 to be traced.The settings are given in the explanation of parameter 4619.







4623 Waveform color 1


[Valid data range] 0 - 7Specify the drawing color of trace data item 1. 0: White 1: Red 2: Green 3: Yellow 4: Blue 5: Violet 6: Light blue 7: White


- 185 -




4632 Axis number 3



4633 Axis number 4



4634 Data type 3



4635 Data type 4







- 186 -










#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

4660 ATL SPL TQ2 TQ1


#0, #1 TQ1 TQ2Set a store interval for the fine torque sensing function.

Store interval TQ2 TQ1

8ms 0 016ms 0 132ms 1 0

#2 SPL The function for saving stored disturbance load torque data as sampledata is:0: Disabled.1: Enabled.

#4 ATL On the fine torque sensing graph screen, a modification to theabnormal load detection alarm threshold value is:0: Impossible.1: Possible.When this bit is set to 1, a modification to the abnormal loaddetection alarm threshold value can be made on the fine torque


- 187 -

sensing graph screen, and such a modification is reflected inparameter No. 1997 (servo axis) or parameter No. 3341 (spindle).

4670 Axis 1 subject to fine torque sensing





[Valid data range] -4 to 24Specify axes subject to fine torque sensing. When servo axes aresubject to fine torque sensing, specify controlled axis numbers in therange 1 to the maximum number of controlled axes. When spindlesare subject to fine torque sensing, reverse the sign of the spindlenumbers and specify spindle numbers in the range –1 to the maximumnumber of controlled spindles with the minus sign.

NOTE1 When 0 is set as axis N subject to fine torque

sensing, the settings for axis N+1 and up are ignored,and the setting of 0 is assumed.

2 When a servo axis is subject to fine torque sensing,bit 0 of parameter No. 1958 for the axis needs to beset to 1. When this parameter is set to 0 for acontrolled axis, the torque sensing command signal,even entered, is not stored.

4730 Target board specification 1


[Valid data range] 0 - 1In trace data 1 of waveform diagnosis function, the target board forthe tracing of specified memory is specified.0: CNC main board1: Customer's board


- 188 -

4731 Access size specification 1


[Valid data range] 0 - 4In trace data 1 of waveform diagnosis function, the access size for thetracing of specified memory is specified.0: One byte (signed)1: One byte (unsigned)2: Two bytes (signed)3: Two bytes (unsigned)4: Four bytes (signed)

NOTEIf an illegal access size is specified, a system alarmmay be issued.

4732 Memory address specification 1


[Valid data range] 0 - 999999999In trace data 1 of waveform diagnosis function, the memory addressfor the tracing of specified memory is specified.

NOTESpecify an existing address.If an illegal address is specified, a system alarm maybe issued.



[Valid data range] 0 - 1In trace data 2 of waveform diagnosis function, the target board forthe tracing of specified memory is specified.0: CNC main board1: Customer’s board


- 189 -













- 190 -













- 191 -










- 192 -

4.17 DRAWING PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 4820 AND LATER)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

4820 BGG


#2 BGG Switch between drawing functions. The operable function is:0: Tool path drawing.1: Background drawing.

4821 Specifying the cutting feed color in tool path drawing


[Valid data range] 0 - 7Specify the color of the cutting feed path in tool path drawing andbackground drawing. 0: White 1: Red 2: Green 3: Yellow 4: Blue 5: Violet 6: Light blue 7: White

4822 Specifying rapid traverse color in tool path drawing


[Valid data range] 0 - 7Specify the color of the rapid traverse path in tool path drawing andbackground drawing. 0: White 1: Red 2: Green 3: Yellow 4: Blue 5: Violet 6: Light blue 7: White

4823 Specifying the graphic coordinate system


[Valid data range] 1 - 12Specify the graphic coordinate system in tool path drawing andbackground drawing. 1: XY 2: YZ 3: ZX 4: YX 5: ZY 6: XZ 7: XYZ 8: YZX 9: ZXY 10: XY+XZ 11: YZ+YX 12: ZX+ZY


- 193 -

4824 Color indicating reverse operation in tool path drawing


[Valid data range] 0 - 7Specify the color used to indicate the path of reverse operation in toolpath drawing. 0: White 1: Red 2: Green 3: Yellow 4: Blue 5: Violet 6: Light blue 7: White

4831 Initial value of horizontal angular displacement


[Unit of data] degree[Valid data range] -360 - 360

Set the initial value of horizontal angular displacement when thegraphic coordinate system is three-dimensional.

4832 Angular displacement on horizontal plane of vertical rotation axis



Set the angular displacement on a horizontal plane of a verticalrotation axis when the graphic coordinate system is three-dimensional.

4833 Horizontal angular displacement



Set the horizontal angular displacement when the graphic coordinatesystem is three-dimensional.The actual angular displacement is equal to the initial value ofhorizontal angular displacement (parameter 4831) plus the value ofthis parameter.

4834 Vertical angular displacement



Set the vertical angular displacement when the graphic coordinatesystem is three-dimensional.


- 194 -

4835 Scale factor


[Unit of data] multiplied by 0.01[Valid data range] 1 - 10000

Set the scale factor.

4881 Center coordinate of the drawing range



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the center coordinate of the drawing range.

4882 Maximum coordinate of the drawing range



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the maximum coordinate of the drawing range.

4883 Minimum coordinate of the drawing range



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the minimum coordinate of the drawing range


- 195 -

4.18 DATA I/O PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 5000 AND LATER)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5000 CDC ETX TCC ECH 422



#0 422 The interface between the host and the remote buffer is:0: An RS-232-C interface.1: RS-422 interface.The system automatically sets this bit by deciding whether the remotebuffer board provides an RS-232-C or RS-422 interface.

#1 ECH At the time of switching between remote and DNC operations (withprotocol A only), the response of SAT is that:0: 0 is always sent to the data section of SAT (byte position 1).1: The data section of SET (byte position 1) is echoed back to the

data section of SAT (byte position 1).#2 TCC The communication code is:

0: ASCII for protocol A.For protocol B/extended protocol B, DC1, DC2, DC3, DC4,SYN, and NAK are ISO codes.

1: ISO for protocol A.For protocol B/extended protocol B, DC1, DC2, DC3, DC4,SYN, and NAK are ASCII codes.

#3 ETX0: For protocol A, the message end code is the ASCII/ISO CR code.

For protocol B/extended protocol B, neither CNC resets noralarms are posted to the host computer.

1: For protocol A, the message end code is the ASCII/ISO ETXcode.For protocol B/extended protocol B, the SYN code is sent whenthe CNC is reset, and the NAK code when an alarm is issued.Selection between ASCII and ISO is performed with TCC of thisparameter.

For protocol B/extended protocol B, when this bit is 1, the followingparameters also take effect after the power is turned OFF and then ONagain:Nos. 5070, 5072, 5073, 5082, 5083

#4 CDC The CD (signal quality detection) of the RS-232-C interface is:0: Checked.1: Not checked.


- 196 -

5001 Device number of reader/punch unit connected to JD5A of MAIN


[Valid data range] 1 - 6Set the device number of the reader/punch unit connected toconnector JD5A.Set the code numbers of the reader/punch units corresponding todevice numbers 1 to 6 in parameter Nos. 5100 to 5162.

5002 Device number of reader/punch unit connected to JD5B of MAIN


[Valid data range] 1 - 6Set the device number of the reader/punch unit connected toconnector JD5B.Set the code numbers of the reader/punch units corresponding todevice numbers 1 to 6 in parameter Nos. 5100 to 5162.

5003 Device number of reader/punch unit connected to JD36A of the display unit


[Valid data range] 1 - 6Set the device number of the reader/punch unit connected toconnector JD36A.Set the code numbers of the reader/punch units corresponding todevice numbers 1 to 6 in parameter Nos. 5100 to 5162.

5004 Device number of reader/punch unit connected to modem card


[Valid data range] 1 - 6Set the device number of the reader/punch unit connected to modemcard.Set the code numbers of the reader/punch units corresponding todevice numbers 1 to 6 in parameter Nos. 5100 to 5162.

5013 Device number of reader/punch unit connected to JD6A of the display unit


[Valid data range] 1 - 6Set the device number of the reader/punch unit connected toconnector JD6A (RS422 interface) .Set the code numbers of the reader/punch units corresponding todevice numbers 1 to 6 in parameter Nos. 5100 to 5162.


- 197 -

5020 Device number for a reader/punch attached to JD5C on the additional-axis

board


[Valid data range] 1 to 6This parameter specifies the device number for a reader/punchattached to connector JD5C.The specification data numbers for devices corresponding toreader/punch device numbers 1 to 6 are specified in parameter Nos.5100 to 5162.

5021 Device number for a reader/punch attached to JD6B on the additional-axis

board


[Valid data range] 1 to 6This parameter specifies the device number for a reader/punchattached to connector JD6B.The specification data numbers for devices corresponding toreader/punch device numbers 1 to 6 are specified in parameter Nos.5100 to 5162.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5040 DSW


#0 DSW When an error occurs in a data server operation (excluding read andpunch operations) :0: A BG alarm is issued.1: A warning is issued.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5042 MNC


NOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the power must be offturned off then back on for the setting to becomeeffective.

#0 MNC Specifies whether to perform DNC operation and external devicesubprogram calls from a memory card.0: Do not perform these operations.1: Perform these operations.


- 198 -

5070 Minimum baud rate at which reception clock pulses are supplied from the

remote device (for the RS-422 remote buffer only)


[Valid data range] 0 - 13Boundary value at which the reception clock of the CNC issynchronized with the host clock.1 : 50, 2 : 100, 3 : 110, 4 : 150, 5 : 200, 6 : 300, 7 : 600. 8 : 1200,9 : 2400, 10 : 4800, 11 : 9600, 12 : 19200, 13 : 38400 [bps]

If using the PROGRAM FILE Mate, set 13.

NOTEAt 38400 bps or higher, be sure to synchronize thereception clock.If the transfer rate exceeds the setting of thisparameter, the reception clock of the CNC issynchronized with the host clock (provided that thevalue of parameter No. 5073 is equal to or greaterthan the value of No. 5070).If communicating at high transmission rate usinganother RS-422 interface, refer to the supplementarymanual supplied with the remote buffer for details.

5071 RS-422 I/O device type number (remote buffer)


[Valid data range] 0,8Set the type number of the host of the remote buffer.8: PROGRAM FILE Mate0: Type other than the aboveFor example, if using a personal computer, set 0.

5072 Number of RS-422 stop bits (remote buffer)


[Valid data range] 1, 2Specify the number of RS-422 device stop bits of the remote buffer.If the number of stop bits is specified as 1, a parity bit is attached.

NOTEIf the number of stop bits is specified as 1, a parity bitis attached.


- 199 -

5073 RS-422 baud rate (remote buffer)


[Valid data range] 2 – 15Specify the RS422 device baud rate of the remote buffer.The valid settings are given below, together with the correspondingbaud rates.1 : 50, 2 : 100, 3 : 110, 4 : 150, 5 : 200, 6 : 300, 7 : 600. 8 : 1200,9 : 2400, 10 : 4800, 11 : 9600, 12 : 19200, 13 : 38400, 14 : 76800,15 : 86400 [bps]

5074 RS-422 protocol selection (remote buffer)

NOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the power mustbe off turned off then back on for the setting tobecome effective.


[Valid data range] 1 - 31: Protocol B2: Extended protocol B3: Protocol A/extended protocol ASwitching between protocol A and extended protocol A is performedwith the appropriate parameter of the <SET> command.For details of each protocol, refer to the supplementary manualsupplied with the remote buffer.

NOTEIf protocol A/extended protocol A is selected, anychanges to the following parameters take effectafter the power is turned OFF and then ON again:Nos. 5070, 5072, and 5073

5081 RS-232-C I/O device type number (remote buffer)


[Valid data range] 0,7,8Set the type number of the RS-232-C I/O device host of the remotebuffer.7: FANUC Cassette, PROGRAM FILE8: PROGRAM FILE Mate, Floppy Cassette0: Type other than the aboveFor example, if using a personal computer, set 0.


- 200 -

5082 Number of RS-232-C stop bits (remote buffer)


[Valid data range] 1, 2Specify the number of RS-232-C device stop bits of the remote buffer.

NOTEIf the number of stop bits is specified as 1, a parity bitis attached.

5083 RS-232-C baud rate (remote buffer)


[Valid data range] 1 – 12Specify the RS-232-C device baud rate of the remote buffer.The valid settings are given below, together with the correspondingbaud rates.1 : 50, 2 : 100, 3 : 110, 4 : 150, 5 : 200, 6 : 300, 7 : 600. 8 : 1200,9 : 2400, 10 : 4800, 11 : 9600, 12 : 19200 [bps]

5084 RS-232-C protocol selection (remote buffer)



[Valid data range] 1 - 31: Protocol B2: Extended protocol B3: Protocol A/extended protocol ASwitching between protocol A and extended protocol A is performedwith the appropriate parameter of the <SET> command.For details of each protocol, refer to the supplementary manual(B-63322EN-1) supplied with the remote buffer.

NOTEIf protocol A/extended protocol A is selected, anychanges to the following parameters take effect afterthe power is turned OFF and then ON again:Nos. 5082 and 5083


- 201 -

5110 Code number of reader/punch unit corresponding to device number 1


[Valid data range] 1 - 8The specification number of the reader/punch device corresponding todevice number 1 is set.The following lists the specification numbers and correspondingreader/punch device specifications:

SpecificationNo.

Reader/punch device specifications

1 Uses control code (DC1 to DC4) . Outputs feeds withpunch. Tape reader.

2 Does not use control code (DC1 to DC4) . Outputsfeeds with punch.

3 Uses control code (DC1 to DC4) . Does not outputfeeds with punch.

4 Does not use control code (DC1 to DC4) . Does notoutput feeds with punch.

5 Portable tape reader6 PPR, Handy File (local mode)7 FANUC Cassette (bubble cassette)8 Floppy Cassette, PROGRAM FILE Mate

Handy File (remote mode)

5111 Number of stop bits of reader/punch unit corresponding to device number 1


[Valid data range] 1 - 2Set the number of stop bits of reader/punch unit corresponding todevice number 1.

5112 Baud rate of reader/punch unit corresponding to device number 1


[Valid data range] 1 - 12The baud rate of the reader/punch device corresponding to devicenumber 1 is set.The following lists the setting numbers and corresponding actual baudrates:

Setting number Baud rate Setting number Baud rate

1 50 7 6002 100 8 12003 110 9 24004 150 10 48005 200 11 96006 300 12 19200


- 202 -

















[Valid data range] 1 - 12The method for setting these parameters Nos. 5120 to 5162 is thesame as for setting the specifications of the input/output unitcorresponding to device number 1.


- 203 -

4.19 STROKE LIMIT PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 5200 ANDLATER)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5200 PLC POS OUT


#0 OUT Specifies whether to use the interior or exterior of stored stroke limit2.0: The interior of stored stroke limit 2 is used as the inhibited area.1: The exterior of stored stroke limit 2 is used as the inhibited area.

#1 POS Specifies whether to enable the position switch function.0: Disabled.1: Enabled.

#7 PLC Specifies whether to perform pre-move stroke check.0: Pre-move stroke check is not performed.1: Pre-move stroke check is performed.

NOTEThis parameter is valid only when the pre-movestroke option is provided.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5201 PSA DLM LMS


#3 LMS Specifies whether to enable the stored stroke limit switching signalEXLM.0: Disabled.1: Enabled.

#4 DLM Specifies whether to enable the axis-direction-specific stored strokelimit switching signals +EXLx and -EXLx.0: Disabled.1: Enabled.When this parameter is set to "1," the stored stroke limit switchingsignal EXLM, common to all axes, is disabled.

#5 PSA Specifies whether to consider the servo delay (positional deviation)and acceleration/deceleration delay when the position switch functiondetermines the operation range.0: Do not consider these delays.1: Consider these delays.


- 204 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5210 OT2

[Input type] Setting input[Data type] Bitaxis

#0 OT2 Specifies whether to check stored stroke limit 2 for each axis (validwhen OUT is set to 0.) .0: Stored stroke limit 2 is not checked for each axis.1: Stored stroke limit 2 is checked for each axis.

NOTEIf OUT (bit 0) of parameter No. 5200 is set to 1,stored stroke limit 2 is checked for all thecontrolled axes.

5220 Positive (+) direction coordinate of stored stroke limit 1 of each axis I



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the coordinate in the positive-direction machine coordinate systemof stored stroke limit 1 for each axis.

5221 Negative (-) direction coordinate of stored stroke limit 1 of each axis I



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the coordinate in the negative-direction machine coordinatesystem of stored stroke limit 1 for each axis.

5222 Positive (+) direction coordinate of stored stroke limit 2 of each axis



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the coordinate in the positive-direction machine coordinate systemof stored stroke limit 2 for each axis.


- 205 -

5223 Negative (-) direction coordinate of stored stroke limit 2 of each axis



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the coordinate in the negative-direction machine coordinatesystem of stored stroke limit 2 for each axis.

5226 Mark 2 interval for a linear scale having reference marks




Specifies the mark 2 interval for a linear scale having referencemarks.

5227 Distance between the origin of the linear scale having reference marks and

the reference position




Specifies the distance between the origin of the linear scale havingreference marks and the reference position. The "scale origin" here isthat point where mark 1 coincides with mark 2. Usually, this pointdoes not physical exist on the scale.


- 206 -

5228 Distance 2 from the zero point of the distance coded linear scale to reference

position



[Unit of data] Detection unit[Valid data range] -999 to 999

This parameter is used when the distance from the zero point of thedistance coded linear scale to the reference position exceeds the rangeset in parameter No. 5227.The distance from the scale zero point to reference position isobtained using the following expression:Distance from the scale zero point to reference position =(value in parameter No. 5228)×1,000,000,000+(value in parameter No.5227)The scale zero point is that point at which mark 1 and mark 2 match.Normally, this point is a virtual point that does not physically exist onthe scale.

NOTE1 Set parameter Nos. 5227 and 5228 so that the

distance from the scale zero point to the referenceposition is within the range from -999,999,999,999to +999,999,999,999 If a value exceeding therange is set, the alarm OT0448 occur.

2 The scale body can not cross the scale zero point.The scale range must be within the range fromscale zero point to next scale zero point.

If the reference position is on the positive side when viewed from thescale zero point, a positive value is set in this parameter. If thereference position is on the negative side when viewed from the scalezero point, a negative value is set. For details, refer to "Distancecoded linear scale" in the connection manual (function).

Scale bodyScale zero point

Mark 1 = mark 2 Mark 2Mark 1 Mark 2Mark 1

Reference position

Scale end

42.0 8.2 41.8

Parameter No.1896

Parameter No.5226

Parameter No.5228×1,000,000,000+parameter No.5227

8.0


- 207 -

5260 Coordinate II along each axis in the plus direction of stored stroke limit 1.



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set a coordinate along each axis of the machine coordinate system inthe plus direction of stored stroke limit 1.When the stored stroke limit switch signal EXLM is set to 1, or thestored stroke limit switch signal based on the axis direction signal+EXLx is set to 1, a stroke limit check is made using this parameterinstead of parameter No. 5220.

5261 Coordinate II along each axis in the minus direction of stored stroke limit 1



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set a coordinate along each axis of the machine coordinate system inthe minus direction of stored stroke limit 1.When the stored stroke limit switch signal EXLM is set to 1, or thestored stroke limit switch signal based on the axis direction signal -EXLx is set to 1, a stroke limit check is made using this parameterinstead of parameter No. 5221.


- 208 -

5270 Controlled axis for which the 1-st position switch function is performed

(PSWA01)

5271 Controlled axis for which the 2-nd position switch function is performed

(PSWA02)

5272 Controlled axis for which the 3-rd position switch function is performed

(PSWA03)

5273 Controlled axis for which the 4-th position switch function is performed

(PSWA04)


(PSWA05)


(PSWA06)


(PSWA07)


(PSWA08)


(PSWA09)


(PSWA10)


[Valid data range] 0 - Max axesSet the controlled axis number corresponding to one of the first totenth position switch functions. When the machine coordinate of thecorresponding axis is within a parameter-set range, the correspondingposition switch signal is output to the PMC. The position switchsignal corresponding to the n-th position switch function is PSWn (n:1 to 10) .

NOTEThe setting of 0 means that the position switchfunction of the number is not used.


- 209 -

5280 Maximum value of the operating range of the 1-st position switch (PSW101)

5281 Maximum value of the operating range of the 2-nd position switch (PSW102)

5282 Maximum value of the operating range of the 3-rd position switch (PSW103)

5283 Maximum value of the operating range of the 4-th position switch (PSW104)








[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis

[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the maximum value of the operating range of the first to tenthposition switches.

NOTE1 For a diameter-specified axis, use radius values to

specify the parameters used to set the maximumand minimum values of an operating range.

2 The position switch function is enabled uponcompletion of reference position return.


- 210 -

5290 Minimum value of the operating range of the 1-st position switch (PSW201)

5291 Minimum value of the operating range of the 2-nd position switch (PSW202)

5292 Minimum value of the operating range of the 3-rd position switch (PSW203)

5293 Minimum value of the operating range of the 4-th position switch (PSW204)








[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis

[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the minimum value of the operating range of the first to tenthposition switches.

NOTE1 For a diameter-specified axis, use radius values to

specify the parameters used to set the maximumand minimum values of an operating range.

2 The position switch function is enabled uponcompletion of reference position return.


- 211 -

4.20 PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION PARAMETERS (DATA NO.5420 AND LATER)

5420 Number of pitch error compensation point of reference position for each axis



[Valid data range] From 0 through 1279 or from 0 through 3071 depending on thenumber of controlled axes is less than or equal to 10 or greater than10, respectively.Set the number of the pitch error compensation point corresponding tothe reference position for each axis.

In rotation-axis pitch error compensation, a compensation pointnumber is basically set with the 0-degree point (machine zero point)set as the reference position. If the reference position is not located atthe 0-degree point (machine zero point) , set parameters as follows:- Set the parameter (No. 5424) specifying the interval between

pitch error compensation points so that the reference position isan integral multiple of the interval away from the 0-degree point(machine zero point)

- Set the parameter (No. 5422) specifying the number of thefarthest compensation point in the positive direction so that itspecifies the 360-degree (= 0-degree) point.

- Set the parameter (No. 5425) specifying angular displacementper rotation to 360 degrees.

5421 Number of pitch error compensation point with the largest negative value for

each axis



[Valid data range] From 0 through 1279 or from 0 through 3071 depending on thenumber of controlled axes is less than or equal to 10 or greater than10, respectively.Set the number of the pitch error compensation point with the largestnegative value for each axis.


- 212 -

In rotation-axis pitch error compensation, be sure to assign thenumber of the farthest pitch error compensation point in the negativedirection to a compensation point positioned next to the 0-degreepoint in the positive direction.

NOTEWhen bidirectional pitch error compensation isenabled, this parameter specifies the number of thefarthest pitch error compensation point in thenegative direction in the case of positive-directionmovement.

5422 Number of pitch error compensation point with the largest positive value for

each axis



[Valid data range] From 0 through 1279 or from 0 through 3071 depending on thenumber of controlled axes is less than or equal to 10 or greater than10, respectively.Set the number of the pitch error compensation point with the largestpositive value for each axis.

NOTEA value greater than the setting of parameter No. 5420must be set.When bidirectional pitch error compensation isenabled, this parameter specifies the number of thefarthest pitch error compensation point in the positivedirection in the case of positive-direction movement.

5423 Magnification of pitch error compensation for each axis



[Valid data range] 0 - 100Set the magnification of pitch error compensation for each axis.When 1 is set as the magnification of pitch error compensation, theunit for compensation data is the same as the detection unit.


- 213 -

5424 Interval of pitch error compensation points for each axis




[Valid data range] See the following descriptions.Pitch error compensation points are set at regular intervals. Set thisinterval for each axis.The minimum interval of pitch error compensation points isdetermined from the following equation: Minimum interval = maximum feedrate/7500Unit:mm, inch, deg or mm/min, inch /min, deg/minExample: When the maximum feedrate is 15000 mm/min, theminimum interval of pitch error compensation points is 2 mm.

5425 Angular displacement per rotation in rotation-axis pitch error compensation




[Valid data range] See the following descriptions.For rotation-axis pitch error compensation (with bit 2 (ROP) ofparameter No. 1006 set to 1) , set angular displacement per rotationfor each axis. The angular displacement per rotation need not alwaysbe 360 degrees. The period in rotation-axis pitch error compensationcan be set.The angular displacement per rotation, compensation interval, andnumber of compensation points must satisfy the following equation:Angular displacement per rotation = compensation interval x numberof compensation pointsThe sum of the compensation values per rotation must always be 0. (Ex) Rotary-axis type pitch error compensation

Comp. point 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25Comp. value +1 +1 +2 -1 -2 -2 -2 -1 +2 +1 -2 -1 +1 +1 +2

In this case the set values are as follows.Data no. 5420 5421 5422 5423 5424 5425

Value 10 1 25 1 24.0 360.


- 214 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5426 IPP IPC BDP HPE



#3 HPE The output of interpolation-type pitch error compensation, three-dimensional error compensation, and interpolation-type straightnesscompensation is based on:0: Detection unit1: 1/1000 of the detection unit (same as for nano compensation)

#5 BDP Specifies whether to use bidirectional pitch error compensation.0: Do not use.1: Use.

#6 IPC Specifies whether to use the interpolating straightness compensationfunction.0: Do not use.1: Use.This parameter is valid only when it is set for those move axes(controlled axis numbers set in parameter No. 5481 to No. 5485) .

#7 IPP Specifies whether to use interpolating pitch error compensation.0: Do not use.1: Use.In interpolating pitch error compensation, compensation pulses areoutput one at a time at constant intervals between adjacent pitch errorcompensation points.When second cyclical pitch error compensation and interpolatingpitch error compensation are used at the same time, second cyclicalpitch error compensation pulses are output according to theinterpolating pitch error compensation method between compensationpoints set by second cyclical pitch error compensation.When a greater feedrate is used, multiple compensation pulses may beoutput.The minimum interval where multiple pulses are not output at a timeis determined by the following equation:Minimum interval of pitch error compensation points = (Fmax/7500)× (Pmax+1) Fmax : Maximum feedrate Pmax : Maximum pitch error compensation valueExample: When the maximum feedrate is 15000 mm/min, and themaximum pitch error compensation value is 7 pulses, the minimuminterval of compensation points is 16 mm.

NOTEThe interpolating pitch error compensation functioncannot be used for spindle positioning.


- 215 -

5427 Number of the farthest bidirectional pitch error compensation point in the

negative direction (in the case of negative-direction movement)



[Valid data range] From 0 through 1279 (or from 10000 through 11279) or from 0through 3071 (or from 10000 through 13071) depending on thenumber of controlled axes is less than or equal to 10 or greater than10, respectively.When using bidirectional pitch error compensation, set the number ofthe farthest compensation point in the negative direction in the case ofnegative-direction movement.

NOTE1 In parameter No. 5421, set the number of the

farthest compensation point in the negative directionin the case of positive-direction movement.

2 No set of compensation data for one axis mustextend from 1279 (or 3071) to 10000.

5428 Pitch error compensation value at the reference position when a movement

is made to the reference position in the direction opposite to the reference

position return direction




By using an absolute value, set a pitch error compensation value at thereference position when a movement is made to the reference positionin the negative direction if the reference position return direction (bit5 (ZMI) of parameter No. 1006) is positive, or when a movement ismade to the reference position in the positive direction if the referenceposition return direction is negative.


- 216 -

5430 Number of the farthest second cyclical pitch error compensation point in the

negative direction for each axis



[Valid data range] From 0 through 1279 or from 0 through 3071 depending on thenumber of controlled axes is less than or equal to 10 or greater than10, respectively.The compensation point specified with this parameter is used as areference point for second cyclical pitch error compensation. Thisreference point is used as a compensation point at the referenceposition. The compensation value at the compensation reference pointmust be 0.

5431 Number of the farthest second cyclical pitch error compensation point in the

positive direction for each axis



[Valid data range] From 0 through 1279 or from 0 through 3071 depending on thenumber of controlled axes is less than or equal to 10 or greater than10, respectively.Set the number of the farthest second cyclical pitch errorcompensation point in the positive direction for each axis.

5432 Interval between second cyclical pitch error compensation points for each

axis




[Valid data range] From 0 through the space between neiboring points of the pitch errorcompensation (parameter no.5424) .


- 217 -

Set the interval between second cyclical pitch error compensationpoints for each axis.

5433 Magnification for second cyclical pitch error compensation for each axis



[Valid data range] 0 - 100Set a magnification for second cyclical pitch error compensation foreach axis.When 1 is set as the magnification for second cyclical pitch errorcompensation, the unit of compensation data is the same as thedetection unit.

5440 Axis for which three-dimensional error compensation is performed (1st axis)

5441 Axis for which three-dimensional error compensation is performed (2nd axis)

5442 Axis for which three-dimensional error compensation is performed (3rd axis)



[Valid data range] 1 - Max axesSet three axes for which three-dimensional error compensation isperformed.

5443 Number of three-dimensional error compensation points (1-st axis)

5444 Number of three-dimensional error compensation points (2-nd axis)

5445 Number of three-dimensional error compensation points (3-rd axis)


[Valid data range] 2 - 25Set the number of three-dimensional error compensation points.


- 218 -

5446 Number of the three-dimensional error compensation point at the reference

position (1-st axis)


position (2-nd axis)


position (3-rd axis)


[Valid data range] From 0 through the number of the compensation pointsSet the number of the three-dimensional error compensation point atthe reference position.

5449 Magnification for three-dimensional error compensation (1-st axis)

5450 Magnification for three-dimensional error compensation (2-nd axis)

5451 Magnification for three-dimensional error compensation (3-rd axis)


[Valid data range] 1 - 100Set a magnification for three-dimensional error compensation.

5452 Three-dimensional error compensation interval (1-st axis)

5453 Three-dimensional error compensation interval (2-nd axis)

5454 Three-dimensional error compensation interval (3-rd axis)


[Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit)[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis

[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set a three-dimensional error compensation interval.


- 219 -

5461 Gradient compensation point number a for each axis

5462 Gradient compensation point number b for each axis

5463 Gradient compensation point number c for each axis

5464 Gradient compensation point number d for each axis



[Valid data range] From 0 through 1279 or from 0 through 3071 depending on thenumber of controlled axes is less than or equal to 10 or greater than10, respectively.Set a gradient compensation point. A compensation point to be setbecomes a compensation number in stored pitch error compensation.

5471 Compensation alpha at gradient compensation point number d for each axis

5472 Compensation beta at gradient compensation point number b for each axis

5473 Compensation gamma at gradient compensation point number c for each axis

5474 Compensation delta at gradient compensation point number d for each axis




Set a compensation for each compensation point.


- 220 -

5481 Axis number of straightness compensation move axis 1







[Valid data range] From 1 through the number of controlled axesSet the axis number of a straightness compensation move axis.

NOTECompensation is not applied when 0 is specified.

5491 Axis number of compensation axis 1 for straightness compensation move axis 1







[Valid data range] From 1 through the number of controlled axesSet the axis number of a compensation axis.

NOTECompensation is not applied when 0 is specified.


- 221 -

5501 Compensation point number a of straightness compensation move axis 1

5502 Compensation point number b of straightness compensation move axis 1

5503 Compensation point number c of straightness compensation move axis 1

5504 Compensation point number d of straightness compensation move axis 1



[Unit of data] detection unit[Valid data range] From 0 through 1279 or from 0 through 3071 depending on the

number of controlled axes is less than or equal to 10 or greater than10, respectively.Set a compensation point number in stored pitch error compensation.Fourth among the four compensation points set for each move axis.







[Valid data range] From 0 through 1279 or from 0 through 3071 depending on thenumber of controlled axes is less than or equal to 10 or greater than10, respectively.Set a compensation point number in stored pitch error compensation.Fourth among the four compensation points set for each move axis.


- 222 -







[Valid data range] From 0 through 1279 or from 0 through 3071 depending on thenumber of controlled axes is less than or equal to 10 or greater than10, respectively.Set a compensation point number in stored pitch error compensation.Fourth among the four compensation points set for each move axis.

5551 Compensation corresponding to compensation point number a of move axis 1

5552 Compensation corresponding to compensation point number b of move axis 1

5553 Compensation corresponding to compensation point number c of move axis 1

5554 Compensation corresponding to compensation point number d of move axis 1




Note) Set a compensation for each compensation point.


- 223 -


















- 224 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5580 SMT



#1 SMT The parameters (No. 5591 to No. 5595) for straightness compensationmultiplier:0: Are effective only for the first move axis when two or more

move axes are set using the same axis number.1: Are effective for the respective move axes even when two or

more move axes set using the same axis number.When the straightness compensation function is used, be sure to setSCMT to 1.

5581 Straightness compensation point number of most negative side of move

axis 1


axis 2


axis 3


axis 4


axis 5



[Valid data range] From 1280 through 1919 or from 3072 through 3711 depending onthe number of controlled axes is less than or equal to 10 or greaterthan 10, respectively.Specify the straightness compensation point number located at themost negative position for each move axis.


- 225 -

When the value set in this parameter is out of the data range, an alarmis issued, and compensation cannot be performed.

5591 Straightness compensation multiplier of move axis 1







[Valid data range] 0 - 100Specify a straightness compensation multiplier for each axis.When the straightness compensation multiplier is set to 1, the unit ofcompensation data is the same as the detection unit. When themultiplier is set to 0, straightness compensation is not applied.


- 226 -

4.21 SPINDLE CONTROL PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 5602 ANDLATER)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5602 RSC TLE TPE NAL

[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] Bitspindle

#3 NAL Specifies whether to display an alarm detected by the spindleamplifier.0: Display.1: Do not display. (Valid when bit 0 (ALM) of parameter No. 5807 is set to 0)When this parameter is set to 1, alarms detected by the spindleamplifier are ignored. So, set this parameter to 0 at all times except inmaintenance.

#4 TPE Specifies whether tool offset values (G45 to G48) are included at thecurrent position of the axis under constant surface speed control.0: Included.1: Not included.

#5 TLE Specifies whether a tool length compensation value is included at thecurrent position of the axis under constant surface speed control.0: Included.1: Not included. Usually, set this parameter to 1.

#6 RSC Specifies whether to use the current position for a positioningcommand (such as G00) under constant surface speed control.0: Use.1: Do not use. Instead, the coordinates of an end point are used for

constant surface speed control.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5603 NDP APW


#3 APW Specifies whether to transfer parameter No. 3020 through No. 3031 orparameter No. 3000 through 3393 from the CNC to the spindleamplifier when a serial spindle is used.0: Transfer parameter No. 3020 through No. 3031.1: Transfer parameter No. 3000 through No. 3393.Set 1 only for serial spindle adjustment.

#7 NDP Specifies whether to make a position coder disconnection check whenan analog spindle is used.0: Make a check.1: Do not make a check. (Valid when bit 3 (NAL) of parameter No. 5602) is set to 0)


- 227 -

Set this parameter to 1 if no position coder is installed when an analogspindle is used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5605 IOR TSC TEL


#1 TEL Specifies whether to use exponential acceleration/deceleration orlinear acceleration/deceleration for the spindle and drilling axis in therigid tapping mode.0: Use exponential acceleration/deceleration.1: Use linear acceleration/deceleration (constant acceleration/

deceleration) .Usually, set this parameter to 1.

#2 TSC Specifies whether an acceleration/deceleration time constant/FLfeedrate is fixed or switched among four stages for the spindle anddrilling axis in the rigid tapping mode.0: Fixed. Parameter No. 5751, No. 5752, and No. 57571: Switched among four stages according to the spindle speed S.

Parameter No. 5757, and No. 5884 through No. 5894#4 IOR Specifies whether to cancel the spindle positioning mode upon reset.

0: Do not cancel.1: Cancel.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5606 ORD ORN A/S



#0 A/S Specifies whether the spindle is an analog spindle or serial spindle.0: Analog spindle1: Serial spindle

NOTE1 Spindle analog output option is required when

using an analog spindle.2 Spindle serial output option is required when

using a serial spindle.

#6 ORN Specifies whether to perform spindle orientation at the beginning ofrigid tapping as follows:0: Do not perform.1: Perform.


- 228 -

#7 ORD Specifies the direction of spindle orientation at the beginning ofanalog spindle rigid tapping as follows:0: Positive direction1: Negative directionThis parameter is valid when parameter ORN (bit 6 of parameter No.5606) = 1.For a serial spindle, bit 4 of parameter No. 3004 is used to specify thedirection of spindle orientation. Refer to the FANUC AC SPINDLEMOTOR α Series Parameter Manual (B-65160E) for details.

NOTEWhen this parameter is 0, the direction of spindleorientation is negative if a G84.2/G84.3 block issuesan I/O command (for specifying a negative direction).When the parameter is 1, the direction of spindleorientation is negative also if a G84.2/G83.3 blockissues an I/O command (for specifying a positivedirection).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5607 PLD


#0 PLD Specifies whether the spindle parameters for the serial spindle areautomatically set when power is turned on.0: Automatically set.1: Not automatically set.If this parameter is set to 0 after a motor model code is set, thestandard values matching the motor model are set in the parameters atthe next power-on time, and this parameter is set to 1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5608 RSR


#4 RSR Specifies whether the relationships of G84.2/G84.3, drilling axismove direction, and spindle rotation direction in the rigid tappingmode are of type A or type B.0: Type A1: Type B

Type A: CommandG84.2 G84.3

Positivedirection

Reverserotation

Normalrotation

Point R →point Z

Negativedirection

Normalrotation

Reverserotation


- 229 -

Type B: CommandG84.2 G84.3

Positivedirection

Normalrotation

Reverserotation

Point R →point Z

Negativedirection

Normalrotation

Reverserotation

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5609 MOM NGC


#0 NGC Specifies whether the position gain of the Cs contour control axisunder Cs contour control is automatically set for other servo axes.0: Set automatically.1: Not set automatically.

#2 MOM Specifies whether the serial spindle uses the orientation function ofexternal stop position setting type based on the position coder.0: Do not use the function.1: Use the function.

5611 Number of samples of sampling data for obtaining the mean spindle speed

[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] Integerspindle

[Valid data range] 0 - 4The mean value of sampling data is used for spindle speed indication,feed per revolution, and threading so that the effect of fluctuation ofthe spindle speed is reduced. Set how many samples of sampling dataare required to obtain the mean.0: 1 sample1: 2 samples2: 4 samples3: 8 samples4: 16 samples

NOTEUsually, set this parameter to 2.

5612 Unit of spindle speed to be output by DO signals


[Unit of data] 1/10-N min-1

[Valid data range] 0 - 3Set the unit of output by the specified spindle speed signal, actualspindle speed signal, and maximum spindle speed signal.


- 230 -

nit of output spindle speed Setting1 min-1 0

0.1 min-1 10.01 min-1 2

0.001 min-1 3

5613 Compensation value for the offset voltage of the spindle speed analog

output


[Unit of data] Velo[Valid data range] -1024 - 1024

Set the compensation value for the offset voltage of the spindle speedanalog output.

[Adjustment] To make adjustment, follow the procedure explained below:<1> Set the standard setting 0.<2> Specify the spindle speed at which the spindle speed analog

output becomes 0.<3> Measure the output voltage.<4> Set the value obtained from the following equation in the

parameter.<5> After setting the parameter, specify the spindle speed again at

which the spindle speed analog output becomes 0, then checkthat the output voltage is 0 V.

5614 Data for adjusting the gain of the spindle speed analog output


[Valid data range] 700 - 1250Set data for adjusting the gain of the spindle speed analog output.

[Adjustment] Make adjustment by following the procedure explained below:<1> Set the standard setting to 800.<2> Specify the spindle speed at which the spindle speed analog

output voltage is maximized (10 V) .<3> Measure the output voltage.<4> Set the value obtained from the following equation in the

parameter.

<5> After setting the parameter, specify the spindle speed again atwhich the spindle speed analog output voltage is maximized,then check that the output voltage is 10 V.

12.5

(V) voltagemeasured8191Setting

×−=

800(V) voltageMeasured

10(V)Setting ×=


- 231 -

5621 Maximum spindle speed for the spindle speed fluctuation detection function

(gear 1)





(gear 2)





(gear 3)





(gear 4)





(gear 5)





(gear 6)





- 232 -


(gear 7)





(gear 8)




5680 M code for specifying spindle orientation


[Valid data range] 6 - 97Set an M code for spindle orientation of spindle positioning axes

NOTE- When this parameter is set to 0, all spindle

positioning functions for the spindle are disabled.- M00 to M05, M30, M98, and M99 cannot be set.- No other M codes for the spindle positioning function

can be set at the same time.- M codes used for other functions cannot be set at the

same time.

5681 M code for canceling the spindle positioning mode


[Valid data range] 6 - 97Set an M code for canceling the spindle positioning mode of spindlepositioning axes.

NOTE- M00 to M05, M30, M98, and M99 cannot be set.- No other M codes for the spindle positioning function


same time.


- 233 -

5701 Spindle speed permission ratio (q) at which it is assumed that the spindle

has attained the specified spindle speed


[Unit of data] If parameter FLR (bit 1 of parameter No. 5808) is 0: 1.0%If parameter FLR (bit 1 of parameter No. 5808) is 1: 0.1%

[Valid data range] If parameter FLR (bit 1 of parameter No. 5808) is 0: 1 to 50If parameter FLR (bit 1 of parameter No. 5808) is 1: 1 to 127This parameter specifies a spindle speed permission ratio at which thespindle speed fluctuation detection function assumes that the spindlehas attained the specified speed.

5702 Spindle speed fluctuation ratio (r) not triggering a spindle speed fluctuation

detection alarm


[Unit of data] If parameter FLR (bit 1 of parameter No. 5808) is 0: 1.0%If parameter FLR (bit 1 of parameter No. 5808) is 1: 0.1%

[Valid data range] If parameter FLR (bit 1 of parameter No. 5808) is 0: 1 to 50If parameter FLR (bit 1 of parameter No. 5808) is 1: 1 to 127This parameter specifies a spindle speed fluctuation ratio nottriggering a spindle speed fluctuation detection alarm.

5711 Maximum spindle speed during rigid tapping (first stage)

5712 Maximum spindle speed during rigid tapping (second stage)

5713 Maximum spindle speed during rigid tapping (third stage)

5714 Maximum spindle speed during rigid tapping (fourth stage)

5715 Maximum spindle speed during rigid tapping (fifth stage)

5716 Maximum spindle speed during rigid tapping (sixth stage)

5717 Maximum spindle speed during rigid tapping (seventh stage)

5718 Maximum spindle speed during rigid tapping (eighth stage)



[Valid data range] 0 - 999999999These parameters specify the maximum spindle speed used for eachgear stage during rigid tapping. Issuing an S command having avalue larger than each specified value is results in an alarm.


- 234 -

NOTENo check is made if all of values specified inparameter Nos. 5711 to 5718 are 0.If a nonzero value is specified in a parameter for the"ath" gear stage, and all the parameters for gearslower than the "ath" gear stage are reset to 0, a checkis made with a value specified for the "ath" gear stageif the "ath" stage or a lower stage is selected.For example, when parameter Nos. 5711 to 5713 = 0,parameter No. 5714 = 800, and parameter Nos. 5715to 5718 = 0, a check is made with an upper limit ofS800 if the fourth stage or a lower stage is selected.

5721 Spindle speed fluctuation range (I) not triggering a spindle speed fluctuation

detection alarm



[Valid data range] 0 - 32767This parameter specifies a permissible fluctuation range that does nottrigger a spindle speed fluctuation detection alarm.

5722 Time (p) allowed from when the specified spindle speed is changed until

spindle speed fluctuation detection begins



This parameter specifies the time (p) allowed from when the specifiedspindle speed is changed until spindle speed fluctuation detectionbegins. In other words, spindle speed fluctuation detection is notperformed until the specified time elapses after the specified spindlespeed is changed.

5751 Time constant at acceleration/deceleration of the spindle and drilling axis in

rigid tapping (fixed)



Set an acceleration/deceleration time constant when a fixedacceleration/deceleration time constant is used for the spindle anddrilling axis in rigid tapping (with bit 2 (TSC) of parameter No. 5605set to 0) .


- 235 -

5752 FL feedrate at acceleration/deceleration of the spindle and drilling axis in


[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] Realspindle

[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the drilling axis[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)

(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Set an FL feedrate when a fixed FL feedrate is used for the spindleand drilling axis in rigid tapping (with bit 2 (TSC) of parameter No.5605 set to 0) .

5757 Spindle speed for determining acceleration/deceleration for cutting feed in




[Valid data range] 0 - 32767Set a spindle speed when a fixed acceleration/deceleration timeconstant/FL feedrate is used for the spindle and drilling axis in rigidtapping (with bit 2 (TSC) of parameter No. 5602 set to 0) .When the type of acceleration/deceleration used for rigid tapping islinear acceleration/deceleration (with bit 1 (TEL) of parameter No.5605 set to 1) , the speed set in this parameter is increased ordecreased for the time set in parameter No. 5751.

Acceleration/deceleration

time

Acceleration/deceleration

time

TC TC

S S

command

S S

commandRelationship between Scommand and actualacceleration/decelerationtime during linearacceleration/deceleration

Relationship between S command and actual acceleration/deceleration time during exponentialacceleration/deceleration�


- 236 -

5804 Allowable range for constant spindle speed signal output in exponential

acceleration/deceleration



The constant spindle speed signal is output when the difference in thenumber of remaining pulses held in the acceleration/decelerationcircuit between two adjacent distribution periods (ITPs) is zero. Inexponential acceleration/deceleration, however, the difference in thenumber of remaining pulses between two adjacent ITPs does notbecome zero even when a constant speed is kept. In this case, aconstant speed is assumed to be reached when the difference in thenumber of remaining pulses is within the range specified in thisparameter.

In the figure shown below, the number of pulses accummulated in theacceleration/deceleration circuit at ITP6 is:

α1+α2+α3+α4+α5+α6At ITP7, the number of accummulated pulses is:

α1+α2+α3+α4+α5+α6+α7Therefore, the difference in pulses accummulated in theacceleration/deceleration circuit at ITP6 and ITP7 is α7.The difference will not become 0 indefinitely.

ITP1

Actual feedrate

Time

Feedrate

specified in F

ITP2 ITP3 ITP4 ITP5 ITP6 ITP7

tp1

p2

p3

p4p5

p6p7

α1

α2

α3

α4α5

α6 α7

pn: Number of output pulses in one ITP

αn: Number of pulses accumulated in the acceleration/deceleration circuit in one ITP


- 237 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5807 ALM


#0 ALM Specifies whether the spindle alarms (SPxxxx) of all spindles areenabled or ignored.0: Enabled.1: Ignored.When this parameter is set to 1, the spindle-related alarms are ignored.So, set this parameter to 0 at all times except in maintenance.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5808 FLR OMI


#0 OMI Specifies whether the spindle positioning orientation direction is theplus direction or minus direction when an analog spindle is used.0: Plus direction1: Minus direction

#1 FLR Specifies the measurement unit for the permission ratio (q) andfluctuation ratio (r) specified in spindle speed fluctuation detectionparameter Nos. 5701 and 5702, respectively, as follows:0: 1% units1: 0.1% units

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5809 IOE AIT


#0 AIT Specifies whether to enable or disable axis-by-axis interlock for aspindle positioning axis.0: Disable.1: Enable.

#1 IOE Specifies whether to cancel the spindle positioning mode uponemergency stop.0: Do not cancel.1: Cancel.


- 238 -

5810 Error pulse difference between spindles used to determine the completion of

spindle phase synchronization



5811 Error pulse difference between spindles used to issue a spindle

synchronization control alarm



5813 Cutting in-position width for Cs contour control

[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] Integer spindle


Set a cutting in-position width for Cs contour control.This parameter is used when bit 4 (CCI) of parameter No. 1800 is setto 1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5820 SVP ASD


#4 ASD Specifies whether the spindle speed of a serial spindle is calculatedfrom feedback pulses from the position coder or from speed monitordata.0: Calculated from feedback pulses from the position coder.1: Calculated from speed monitor data.

#7 SVP Specifies whether to display a monitor value or peak hold value as asynchronization error on the spindle screen.0: Display a monitor value.1: Display a peak hold value.Display a peak hold value.Set the display of a synchronization error in rigid tapping and spindlesynchronization.


- 239 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

5821 STJ


#2 STJ Specifies when to stop returning the Cs contour control axis to thereference position.0: At a reset or emergency stop1: At a reset, emergency stop, or when the feed axis direction

selection signal is set to "0."

5841 Motor number of each spindle



[Valid data range] 0 - 4Set a motor number to be assigned to each spindle.0: Uses no subsequent spindle numbers.1: Uses the motor of motor number 1.2: Uses the motor of motor number 2.3: Uses the motor of motor number 3.4: Uses the motor of motor number 4.

5842 Number of pulses of the position coder




Set the number of pulses of the position coder.


- 240 -

5843 Number of pulses of the position detector for a Cs contour control axis




Set the number of pulses of the position detector for a Cs contourcontrol axis.

5844 Axis number subject to constant surface speed control


[Valid data range] 0 - Max axesSpecify the ordinal number of an axis that is subject to constantsurface speed control. If an axis is specified in the program (G96P_) ,constant surface speed control is applied to the axis.If no axis is specified in the program (G96P_) , or P0 is specified,constant surface speed control is applied to the axis set in thisparameter.

NOTEIf 0 is set, the P value programmed with G96P_ isignored, and constant surface speed control is alwaysperformed on the X-axis.

5845 Suffix for serial spindle (main spindle) or analog spindle display


[Valid data range] 0 - 122Set a suffix for spindle speed display on a screen such as the positiondisplay screen.

Setting Character used as suffix0, 32 Blank

1 to 9, 48 to 57 Numeric 0 to 965 to 90 Uppercase letter A to Z

97 to 122 Lowercase letter a to z


- 241 -

5846 Suffix for serial spindle (sub-spindle) display


[Valid data range] 0 - 122Set a suffix for spindle speed display on a screen such as the positiondisplay screen.

Setting Character used as suffix0, 32 Blank

1 to 9, 48 to 57 Numeric 0 to 965 to 90 Uppercase letter A to Z

97 to 122 Lowercase letter a to z

5847 Number of teeth on the position coder gear in speed control (feed per

revolution, threading, and so forth)



[Valid data range] 1 - 9999Set the number of teeth on the position coder gear in speed control(feed per revolution, threading, and so forth) .

5848 Number of teeth on the spindle gear in speed control (feed per revolution,

threading, and so forth)



[Valid data range] 1 - 9999Set the number of teeth on the spindle gear in speed control (feed perrevolution, threading, and so forth) .


- 242 -

5850 Spindle number to be selected upon power-up/reset


[Valid data range] 0 - 4Set a spindle number to be selected upon power-up/reset.A selected spindle is used as:- Spindle displayed on a screen such as the position display screen

and program check screen- Spindle used for an S command, feed per revolution, constant

surface speed control, threading, canned cycles, rigid tapping,and spindle speed detection

NOTETo rewrite this parameter during automatic operation,always use a non-buffered M code set in parameterNos. 2411 to 2420 so that rewriting is performed inthe non-buffering state.

5851 Number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode (first stage)


[Valid data range] 1 - 32767Set the number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode(rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (first stage) .

5852 Number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (first stage)


[Valid data range] 1 - 32767Set the number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (rigidtapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (first stage) .

5853 Backlash compensation in the servo mode (first stage)



Set a backlash compensation in the servo mode (rigid tapping, spindlepositioning, and so forth) (first stage) .


- 243 -

5854 Number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode (second stage)


[Valid data range] 1 - 32767Set the number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode(rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (second stage) .

5855 Number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (second stage)


[Valid data range] 1 - 32767Set the number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (rigidtapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (second stage) .

5856 Backlash compensation in the servo mode (second stage)



Set a backlash compensation in the servo mode (rigid tapping, spindlepositioning, and so forth) (second stage) .

5857 Number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode (third stage)


[Valid data range] 1 - 32767Set the number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode(rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (third stage) .

5858 Number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (third stage)


[Valid data range] 1 - 32767Set the number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (rigidtapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (third stage) .

5859 Backlash compensation in the servo mode (third stage)



Set a backlash compensation in the servo mode (rigid tapping, spindlepositioning, and so forth) (third stage) .


- 244 -

5860 Number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode (fourth stage)


[Valid data range] 1 - 32767Set the number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode(rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (fourth stage) .

5861 Number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (fourth stage)


[Valid data range] 1 - 32767Set the number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (rigidtapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (fourth stage) .

5862 Backlash compensation in the servo mode (fourth stage)



Set a backlash compensation in the servo mode (rigid tapping, spindlepositioning, and so forth) (fourth stage) .

5863 Number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode (fifth stage)


[Valid data range] 1 - 32767Set the number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode(rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (fifth stage) .

5864 Number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (fifth stage)


[Valid data range] 1 - 32767Set the number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (rigidtapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (fifth stage) .

5865 Backlash compensation in the servo mode (fifth stage)



Set a backlash compensation in the servo mode (rigid tapping, spindlepositioning, and so forth) (fifth stage) .


- 245 -

5866 Number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode (sixth stage)


[Valid data range] 1 - 32767Set the number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode(rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (sixth stage) .

5867 Number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (sixth stage)


[Valid data range] 1 - 32767Set the number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (rigidtapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (sixth stage) .

5868 Backlash compensation in the servo mode (sixth stage)



Set a backlash compensation in the servo mode (rigid tapping, spindlepositioning, and so forth) (sixth stage) .

5869 Number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode (seventh stage)


[Valid data range] 1 - 32767Set the number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode(rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (seventh stage) .

5870 Number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (seventh stage)


[Valid data range] 1 - 32767Set the number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (rigidtapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (seventh stage) .

5871 Backlash compensation in the servo mode (seventh stage)



Set a backlash compensation in the servo mode (rigid tapping, spindlepositioning, and so forth) (seventh stage) .


- 246 -

5872 Number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode (eighth stage)


[Valid data range] 1 - 32767Set the number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode(rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (eighth stage) .

5873 Number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (eighth stage)


[Valid data range] 1 - 32767Set the number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (rigidtapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (eighth stage) .

5874 Backlash compensation in the servo mode (eighth stage)



Set a backlash compensation in the servo mode (rigid tapping, spindlepositioning, and so forth) (eighth stage) .

5875 Effective area in the servo mode using a position coder



Set an effective area in the servo mode (rigid tapping, spindlepositioning, and so forth) using a position coder.

5876 Positional deviation limit during movement in the servo mode using a

position coder



Set a positional deviation limit during movement in the servo mode(rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) using a positioncoder.


- 247 -

5877 Positional deviation limit during a stop in the servo mode using a position

coder



Set a positional deviation limit during a stop in the servo mode (rigidtapping, spindle positioning) using a position coder.

5879 In-position width for Cs contour control

[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] Integer spindle


Set an in-position width for Cs contour control.When bit 4 (CCI) of parameter No. 1800 is set to 1, this parameterspecifies an in-position width at rapid traverse time for each axis.

5880 Positional deviation limit during movement under Cs contour control



Set a positional deviation limit during movement under Cs contourcontrol.

5881 Positional deviation limit during a stop under Cs contour control



Set a positional deviation limit during a stop under Cs contourcontrol.

5882 Positional deviation limit during servo-off under Cs contour control



Set a positional deviation limit during servo-off under Cs contourcontrol.


- 248 -

5883 Return feedrate override in rigid tapping



Set a feedrate override to be applied to rigid tapping return operationand return operation in a peck rigid tapping cycle. When 0 is specified,the specification of 100% is assumed.

5884 Acceleration/deceleration time constant for drilling axis cutting feed in rigid

tapping (TC1)



Set an acceleration/deceleration time constant at the first stage whenthe acceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle and drillingaxis in rigid tapping is switched according to the S command (bit 1(TSC) of parameter No. 5605 is set to 1) .

5885 Cutting feed FL feedrate for the drilling axis in rigid tapping (FL1)


[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the drilling axis

[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Set an FL feedrate at the first stage when the acceleration/decelerationtime constant for the spindle and drilling axis in rigid tapping isswitched according to the S command (bit 1 (TSC) of parameter No.5605 is set to 1) .

5886 Spindle speed for determining cutting feed acceleration/deceleration in rigid

tapping (S1)


[Unit of data] min-1[Valid data range] 0 - 32767

Set a spindle speed at the first stage when theacceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle and drillingaxis in rigid tapping is switched according to the S command (bit 1(TSC) of parameter No. 5605 is set to 1) .


- 249 -

5887 Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration time constant for the drilling axis in

rigid tapping (TC2)



Set an acceleration/deceleration time constant at the second stagewhen the acceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle anddrilling axis in rigid tapping is switched according to the S command(bit 1 (TSC) of parameter No. 5605 is set to 1) .




[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Set an FL feedrate at the second stage when theacceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle and drillingaxis in rigid tapping is switched according to the S command (bit 1(TSC) of parameter No. 5605 is set to 1) .


tapping (S2)



[Valid data range] 0 - 32767Set a spindle speed at the second stage when theacceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle and drillingaxis in rigid tapping is switched according to the S command (bit 1(TSC) of parameter No. 5605 is set to 1) .


rigid tapping (TC3)



Set an acceleration/deceleration time constant at the third stage whenthe acceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle and drillingaxis in rigid tapping is switched according to the S command (bit 1(TSC) of parameter No. 5605 is set to 1) .


- 250 -




[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Set an FL feedrate at the third stage when theacceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle and drillingaxis in rigid tapping is switched according to the S command (bit 1(TSC) of parameter No. 5605 is set to 1) .


tapping (S3)



[Valid data range] 0 - 32767Set a spindle speed at the third stage when theacceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle and drillingaxis in rigid tapping is switched according to the S command (bit 1(TSC) of parameter No. 5605 is set to 1) .


rigid tapping (TC4)



Set an acceleration/deceleration time constant at the fourth stagewhen the acceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle anddrilling axis in rigid tapping is switched according to the S command(bit 1 (TSC) of parameter No. 5605 is set to 1) .




[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Set an FL feedrate at the fourth stage when theacceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle and drillingaxis in rigid tapping is switched according to the S command (bit 1(TSC) of parameter No. 5605 is set to 1) .


- 251 -

Parameter Nos. 5884 to 5894 are used to change the cutting feedacceleration/deceleration time constant/FL feedrate on the holemachining axis in rigid tapping according to the S command. Theseparameters set the time constant (TCx) /FL feedrate (FLx) at eachlevel and the spindle speed (Sx) to set levels. The following show therelationship between the S command and FL feedrate, the relationshipbetween the S command and actual acceleration/deceleration time inlinear acceleration/deceleration, and the relationship between the Scommand and actual acceleration/deceleration time in exponentialacceleration/deceleration:

Spindle speed command S FL feedrateS ≤ S1 FL1

S1 < S ≤ S2 FL2S2 < S ≤ S3 FL3

S3 < S FL4

Relationship between S command and FL feedrate

Acceleration/deceleration time

TC4

TC3

TC2

TC1

S1 S2 S3 S commandRelationship between S command andactual acceleration/deceleration timein linear acceleration/deceleration

Acceleration/deceleration time

TC4

TC3

TC2

TC1

S1 S2 S3 S commandRelationship between S command andactual acceleration/deceleration timein exponential acceleration/deceleration


- 252 -

5895 Operation sequence pattern for the spindle positioning axis


[Valid data range] 1 - 4Set an operation sequence pattern for the spindle positioning axis.

1 Pattern 1: Used in a machine configuration where a mechanicalclamp is used. This pattern applies when clamping cannot beperformed with the spindle motor kept excited. With this pattern,clamping/unclamping is performed after motor excitation isturned off.

2 Pattern 2: Used in a machine configuration where a mechanicalclamp is used. This pattern applies when unclamping performedafter spindle motor excitation is turned off causes the spindle tomove excessively. With this pattern, an operation sequence isinitiated after the spindle motor is excited, and upon completionof the sequence, spindle motor excitation is turned off.

3 Pattern 3: Used in a machine configuration where a mechanicalclamp is not used. An operation sequence is performed with thespindle motor excited. So, clamping and unclamping operationsare unnecessary, but I/O signals SUCLPs, *SEUCLs, SCLPs,and *SECLPs are used to carry out an operation sequence.

4 Pattern 4: Used in a machine configuration where a mechanicalclamp is not used. An operation sequence is performed with thespindle motor excited. So, clamping and unclamping operationsare unnecessary, and I/O signals SUCLPs, *SEUCLs, SCLPs,and *SECLPs are not used.

5896 M code for semi-fixed angular positioning (Min)


[Valid data range] 6 - 97Set an M code (start) specifying the semi-fixed angular positioning ofthe spindle positioning axis.

NOTE- When specifying an M code for semi-fixed angular

positioning, use parameter No. 5896 and No. 5897.- M00 through M05, M30, M98, and M99 cannot be

used.- No other M codes for the spindle positioning function


same time.


- 253 -

5897 M code for semi-fixed angular positioning (Max)


[Valid data range] 6 - 97Set an M code (end) specifying the semi-fixed angular positioning ofthe spindle positioning axis.

NOTE- When specifying an M code for semi-fixed angular

positioning, use parameter No. 5896 and No. 5897.- M00 through M05, M30, M98, and M99 cannot be

used.- No other M codes for the spindle positioning function


same time.

5898 Basic angle for semi-fixed angular positioning


[Unit of data] degree[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis

[Valid data range] -60 - 60Set a basic angle for semi-fixed angular positioning. Let ¿ be thesetting of parameter No. 5896, be the setting of parameter No.5897, and ̀ be the setting of parameter No. 5898. Then, therelationship between the specified M code and the amount ofmovement is as described below.

M code α α+1 α+2 α+3 . . . βAngular

displacementγ γ×2 γ×3 γ×4 . . . γ× (β-α+1)

5960 Position gain in the servo mode


[Unit of data] 0.01/sec[Valid data range] 1 - 9999

Set an analog spindle position gain in the servo mode (rigid tapping,spindle positioning, and so forth) . This position gain is used also as adrilling axis position gain in rigid tapping.


- 254 -

5961 Position gain multiplier (first stage)


[Valid data range] 1 - 32767Set the position gain multiplier of the analog spindle for gear 1 in theservo mode (rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) .

Position gain multiplier GC is obtained from the following equation:

LSPPLS

EPCGC

×××××= 3602048000

PLS : Number of pulses output from the position coder (pulses/rev)SP : Number of gear teeth on the spindle sidePC : Number of gear teeth on the position coder sideE : Specified voltage (V) for turning the spindle motor at 1000

min-1

L : Angular displacement of the spindle (degrees) per spindlemotor rotation

Example: For the spindle motor and gear ratio given below, GC iscalculated as follows:

PLS = 4096 pulses/revSP = 1PC = 1E = 2.2 VL = 360 deg

110036014096

2.213602048000 =××

×××=GC

Note)On the assumption that the spindle motor used turns at 4500min-1 at 10 V, 2.2 V is required to turn the spindle motor at 1000min-1

5962 Drift compensation value (first stage)



Set the drift compensation value of the analog spindle for gear 1 inthe servo mode (rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) .

Drift compensation DC (a voltage equivalent to positional deviation)is obtained from the following equation:

ERGCGDC ×××= 000000192.0G : Position gain in servo mode (0.01/sec)GC : Position gain multiplierER : Positional deviation (detection unit)


- 255 -

5963 Position gain multiplier (second stage)




LSPPLS

EPCGC

×××××= 3602048000


min-1




110036014096

2.213602048000 =××

×××=GC

Note)On the assumption that the spindle motor used turns at 4500min-1 at 10 V, 2.2 V is required to turn the spindle motor at 1000min-1.

5964 Drift compensation value (second stage)







- 256 -

5965 Position gain multiplier (third stage)




LSPPLS

EPCGC

×××××= 3602048000


min-1




110036014096

2.213602048000 =××

×××=GC


5966 Drift compensation value (third stage)







- 257 -

5967 Position gain multiplier (fourth stage)




LSPPLS

EPCGC

×××××= 3602048000


min-1




110036014096

2.213602048000 =××

×××=GC


5968 Drift compensation value (ourth stage)







- 258 -

5969 Position gain multiplier (fifth stage)




LSPPLS

EPCGC

×××××= 3602048000


min-1




110036014096

2.213602048000 =××

×××=GC


5970 Drift compensation value (first stage)







- 259 -

5971 Position gain multiplier (sixth stage)




LSPPLS

EPCGC

×××××= 3602048000


min-1




110036014096

2.213602048000 =××

×××=GC


5972 Drift compensation value (sixth stage)







- 260 -

5973 Position gain multiplier (seventh stage)




LSPPLS

EPCGC

×××××= 3602048000


min-1




110036014096

2.213602048000 =××

×××=GC


5974 Drift compensation value (seventh stage)







- 261 -

5975 Position gain multiplier (eighth stage)




LSPPLS

EPCGC

×××××= 3602048000


min-1




110036014096

2.213602048000 =××

×××=GC


5976 Drift compensation value (eighthstage)







- 262 -

5977 Rapid traverse rate for orientation


[Unit of data] degree/min[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)

(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Set a rapid traverse rate for analog spindle orientation in the servomode (rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) .

NOTESet a rapid traverse rate so that the quantity of errorsis within a range from 128 pulses to 1024 pulses.

5978 Time constant for orientation



Set a time constant for analog spindle orientation in the servo mode(rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) .

5979 FL feedrate for orientation


[Unit of data] degree/min[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis

[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Set an FL feedrate for analog spindle orientation in the servo mode(rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) .

NOTESet an FL feedrate rate so that the quantity oferrors is within a range from the effective area to1024 pulses.

5980 Grid shift value for orientation



Set a grid shift value from the orientation stop position of the analogspindle in the servo mode (rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and soforth) .


- 263 -

5984 Speed for workpiece-axis automatic phase alignment


[Unit of data] degree/min[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis

[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Set a speed for workpiece-axis automatic phase alignment.

5985 Angle deviation from the spindle position (position of the one-rotation

signal) used as a reference for workpiece-axis phase alignment



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set an angle deviation from the spindle position (position of the one-rotation signal) used as a reference for workpiece-axis phasealignment.

5994 Axial-feed axis number in helical compensation


[Valid data range] 0 - Max axesSpecify the ordinal number of an axial-feed axis in helicalcompensation.

NOTEWhen this parameter is set to 0, the Z-axis is setas the axial-feed axis.When there are two or more parallel Z-axes, usethis parameter to specify which Z-axis is to beused as the axial-feed axis.


- 264 -

5995 Axis number of an axis to be synchronized using the method of command

specification for a hobbing machine


[Valid data range] 1 - Max axesWhen there are several groups of axes subject to synchronizationcontrol (the axes for which bit 0 (SYN) of parameter No. 1955 is setto 1) , an axis with which to start synchronization is specified usingthe following command (for a hobbing machine) :G81 T t L ± l ;@t: Spindle speed (1 ≤ t ≤ 1000)@l: Number of synchronized axis rotations (1 ≤ l ≤ 21)

Synchronization between the spindle and a specified axis isestablished with the ratio of }l rotations about the synchronized axisto t spindle rotationst and l correspond to the number of teeth and the number of threadson the hobbing machine, respectively.If the above command is specified without setting this parameterwhen there are multiple groups of axes to be synchronized, alarmPS593 is issued.When only one group of axes is to be synchronized, this parameter isignored.

5996 Number of pulses from the position detector per EGB master axis rotation


[Valid data range] 1 - 999999999Set the number of pulses from the position detector per EGB masteraxis rotation.Specify this parameter with four pulses equaling one A/B phase cycle.

5997 Number of pulses from the position detector per EGB slave axis rotation



Set the number of pulses from the position detector per EGB slaveaxis rotation.Specify the number of pulses output by the detection unit.

Example 1: When th EGB master axis is the spindle, and the EGBslave axis is the C-axis


- 265 -

SynchronizationcoefficientSynchronous switch

Spindle

CNC

Detection unit

βp/rev

αp/rev

C-axis

Speed/currentcontrol

Least command increment

0.001 deg

Command pulse

n/m

Gear ratioA

Motor

Detector

Errorcounter

×CMRSlave axis

Detector

Gear ratio BErrorcounter

Follow-up ×CMRDummy

Spindle-to-detector gear ratio B:1/1 (The spindle and detector are connected directly.)

Number of pulses from the detector of the spindle β:80000 pulses/rev(calculated assuming that four pulses are generated in one A/Bphase cycle)

C-axis gear ratio A:1/36 (The C-axis rotates one turn while the motor rotates 36turns.)

Number of pulses from the detector of the C-axis ¿: 1,000,000pulses/rev

C-axis CMR: 1Flexible feed gear n/m: 1/100

In this case, the number of pulses per spindle rotation is obtained asfollows: 80000×1/1 = 80000So, set 80000 in parameter No. 5996.

The number of pulses per C-axis rotation by the detection unit isobtained as follows:

1000000÷1/36×1/100=360000In parameter No. 5997, set 360000.

Example 2: When the spindle-to-detector gear ratio B is 2/3 in theabove example (the detector rotates two turns while the spindlerotates three turns)In this case, the number of pulses per spindle rotation is obtained asfollows:

�

��

�

��×

The result will be a fraction. In such a case, change the value set inparameter No. 5997 while leaving the ratio of parameter Nos. 5996 to5997 unchanged.

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

×


- 266 -

Therefore, set 160000 in parameter No. 5996, and 1080000 inparameter No. 5997.Only the ratio of parameter Nos. 5996 to 5997 needs to be satisfied. Afraction can be reduced to its lowest terms. In the above example, 16can be specified in parameter No. 5996, and 108 can be specified inparameter No. 5997.

Actual numbers of pulses are sometimes not specified with theparameters, but the ratio of the actual number of pulses for the masteraxis to the actual number of pulses for the slave axis is alwaysmaintained. As show in Example 2, if the calculated number of pulsesproves to be a fraction, because of the gearing between the master andslave axes, the values to be specified with the parameters can bechanged while keeping their ratio as is. In such a case, G81.5 cannotbe used in the following specification methods:

G81.5 T_ C_ ; A speed is specified for the master axis, and theamount of movement is specified for the slaveaxis.

G81.5 P_ C0 L_ ; A number of pulses is specified for the masteraxis, and a speed is specified for the slave axis.

G81.5 X_ C0 L_ ; The amount of movement is specified for themaster axis, and a speed is specified for the slaveaxis


- 267 -

4.22 TOOL COMPENSATION PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 6000AND LATER)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6000 LXY PCI PNH EVO


#0 EVO Specifies whether an offset change is valid starting with the nextblock where a D or H code is specified or the next block to bebuffered.0: Valid starting with the next block where a D or H code is

specified.1: Valid starting with the next block buffered.

#1 PNH Specifies whether the offset number of a tool offset (G46 to G48) isspecified using a D code or H code.0: Specified using a D code.1: Specified using an H code.Usually, set this parameter to 0.

#2 PCI Specifies whether a tool offset (G45 to G48) is valid for a circularcommand.0: Not valid.1: Valid.

#4 LXY Specifies whether the axis to which tool length compensation (G43,G44) is applied is the Z-axis at all times, or an arbitrary programmedaxis.0: Z-axis at all times.1: Arbitrary programmed axis.


- 268 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6001 CNI CNC CSU


#0 CSU This bit, used with bit 7 (CSC) of parameter No. 6003, sets thestartup/cancel type of cutter compensation.

CSC CSU Type Operation

0 0 Type A A compensation vector perpendicular to the block next to the

startup block or the block preceding the cancellation block is

output.

0 1 Type B A compensation vector perpendicular to the startup block or

cancellation block and an intersection vector are output.

1 0

1

Type C When the startup block or cancellation block specifies no

movement operation, the tool is shifted by the cutter

compensation amount in a direction perpendicular to the block

next to the startup or the block before cancellation block.

When the block specifies movement operation, the type is set

according to the CSU setting; if CSU is 0, type A is set, and if

CSU is 1, type B is set.

Tool center path

Programmed pathN1

N2

G41

N1

N2

N3

Intersection point

Shift

G41

Tool center path

N1

N2

Intersection point

G41Programmedpath

Programmedpath

Tool centerpath


- 269 -

#1 CNC This bit, used with bit 6 (CNI) of parameter No. 6001, selects themethod for making an interference check in cutter compensationmode.CNI CNC Operation

0 0 Interference check is enabled. The direction and the anlgle of anarc are checked.

0 1 Interference check is enabled. Only the angle of an arc ischecked.

1 --- Interference check is disabled.

For the operation taken when the interference check shows theoccurrence of an rference (overcutting) , see the description of bit 5(CAV) of parameter No. 6008.

NOTEChecking of only the direction cannot be set.

#6 CNI Specifies whether an interference check in the cutter compensationmode is valid.0: Valid. By setting bit 1 (CNC) of parameter No. 6001, a direction

check and circular angle check are made.1: Not valid.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6002 QNI OFC OFA


The increment system and valid setting range of tool offsets aredetermined.

Metric inputOFE

No.6007#0OFD

No.6004#0OFC

No.6002#1OFA

No.6002#0Unit Geometric offset Wear compensation

0 0 0 1 0.01 mm ±9999.99 mm ±9999.99 mm0 0 0 0 0.001 mm ±9999.999 mm ±9999.999 mm0 0 1 0 0.0001 mm ±9999.9999 mm ±9999.9999 mm0 1 0 0 0.00001 mm ±9999.99999 mm ±9999.99999 mm1 0 0 0 0.000001 mm ±999.999999 mm ±999.999999 mm

Inch inputOFE

No.6007#0OFD

No.6004#0OFC

No.6002#1OFA

No.6002#0Unit Geometric offset Wear compensation

0 0 0 1 0.001 inch ±999.999 inch ±999.999 inch0 0 0 0 0.0001 inch ±999.9999 inch ±999.9999 inch0 0 1 0 0.00001 inch ±999.99999 inch ±999.99999 inch0 1 0 0 0.000001 inch ±999.999999 inch ±999.999999 inch1 0 0 0 0.0000001 inch ±99.9999999 inch ±99.9999999 inch


- 270 -

#6 QNI Specifies whether, in tool length measurement, a tool offset number isspecified by operation on the MDI unit (cursor-based selection) or bya signal (tool offset number input signal (OFN0 to OFN5) ) from themachine.0: Specified by operation on the MDI unit (cursor-based selection) .1: Specified by a signal (tool offset number input signal (OFN0 to

OFN5) ) from the machine.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6003 CSC WMC WMH WMA TMA TC3 TC2


Bit 5 (WMC) to bit 0 (TC2) are valid only when the toollength/workpiece origin measurement function is provided.

#0 TC2#1 TC3 When soft key [ MEASURE ] or [ MEASUR+ ] is selected to set a

tool length compensation amount during the measurement of the toollength, the tool automatically moves to the tool change position. TC2and TC3 set the tool change position at one of the reference positions.

TC3 TC2 Tool change position

0 0 First reference position0 1 Second reference position1 0 Third reference position1 1 Fourth reference position

#2 TMA0: A tool length measurement is made only for the Z-axis.1: A tool length measurement can be made for each axis.

#3 WMA Specifies whether a workpiece origin offset measurement is made forthe Z-axis only or can be made for each axis.0: Z-axis only.1: Each axis.

#4 WMH Specifies whether a workpiece origin offset measurement is made forend faces only or for both end faces and hole centers.0: End faces only.1: Both end faces and hole centers.

#5 WMC Specifies whether an axis for workpiece origin offset measurement isspecified by axis name input or selected with the cursor.0: Specified by axis name input.1: Selected with the cursor.

#7 CSC Specifies the type of operation to be performed at start-up andcancellation of tool side offset in cutter compensation or three-dimensional cutter compensation.0: Type A or type B. (Which type is used is determined by bit 0

(CSU) of parameter No. 6001.)1: Type C.


- 271 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6004 CYS CYA SU3 SU2 FTP OFD


The increment system and valid setting range of tool offsets arespecified.For more information, see the description of bit 1 (OFC) and bit0 (OFA) of parameter No. 6002.

#1 FTP Specifies the type of fixture offset.0: Move type. (A movement is made when the fixture offset is

changed,)1: Shift type. (No movement is made when the fixture offset is

changed.)#3 SU2 Specifies whether a spindle unit compensation vector is included in

relative position display and absolute position display.0: Included.1: Not included.

#4 SU3 Specifies whether to enable or disable parameter input on the spindleunit compensation screen.0: Disable.1: Enable.

#5 CYA Specifies whether to perform cylindrical interpolation cutting pointcompensation.0: Perform.1: Do not perform.

#6 CYS Specifies whether when the cylindrical interpolation cutting pointcompensation function is used, cutting point compensation isperformed between blocks or together with a block movement if thecutting point compensation value is less than the setting of parameterNo. 6112.0: Performed between blocks.1: Performed together with a block movement if the cutting point

compensation value is less than the setting of parameter No.6112.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6005 AIM


#1 AIM Specifies whether to issue an alarm when cutter compensation isspecified in the MDI mode.0: Issue no alarm. (In this case, cutter compensation is enabled

for commands in the MDI mode, and an intersection calculationis made. If MDI intervention is performed, however, nointersection calculation is made, and the previous vector is held.)

1: Issue an alarm (PS0275) .


- 272 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6007 ZMV NR3 OFE


#0 OFE The increment system and valid setting range of tool offsets arespecified.For more information, see the description of bit 1 (OFC) and bit0 (OFA) of parameter No. 6002.

#2 NR3 When the programmable mirror image function is used, a three-dimensional tool compensation vector is generated as follows:0: The setting of bit 0 (PNR) of parameter No. 7610 is followed.1: The mirror axis components of the offset vector are only

inverted.If bit 0 (PNR) of parameter No. 7610 is set to 1 even when NR3 is setto 0, the same effect as when NR3 is set to 1 is obtained in three-dimensional tool compensation. However, bit 0 (PNR) of parameterNo. 7610 also applies to two-dimensional cutter compensation. So,use NR3 to affect three-dimensional tool compensation only.

7610#00 1

0 The mirror axis components ofan offset vector are inverted,and G41/G42 is also inverted.(See Note.)

The mirror axis components ofan offset vector are inverted.

6007#2

1 The mirror axis components of an offset of three-dimensionaltool compensation are inverted. (Bit 0 of parameter No. 7610specifies the operation of two-dimensional cutter compensation.)

NOTEIf two or more programmable mirror axes are specified,G41/G42 is not inverted. Mirror axis components arethe axis components, among vector components, towhich the programmable mirror function is applicable.

#5 ZMV When the offset of tool length compensation is changed with bit 4(LXY) of parameter No. 6000 set to 0 and bit 0 (EVO) of parameterNo. 6000 set to 1, the new offset becomes valid from:0: A block to be buffered next;1: A block containg the next Z-axis move command or H code

command.This parameter is valid only when bit 4 (LXY) of parameter No. 6000is set to 0.ZMV and bit 0 (EVO) of parameter No. 6000 have the followingrelationship:


- 273 -

ZMV(No.6007#5)

EVO(No.6000#0)

Time when a new offset becomes valid

- 0 New offset becomes valid in a blockspecifying the next H code.

0 1 New offset becomes valid in a block to bebuffered next.

1 1 New offset becomes valid in a blockspecifying the next Z-axis move commandor H code.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6008 NAG NAA CAV WCD CCC ODI


#0 ODI The tool compensation value is:0: Used as the radius.1: Used as the diameter.

#2 CCC Specifies whether the type of outer corner connection in the cuttercompensation mode is linear connection type or circular connectiontype.0: Linear connection type1: Circular connection type

#3 WCD Specify the direction of the compensation vector that differsaccording to the sign of the offset value in grinding wheel wearcompensation.

Offset value in D codeNegative Positive

0 From compensation centertoward command endposition

From command end positiontoward compensation center

6008#3

1 From command end positiontoward compensation center

From compensation centertoward command endposition

Compensation vector

Programmed path

Tool center path

Compensation

center

Z

Y

From compensation center toward command end position


- 274 -

Compensation vector

Programmed pathTool center pathCompensation

center

Z

Y

From command end position to compensation center

#5 CAV Specifies operation to be performed when an interference check hasdetected the occurrence of interference (overcutting) .0: An alarm (PS0272) is issued, and machining is stopped

(interference check alarm function) .1: The tool path is changed to avoid interference (overcutting) , and

machining is continued (interference check avoidance function) .For the method of interference check, see the descriptions of bit 1(CNI) of parameter No. 6001 and bit 6 (CAV) of parameter No. 6001.

#6 NAA If the interference check avoidance function judges that the avoidanceoperation will be dangerous or that further interference will occur forthe interference avoidance vector, the following action takes place:0: An alarm is issued. If the avoidance operation is determined to be dangerous, alarm

PS0278 is issued. If further interference for the interference avoidance vector is

determined, alarm PS0279 is issued.1: The avoidance operation will continue without issuing any

alarm.

NOTENormally, this bit should be set to 0.

#7 NAG In the interference check/avoidance function of cutter compensation,when the length of the gap vector is 0:0: An avoidance operation is performed.1: No avoidance operation is performed.


- 275 -

6009 Number of blocks to be read in the cutter compensation mode


[Valid data range] 3 - 8Specify the number of blocks to be read in the cutter compensationmode. If a value equal to or less than 3 is specified, the specificationof 3 blocks is assumed. If a value equal to or greater than 8 isspecified, the specification of 8 blocks is assumed. As more blocksare read, an overcutting (interference) forecast can be made for muchmore blocks ahead. In this case, however, more blocks are read andanalyzed, so that a longer block processing time is required.

This parameter is not enabled immediately when the MDI mode is setby stopping the cutter compensation mode. The new setting of thisparameter is enabled when the cutter compensation mode is oncecancelled, and the mode is set again.

6010 Limit for ignoring the small movement resulting from cutter compensation



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)When the tool moves around a corner in cutter compensation mode,the limit for ignoring the small travel amount resulting from cuttercompensation is set. This limit eliminates the interruption of bufferingcaused by the small travel amount generated at the corner and anychange in feedrate due to the interruption.

Even if ∆Vx ≤ ∆Vlimit and∆VY ≤ ∆Vlimit, vector to single-block stop point remains.Tool center path

Programmed path

If ∆Vx ≤ ∆Vlimit and ∆VY≤ ∆Vlimit,this vector is ignored.

S¢VY

¢Vx

r

∆Vlimit is determined depending on the setting in parameter No. 6010.


- 276 -

6011 Constant denominator for three-dimensional tool compensation or tool

length compensation in a specified direction



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Specify the magnitude of a compensation vector.

When this parameter is set to 0, 222 KJI ++ is set.

6020 Bias set for the tool offset number for each axis

[Input type] Setting input[Data type] Integeraxis

[Valid data range] From 0 through the number of the tool offsetsFor parallel operation, set a bias for the tool offset number for eachaxis. Namely, the value set in this parameter is added to the specifiedoffset number, and the resultant offset data is used as the tool offsetfor the axis.

6021 Bias set for the tool length compensation number for each axis


[Valid data range] From 0 through the number of the tool offsetsFor parallel operation, set a bias for the tool length compensationnumber for each axis. Namely, the value set in this parameter is addedto the specified offset number, and the resultant offset data is used asthe tool length compensation value for the axis.


- 277 -

6024 Distance (L) from reference tool tip position to the reference measurement

surface


[Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit)[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis

[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)This parameter is used for tool length/workpiece zero pointmeasurement. For each axis, this parameter sets the distance from thereference tool tip position to the reference measurement surface (L inthe figure below) when the machine is at the machine zero point.

(Tool tipposition ofreference tool)

Workpiece

Measurement surface

OFSL OFSL

Measurementsurface

Hm

Machine zeropoint

Zm

Zm

L

@Hm

Reference block

Referencemeasurementsurface

L: Distance from the reference tool tip to the reference measurement surface (machinecoordinates of the reference measurement surface)Hm: Distance from the reference measurement surface to actual measurement surfaceZm: Distance from the tool tip of the measured tool at the machine zero point to themeasurement surfaceZt: Distance from the tool tip of the measured tool at the machine zero point to thereference measurement surfaceOFSL: Tool length compensation (OFSL = Zm-Hm-L)

Zt

Table on the machine Table on the machine

ToolT01

ToolT01


- 278 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6029 ONI


#0 ONI The I, J, and K commands of three-dimensional tool compensation arespecified as follows:0: The increment system of the reference axis is followed.1: Up to nine significant digits (nine digits in the integer part to

nine digits in the decimal part) can be specified.

NOTEWhen this parameter is set to 1, the I, J, and Kcommands of three-dimensional tool compensationmust be specified using a decimal point. If thesecommands are specified without a decimal point,alarm PS0283 is issued.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6030 OKI


#0 OKI The I, J, and K commands in three-dimensional tool compensationmode conform to:0: The conventional specifications.

- When the I, J, and K commands are all omitted in three-dimensional tool compensation mode, the previous vector ismaintained.

- When one or two of the I, J, and K commands are omittedin three-dimensional tool compensation mode, theircomponents are assumed to be 0.

1: The new specifications.- When the I, J, and K commands are all omitted in three-

dimensional tool compensation mode, the previous vector ismaintained.

- When one or two of the I, J, and K commands are omittedin three-dimensional tool compensation mode, the previousvalues are assumed.


- 279 -

6050 First axis coordinate of compensation center 1 in grinding wheel wear

compensation

6051 Second axis coordinate of compensation center 1 in grinding wheel wear

compensation


compensation


compensation


compensation


compensation

[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] Real number

[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)[Minimum unit of data] The increment system of the reference axis is followed.

[Valid data range] Nine digits in least input increment (See standard parameter settingtable (A).)(For IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)Set the coordinates (in the workpiece coordinate system) of acompensation center in grinding wheel wear compensation.

6056 Axis number of the first axis of the compensation plane in grinding wheel

wear compensation

6057 Axis number of the second axis of the compensation plane in grinding wheel

wear compensation


[Unit of data] 1 to the number of controlled axesSet the controlled-axis numbers of the first and second linear axes towhich grinding wheel wear compensation is applied.

NOTEBefore changing an axis of the compensation plane,set compensation vector cancel mode, or cancelgrinding wheel wear compensation.


- 280 -

6059 Rotation axis for dynamic tool compensation (first group)

6060 Linear axis 1 for dynamic tool compensation (first group)

6061 Linear axis 2 for dynamic tool compensation (first group)

6062 Rotation axis for dynamic tool compensation (second group)

6063 Linear axis 1 for dynamic tool compensation (second group)

6064 Linear axis 2 for dynamic tool compensation (second group)

6065 Rotation axis for dynamic tool compensation (third group)

6066 Linear axis 1 for dynamic tool compensation (third group)

6067 Linear axis 2 for dynamic tool compensation (third group)


[Valid data range] 0 - Max axesSpecify a rotation axis and two linear axes constituting a rotationplane for dynamic tool compensation. The order in which the twolinear axes are specified must be such that the rotation in the positivedirection about the rotation axis agrees with the rotation from thepositive side of linear axis 1 to the positive side of linear axis 2.Up to three groups of a rotation axis and two linear axes can bespecified. In dynamic tool compensation value calculation, the data ofthe rotation axis of the first group is calculated first. Then, the data ofthe rotation axes of the second and third groups is calculated.If the second or third group is not required, specify 0 in thecorresponding rotation axis parameter.


- 281 -

6068 Rotation axis for fixture offset (first group)

6069 Linear axis 1 for fixture offset (first group)

6070 Linear axis 2 for fixture offset (first group)

6071 Rotation axis for fixture offset (second group)

6072 Linear axis 1 for fixture offset (second group)

6073 Linear axis 2 for fixture offset (second group)

6074 Rotation axis for fixture offset (third group)

6075 Linear axis 1 for fixture offset (third group)

6076 Linear axis 2 for fixture offset (third group)


[Valid data range] 0 - Max axesSpecify a rotation axis and two linear axes constituting a rotationplane for fixture offset. The order in which the two linear axes arespecified must be such that the rotation in the positive direction aboutthe rotation axis agrees with the rotation from the positive side oflinear axis 1 to the positive side of linear axis 2.Up to three groups of a rotation axis and two linear axes can bespecified. In fixture offset calculation, the data of the rotation axis ofthe first group is calculated first. Then, the data of the rotation axes ofthe second and third groups is calculated.If the second or third group is not required, specify 0 in thecorresponding rotation axis parameter.

6080 Rotation axis for three-dimensional cutter compensation and so forth (first group)

6081 Linear axis 1 for three-dimensional cutter compensation and so forth (first group)




[Valid data range] 0 - Max axesSet the rotation axis and linear axes to perform three-dimensionalcutter compensation/spindle unit compensation/inclined rotary headtool length compensation (first group) .


- 282 -

6084 Angle of inclination for the rotation axis for three-dimensional cutter

compensation and so forth (first group)


[Unit of data] degree[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis

[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the angle of rotation for the rotation axis to perform three-dimensional cutter compensation/spindle unit compensation/inclinedrotary head tool length compensation (first group) .

6085 Rotation axis for three-dimensional cutter compensation and so forth

(second group)

6086 Linear axis 1 for three-dimensional cutter compensation and so forth

(second group)


(second group)


(second group)


[Valid data range] 0 - Max axesSet the rotation axis and linear axes to perform three-dimensionalcutter compensation/spindle unit compensation/inclined rotary headtool length compensation (second group) .

6089 Angle of inclination for the rotation axis for three-dimensional cutter

compensation and so forth (second group)



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the angle of rotation for the rotation axis to perform three-dimensional cutter compensation/spindle unit compensation/inclinedrotary head tool length compensation (second group) .

Parameter Nos. 6080 to 6089


- 283 -

First group Second groupRotation axis 6080 6085Linear axis 1 6081 6086Linear axis 2 6082 6087Linear axis 3 6083 6088Angle of inclination 6084 6089

- These parameters set the relationship between the rotation axisand rotation plane.

- Two groups can be set. Therefore, machines controlled with tworotation axes are supported.

- In the calculation of the tool direction, calculation for therotation axis of the first group is made first, then based on thecalculation result, calculation for the rotation axis for the secondgroup is made.

- When two rotation axes are used, the rotation plane may bechanged by the rotation of the other rotation axis. In this case, setthe rotation plane obtained when the rotation axis position is 0degrees.

- When there is one rotation axis, set the rotation axis of thesecond group to 0.

- In general, the direction vector of a rotation axis has three directioncomponents. This function supports direction vectors with onedirection component and two direction components. In each case,set the following:A) When the direction vecotor of a rotation axis has one

direction component (type A)The rotation axis rotates about one of the basic three axes.1) Set axis numbers for the rotation axis, linear axis 1,

and linear axis 2.2) Set the linear axis 3 and the angle of inclination to 0.3) The rotation axis is defined as follows:

- The rotation axis rotates about an axis thatperpendicularly intersects the plane formed by linearaxis 1 and linear axis 2.- When the rotation axis rotates from the positivedirection of linear axis 1 to the positive direction oflinear axis 2, the rotation axis is said to rotate in thepositive direction.

X

Y

Z

C

B) When the direction vector of a rotation axis has twodirection components (type B)The rotation axis rotates about an axis that lies in a planeformed by any two of the basic three axes.


- 284 -

1) Set axis numbers for the rotation axis, linear axis 1,linear axis 2, and linear axis 3.

2) The linear axes 1, 2, and 3 form a right-handedcoordinate system in this order.

3) The angle of inclination is defined as follows:- Rotation is performed in the plane formed by linearaxes 3 and 1.- When the rotation axis rotates from the positivedirection of linear axis 3 to the positive direction oflinear axis 1, the angle of inclination is positive.- When the rotation axis and linear axis 3 match, theangle of inclination is 0 degrees.

4) When the angle of inclination is 0 degrees, the rotationaxis is defined as follows:- The rotation axis rotates about an axis thatperpendicularly intersects the plane formed by linearaxes 1 and 2.- When the rotation axis rotates from the positivedirection of linear axis 1 to the positive direction oflinear axis 2, the rotation axis is said to rotate in thepositive direction.

X

Y

Z

B

α

α : Angle of inclination

6104 Reference angle for the rotation axis for three-dimensional cutter

compensation and so forth (first group)

6105 Reference angle for the rotation axis for three-dimensional cutter

compensation and so forth (second group)



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set a reference angle for the rotation axis to perform three-dimensional cutter compensation/inclined rotary head tool lengthcompensation.Set an angle for the rotation axis assumed when a tool axis direction(parameter No. 6106 to No. 6107) is set.Usually, set 0.0.


- 285 -

6106 Reference angle for the tool axis in the plane formed by linear axes 2 and 3

(RA)

6107 Reference angle for the tool axis in the plane formed by linear axes 3 and 1

(RB)



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the direction of each rotation axis to perform three-dimensionalcutter compensation/inclined rotary head tool length compensation byusing angles RA and RB.

Parameter Nos. 6106 to 6107The direction of a compensation vector is set by setting an angulardisplacement (RA, RB) from the direction of linear axis 3.RA: Rotation is performed in the plane formed by linear axis 2 and

linear axis 3. When rotation is performed from the positivedirection of linear axis 2 to the positive direction of linear axis 3,the direction of the rotation is positive.

RB: Rotation is performed in the plane formed by linear axis 3 andlinear axis 1. When rotation is performed from the positivedirection of linear axis 3 to the positive direction of linear axis 1,the direction of the rotation is positive.

Linear axes 1, 2, and 3 are set in parameter Nos. 6081 to 6083.

Linear axis 2

Linear axis 1

Linear axis 3When tool axis andlinear axis 3 match

RA = 0.0RB = 0.0


- 286 -

Linear axis 2

Linear axis 1

Linear axis 3When tool axis andlinear axis 1 match

RA = 0.0RB = 90.0

6109 Tool offset axis number for the XY plane

6110 Tool offset axis number for the ZX plane

6111 Tool offset axis number for the YZ plane


[Valid data range] 1 - Max axesSpecify a tool offset axis that intersects the cylindrical rotation axis atright angles.

6112 Limit for changing cylindrical interpolation cutting point compensation in a

single block



[Valid data range] 1 - 999999999The following operation is performed, depending on the setting ofparameter No. 6004:1) When CYS = 0If the amount of cylindrical interpolation cutting point compensationis smaller than the value set in this parameter, cylindricalinterpolation cutting point compensation is not performed. Instead,this ignored amount of cylindrical interpolation cutting pointcompensation is added to the next amount of cylindrical interpolationcutting point compensation to determine whether to performcylindrical interpolation cutting point compensation.2) When CYS = 1If the amount of cylindrical interpolation cutting point compensationis smaller than the value set in this parameter, cylindricalinterpolation cutting point compensation is performed together withthe movement of the specified block.


- 287 -

NOTESet this parameter as follows:Setting > (setting for a rotation axis in parameterNo. 1422)*4/3where 4/3 is a constant for internal processing.

6113 Limit of travel distance moved with the cylindrical interpolation cutting point

compensation in the previous block unchanged.



[Valid data range] 1 - 999999999The following operation is performed, depending on the type ofinterpolation:1) For linear interpolationIf the travel distance in a specified block is smaller than the value setin this parameter, machining is performed without changing thecylindrical interpolation cutting point compensation in the previousblock.2) For circular interpolationIf the diameter of a specified arc is smaller than the value set in thisparameter, machining is performed without changing the cylindricalinterpolation cutting point compensation in the previous block.Cylindrical interpolation cutting point compensation is not performedaccording to a circular movement.

6114 Limit for assuming the block as a non-movement block in intersection

calculation for tool side compensation (G41.2, G42.2)



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)When an intersection calculation is made for tool side compensation,the block is assumed to be a block involving no movement if thedifference in the coordinates of two points on the compensation planeis smaller than the value set in this parameter. In such a case, anadditional block ahead is read for intersection calculation. Usually, seta value about 0.01 mm.


- 288 -

6115 Angle determination fluctuation value for leading edge offset



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)This parameter sets a variation range used to determine whether theincluded angle between the tool direction vector (VT) and movedirection vector (VM) is 0°, 180°, or 90° during leading edgeoffsetting.For example, let the included angle between VT and VM be θ (0 ≤ θ≤ 180) , and the angle set in this parameter be ∆θ. Then, θ isdetermined as follows:

When 0≤θ≤∆θ θ=0°When (180-∆θ) ≤θ≤180 θ=180°When (90-∆θ) ≤θ≤ (90+∆θ) θ=90°

Normally, set around 1.0 in this parameter.

6122 Axis number of a rotation axis to be preset (first group)


[Valid data range] 0 - Max axesSet the axis number of a rotation axis to be preset for spindle unitoffset preset.

6123 Preset amount of a rotation axis (first group)



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the preset amount of a rotation axis to be preset for spindle unitoffset preset.

6124 Axis number of a rotation axis to be preset (second group)




- 289 -

6125 Preset amount of a rotation axis (second group)




6126 Axis number of a rotation axis to be preset (third group)



6127 Preset amount of a rotation axis (third group)




6128 M code for starting presetting


[Valid data range] 0 - 99999999Set an M code for starting presetting for spindle unit offset preset.

6129 M code for ending presetting


[Valid data range] 0 - 99999999Set an M code for ending presetting for spindle unit offset preset.


- 290 -

6130 Distance from the program-specified point (pivot point) to the tool tip

position (cutting point)


[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis.

[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A))(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the distance from the program-specified point to the actual cuttingpoint to calculate a three-dimensional cutter compensation vector atthe tool tip position.

If this parameter is 0, the tool tip support of the three-dimensionalcutter compensation function is not effective.Change the setting of this parameter before turning the three-dimensional cutter compensation mode to on.

6140 Axis number of linear axis 1 in the cutter compensation for Rotary table




[Valid data range] 1 to the number of controlled axesSet the axis numbers of the three linear axes used for the cuttercompensation for Rotary table.(The linear axes correspond to the coordinate axes in the workpiececoordinate system.)


- 291 -

6143 Axis number of the rotation axis in the cutter compensation for Rotary table

(first set)

6144 Axis number of the linear axis corresponding to the rotation axis in the

cutter compensation for Rotary table (first set)

6145 Axis number of the rotation axis in the cutter compensation for Rotary table

(second set)

6150 Reference angle of the rotation axis in the cutter compensation for Rotary

table (first set)

6146 Axis number of the linear axis corresponding to the rotation axis in the

cutter compensation for Rotary table (second set)


[Invalid data range] From 1 to the number of controlled axesSet the axis numbers of the rotation axes used for the cuttercompensation for Rotary table, as well as the axis numbers of thelinear axes corresponding to the rotation axes. Up to two sets can beset. The orientation of the rotation axis in the first set depends onthe angle of the rotation axis in the second set. If there is only onerotation axis, set 0 for parameter No. 6145.The axis numbers of the linear axes corresponding to the rotation axesindicate the linear axes about which the rotation axes rotate. See thetable below.

Linear axis about whicha rotation axis rotates

Value set for parameterNo. 6144 or 6146

Rotation direction of the rotationaxis

Direction with anangular displacement

of 0

Linear axis 1 Axis number of linear axis1

Foward direction of linear axis 2 toforward direction of linear axis 3

Forward direction oflinear axis 2







If the rotation direction of the rotation axis is the reverse of what isdescribed in the table above, set a negative value for parameter No.6143 or 6145.If the direction with an agular displacement of 0 differs from what isdescribed in the table above, specify parameters Nos. 6150 and 6151,assuming that the angle of the rotation axis in relation to the directiondescribed in the table above as the reference angle.


- 292 -


table (first set)


table (second set)


[Unit of data] Degrees[Minimum unit of data] Follows the increment system of the reference axis.

[Valid data range] 9 digits of the least input increment. (See the Standard parametersetting table (A).)(For IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)Set the angles of reference positions on the rotation axes used forcutter compensation for Rotary table.

6154 Workpiece coordinates of the origin of the table coordinate system in the

cutter compensation for Rotary table

[Input type] Parameter input[Data type] Real axis

[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)[Minimum unit of data] Follows the increment system of the corresponding axis.

[Valid data range] 9 digits of the least input increment. (See the Standard parametersetting table (A).)(For IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)Set the workpiece coordinates of the origin of the table coordinatesystem used for the cutter compensation for Rotary table. Specifythe parameter for the three axes specified for parameters Nos. 6140 to6142. The intersection of two rotation axes is assumed to be theorigin of the table coordinate system.


- 293 -

4.23 CANNED CYCLE PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 6200 ANDLATER)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6200 EXC UIL FCU SIJ DWL FXY


#0 FXY Specifies whether the drilling axis in a canned cycle is the Z-axis atall times or an axis selected by the program.0: Z-axis at all times1: Axis selected by the program

#1 DWL Specifies whether a P-based dwell command in a tapping cannedcycle is valid.0: Not valid.1: Valid.

#2 SIJ Specifies how to set the tool retraction direction and distance afterspindle orientation in a fine boring or back boring canned cycle.0: Set the tool retraction direction by parameter No. 6240, and set

the distance in the program (Q) .1: Set the tool retraction direction and distance in the program (I, J,

K) .#3 FCU Specifies how to make a movement to a drilling position in a canned

cycle.0: Always use rapid traverse.1: Use rapid traverse in the positioning mode (G00) , and use linear

interpolation in other modes (G01, G02, G03) .#4 UIL Specifies whether to change the initial level position when the origin

is set through the MDI unit in a canned cycle.0: Do not change.1: Change. The position set through the MDI unit becomes the

initial level position.#5 EXC Specifies whether G81 is used to specify a canned cycle or external

operation command.0: G81 specifies a canned cycle.1: G81 specifies an external operation command.


- 294 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6201 RFE NFM FM2 FIN RFA RES NM5 FXB


#0 FXB Specifies how to control the spindle in a canned cycle.0: Control the spindle by using the spindle stop command signal

(SSP) and the spindle reverse rotation command signal (SRV)(canned cycle I) instead of using M codes.

1: Control the spindle by using M codes (M03, M04, M05)(canned cycle II) .

#1 NM5 Specifies whether to output M05 when the direction of rotation of thespindle is changed from forward (M03) to reverse (M04) or vice versain a canned cycle.0: Output M05. That is, M05 is output before M03 or M04 is

output. (M05-M04 or M05-M03)1: Do not output M05. That is, M05 is not output before M03 or

M04 is output.This parameter is valid when bit 0 (FXB) of parameter No. 6201 is setto 1.

#2 RES Specifies how to cancel rigid tapping.0: Cancel rigid tapping when the spindle enters the speed control

mode.1: Cancel rigid tapping when the spindle stop confirmation signal is

set to 0 after the spindle enters the speed control mode.#3 RFA Specifies whether to issue an alarm for an F command that has

significant fractional digits specified in rigid tapping.0: Do not issue an alarm.1: Issue an alarm.

#4 FIN Specifies the signal to be entered to indicate when operation for thespindle stop command signal (SSP) , the spindle reverse rotationcommand signal (SRV) , or the external operation signal (EF) hasbeen completed.0: FFIN signal (completion signal dedicated to the SSP, SRV and

EF signals)1: FIN signal (completion signal for M, S, T, and B codes)This parameter is valid when bit 0 (FXB) of parameter No. 6201 is setto 0.

#5 FM2 Specifies whether to send the FMF signal after return to point R or theinitial position when the spindle stop command signal (SSP) orspindle reverse rotation command signal (SRV) is output.0: Do not send the FMF signal (command for reading the SSP and

SRV signals) .1: Send the FMF signal.This parameter is valid when bit 6 (NFM) of parameter No. 6201 isset to 0.


- 295 -

#6 NFM Specifies whether to send the FMF signal when the spindle stopcommand signal (SSP) or spindle reverse rotation command signal(SRV) is output.0: Send the FMF signal (command for reading the SSP and SRV

signals) .1: Do not send the FMF signal.

#7 RFE Specifies how to treat significant digits after the decimal pointspecified in an F command for rigid tapping.0: Digits after the decimal point are truncated.1: Digits specified after the decimal point are valid.

Example of Fcommand

F10. or F10.0 F10.5

RFA=1,RFE=0 or RFE=1

F10.0 PS530 (incorrect use ofdecimal point) is issued.

RFA=0, RFE=0 F10.0 F10.0RFA=0, RFE=1 F10.0 F10.5

6210 Return distance in canned cycle G73



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) )(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set a return distance in canned cycle G73.

6211 Clearance in canned cycle G83



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A))(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set a clearance in canned cycle G83.

6221 Return distance in a peck rigid tapping cycle


[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the drilling axis

[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standardparameter setting table (B) )(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +999999.999)Set a return distance in a peck rigid tapping cycle.


- 296 -

6240 Tool retraction direction after G86.1 and G87 orientation


[Valid data range] -10 - 10Set the tool retraction axis and direction used after spindle orientationin canned cycle G86.1 or G82. For each drilling axis, the toolretraction axis and direction after orientation can be set. Specify anaxis number along with a sign (+ or - ) to specify a direction.

Example: Suppose the following:When the drilling axis is the X-axis, the tool retraction directionafter orientation is -Y.When the drilling axis is the Y-axis, the tool retraction directionafter orientation is +Z.When the drilling axis is the Z-axis, the tool retraction directionafter orientation is -X.Then, set the parameters as follows (assuming that the first axis,second axis, and third axis are the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis) :

Set the parameter for the first axis to -2 (the tool retractiondirection is -Y) .Set the parameter for the second axis to 3 (the toolretraction direction is +Z) .Set the parameter for the third axis to -1 (the tool retractiondirection is -X) .Set 0 for other axes.


- 297 -

6261 Effective angle in an interference check for three-dimensional cutter

compensation



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)A tool direction change is assumed when the angle differencebetween two tool direction vectors in three-dimensional cuttercompensation is equal to or greater than the value set in thisparameter.When 0 is set, the specification of 45 degrees is assumed.

Let two tool direction vectors be Va and Vb. When the difference inangle is α degrees or more as shown in the figure below, the tooldirection vector is determined to have been changed.

α degrees

Va

Vb

6291 Machine error compensation value



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) )(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the compensation value used to compensate for the difference inthe shortest distance between the center axes of two rotation axes ifcoordinate system rotation is not performed with the dynamic fixtureoffset coordinate system rotation function. If 0 is set, nocompensation is performed.


- 298 -

4.24 SCALING AND COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATIONPARAMETERS (DATA NO. 6400 AND LATER)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6400 OLT OLN D3M D3R RTR SCR RIN


#0 RIN Specifies whether to use an absolute value when setting a rotationangle (R) for coordinate system rotation (G68) .0: Use an absolute value at all times.1: Depend on the mode (absolute mode (G90) or incremental mode

(G91) ) .#1 SCR Specifies the unit of magnification used for scaling (G51) .

0: 0.000011: 0.001

#2 RTR Specifies the degree unit used to set the angle for coordinate systemrotation and three-dimensional coordinate conversion (G68) .0: 0.00001 deg1: 0.001 deg

#4 D3R Specifies how the three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode iscanceled.0: The three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode is canceled

by the G69 command, a reset, or the ERS, ESP, or RRW inputsignal from the PMC.

1: The three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode is canceledonly by the G69 command.

#5 D3M Specifies the type of coordinates to be read when the current toolposition in the workpiece coordinate system is read using the custommacro system variables #5041 through #5050 (ABSOT) in the three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode.0: Read coordinates in a program coordinate system before

coordinate conversion.1: Read coordinates in a workpiece coordinate system resulting

from coordinate conversion.

NOTEWhen the current tool position in the workpiececoordinate system is read in a mode other thanthree-dimensional coordinate conversion mode (G69mode), coordinates in the coordinate system forwhich coordinate conversion is not performed(workpiece coordinate system) are read.For an explanation of system variables #5061 to#5080(ABSKP), see the explanation of DSC (bit 5 ofparameter No. 1200).


- 299 -

#6 OLN The oiling signal is:0: Not sent.1: Sent.

NOTEWhen this parameter has been set, the power mustbe turned off before operation is continued.

#7 OLT The oiling signal transmission type is:0: Type A. (By specifying an oiling type, the oiling signal OIL is set to 0.)1: Type B. (The oiling signal OIL is set to 0 when the oiling completionsignal OILF is returned from the PMC.)

6410 Scaling (G51) magnification


[Unit of data] Multiplied by 0.001 or 0.00001 depending on the parameter SCR(No.6400#1) .

[Valid data range] 1 - 999999Set a magnification used for scaling. The value set in this parameter isused as the default scaling magnification when the scalingmagnification (P) is not specified in the program.

6411 Rotation angle for coordinate system rotation (G68)


[Unit of data] 0.001 degrees or 0.00001 degrees depending on the parameter RTR(No.6400#2) .

[Valid data range] From -360000 through 360000 or -36000000 through 36000000depending on the parameter RTR (No.6400#2) .Set a rotation angle for coordinate system rotation. The value set inthis parameter is used as the default rotation angle for coordinatesystem rotation when the coordinate system rotation angle (R) is notspecified in the program.

6421 Scaling magnification for each axis


[Unit of data] Multiplied by 0.001 or 0.00001 depending on the parameter SCR(No.6400#1) .

[Valid data range] 1 - 999999Set a scaling magnification for each axis.


- 300 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6600 COV


#0 COV Specifies whether a circular cutting point feedrate change is valid.0: Valid at all times.1: Valid only in the automatic corner override (G62) mode.

6610 Minimum deceleration rate (MDR) for circular cutting feedrate change



Set a minimum deceleration rate (MDR) for automatic corner overridein circular cutting feedrate change.

When an arc is cut with the tool shifted inward, the arc cuttingfeedrate is calculated using the expression shown below, where F is aspecified feedrate. Then, the feedrate along the programmed pathbecomes the specified feedrate (F) .

Rc: Radius of the tool center pathRp: Programmed radius

Programmed path

Tool centerpath

Rc

Rp

If Rc is too small for Rp, the fraction Rc/Rp becomes almost 0, andthe tool stops. For this reason, the minimum deceleration ratio (MDR)is set, and the tool feedrate is calculated as F×MDR whenRc/Rp≤MDR.

Rp

RcF ×


- 301 -

6611 Effective angle for internal corner automatic override ( p̆)



[Valid data range] 2 - 178When θ≤θp, the corner is assumed to be an inside corner.When a corner is determined to be an inside corner, the feedrate isoverridden within the distance Le in the block before the corner andthe distance Ls in the next block from the corner intersection.Le and Ls are set in parameter Nos. 6613 and 6614, respectively.

The feedrate is overridden from point a to point b.

Programmed path

Cutter center patha

LeLs

bθ

6612 Deceleration rate for automatic corner override (COUR)



6613 Distance for starting automatic override (Le)



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)

6614 Distance for ending automatic override (Ls)





- 302 -

6630 Lower override limit of automatic velocity control during involute

interpolation



When the override function is used in the cutter compensation modefor involute interpolation automatic velocity control, the feedrate ofthe tool center may be reduced to an extremely low level near the basecircle in the case of internal offset. To void this, set a lower overridelimit in this parameter.Thus, the feedrate is clamped so that the feedrate is not reduced belowthe specified feedrate overridden by the lower limit value set in thisparameter.

NOTEWhen 0 or a value not within the specifiable range isset, involute interpolation automatic velocity control(override in the cutter compensation mode andacceleration/deceleration clamping near a base circle)is disabled.

6820 Overrun distance and direction of unidirectional positioning (G60)



[Valid data range] -32767 - 32767For each axis, set the overrun distance and direction of unidirectionalpositioning (G60) . The positioning direction is determined by thesign of the data set in this parameter, and the overrun distance isdetermined by the value of the data set in this parameter.Overrun distance > 0: Positioning direction is positive (+) .Overrun distance < 0: Positioning direction is negative (-) .Overrun distance = 0: Unidirectional positioning is not performed.


- 303 -

4.25 CUSTOM MACRO PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 7000 ANDLATER)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7000 PRT CLV GMP CVA MGE BCS SCS TCS


#0 TCS Specifies whether to call subprograms with T codes.0: Do not call with T codes.1: Call with T codes.

#1 SCS Specifies whether to call subprograms with S codes.0: Do not call with S codes.1: Call with S codes.

#2 BCS Specifies whether to call subprograms with the second auxiliaryfunction codes.0: Do not call with the second auxiliary function codes.1: Call with the second auxiliary function codes.

#3 MGE Specifies whether a G code modal call is made after movement or foreach block.0: Make a call after movement (equivalent to G66) .1: Make a call for each block (equivalent to G66.1)

#4 CVA The format for macro call arguments is specified as follows:0: Arguments are passed in NC format without modifications.1: Arguments are converted to macro format then passed.Example: When G65 P_ X10 ; is specified, the value in local

variable #24 in the calling program is set as follows:Command CVA=0 CVA=1

#24 0.01 0.01ADP[#24] 10.0 0.01

NOTEExternal operations are the same unless the ADPfunction is used.

#5 GMP Specifies whether to allow M, S, T, and B codes to be called while Gcodes are being called, and whether to allow G codes to be calledwhile M, S, T, and B codes are being called.0: Allow.1: Do not allow (executed as ordinary M, S, T, B, and G codes) .

#6 CLV Specifies whether to clear custom macro common variables #100through #199 (cleared when the power is turned off) upon reset.0: Do not clear.1: Clear to null.

#7 PRT Specifies whether to output a space instead of a leading zero withDPRNT.0: Output a space.1: Output nothing.


- 304 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7002 DPG MIN TSE MPR MSB MUS


#0 MUS Specifies whether to use interrupt-type custom macros.0: Do not use.1: Use.

#1 MSB Specifies whether local variables used in the interrupt program are thesame as those in the main program.0: Local variables are different from those in the main program

(macro type) .1: Local variables are the same as those in the main program

(subprogram type) .#2 MPR Specifies M codes that are used to enable or disable interrupt-type

custom macros.0: M96/M971: M code set in a parameter (parameter No. 7033 or No. 7034)

#3 TSE Specifies whether to use an edge trigger or status trigger to accept thecustom macro interrupt signal.0: Use an edge trigger (rising edge) .1: Use a status trigger.

#4 MIN Specifies when to execute CNC statements in the interrupt program.0: Execute CNC statements by interrupting the block being

executed of the interrupted program (type 1) .1: Execute CNC statements after the current block of the

interrupted program has been executed (type 2) .#5 DPG Specifies whether to allow G codes with a decimal point to be called.

0: Do not allow.1: Allow.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7003 DSM ATN


#0 VN1 In the registration of variable names with the SETVN statement,0: Only an alphabetic character is valid as the first character.1: Either an alphabetic character or digit is valid as the first

character. (FS15B specifications)If this parameter bit is set to 1, variable names may be registeredusing a non-alphabetic character as the first character with theSETVN command, as in SETVN500[1ST,2ND]. Note,however, that a variable name cannot be specified instead of avariable number, as in [#1ST]=100:.

#1 ATN Specifies the return value of the arctangent function ATAN (with twoarguments) .0: -180° ≤ ATAN[y]/[x] ≤ 180°1: 0° ≤ ATAN[y]/[x] ≤ 360°


- 305 -

#2 DSM Specifies whether a system variable that can be specified (written) onthe let side can be rewritten on the custom macro screen through theMDI unit.0: Cannot be rewritten.1: Can be rewritten.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7004 ISO


#1 ISO0: When EIA codes are used, set in parameter No. 7010 through No.

7018 the bit patterns of codes specified instead of [, ], #, *, =, ?,@, &, and _.

1: When ISO/ASCII codes are used, set in parameter No. 7010through No. 7018 the bit patterns of codes specified instead of[, ], #, *, =, ?, @, &, and _.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7010 [7 [6 [5 [4 [3 [2 [1 [0

7011 ]7 ]6 ]5 ]4 ]3 ]2 ]1 ]0

7012 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7013 *7 *6 *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 *0

7014 =7 =6 =5 =4 =3 =2 =1 =0

7015 ?7 ?6 ?5 ?4 ?3 ?2 ?1 ?0

7016 @7 @6 @5 @4 @3 @2 @1 @0

7017 &7 &6 &5 &4 &3 &2 &1 &0

7018 _7 _6 _5 _4 _3 _2 _1 _0


[0 to [7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating [ is set.]0 to ]7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating ] is set.

#0 to #7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating # is set.*0 to *7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating * is set.=0 to =7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating = is set.?0 to ?7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating ? is set.

@0 to @7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating @ is set.&0 to &7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating & is set.

_0 to _7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating _ is set.0: A corresponding bit is 0.1: A corresponding bit is 1.


- 306 -

7033 M code for turning on custom macro interrupt

7034 M code for turning off custom macro interrupt


[Valid data range] From 3 through 99999999 (excluding 30, 98 and 99)When bit 2 (MPR) of parameter No. 7002 is set to 1, that is, when aparameter is used to set an M code for enabling/disabling interrupt-type custom macros, set such an M code in this parameter.

7036 Start number of common variables to be protected among the common

variables (#500 to #999)

7037 End number of common variables to be protected among the common



[Valid data range] 500 - 999Among the common variables (#500 to #999) , the range of commonvariables specified by this parameter can be protected (by setting theirattributes to read-only) . If a write attempt (on the left side) is made,an alarm (PS0116) is issued.

NOTESet 0 in both parameter No. 7036 and No. 7037not to protect common variables.

7038 Start number of common variables to be protected among the common


7039 End number of common variables to be protected among the common



[Valid data range] 200 - 499Among the common variables (#200 to #499) , the range of commonvariables specified by this parameter can be protected (by setting theirattributes to read-only) . If a write attempt (on the left side) is made,an alarm (PS0116) is issued.

NOTESet 0 in both parameter No. 7036 and No. 7037not to protect common variables. Thisparameter has no effect when the option for 900common variables is not selected.


- 307 -

7040 Number of consecutive macro statement blocks in an execution macro

program that can be processed


[Unit of data] Block[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999

Set the number of consecutive macro statement blocks in an executionmacro program that can be processed. A setting of 0 corresponds to500 blocks.Usually, all of consecutive macro statements are executed withoutstopping. If there is a large number of consecutive macro statements,their execution will slow down displays and auxiliary macros. Toprevent this from occurring, the processing of macro statements maybe interrupted with the number of blocks specified, thereby reducingthe effect on displays and auxiliary macros. A setting of 1 to 499slows down the processing of macro statements, speeding up displaysand auxiliary macros. A setting of 501 or greater speeds up theprocessing of macro statements, slowing down displays and auxiliarymacros.

NOTEThis parameter is effective only to macro statementsin an execution macro program.It has no effect on any macro statements in custommacro programs.This parameter has an effect if the number ofconsecutive statement blocks is equal to or greaterthan the setting of this parameter.

7045 Operating speed of the auxiliary macro function


[Valid data range] 0 - 20The auxiliary macro function executes auxiliary macros at constantintervals, several blocks at a time. Use this parameter to specify thenumber of blocks to be executed at a time. (Setting + 1) blocks willbe executed. For example, if 5 is set, six blocks will be executed at atime.


- 308 -

7050 G code used to call the custom macro of program number 9010











[Valid data range] (From -999 though 999 excluding 0, 5, 65, 66 and 67)Set the G codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers9010 through 9019. However, note that when a negative value is set inthis parameter, it becomes a modal call. For example, if thisparameter is set to -11, the modal call mode is entered by G11.Whether the modal call is equivalent to G66 or G66.1 depends on bit3 (MGE) of parameter No. 7000.


- 309 -

7060 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of program number 9040











[Valid data range] -999 - 999Set the G codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers9040 through 9049. However, note that when a negative value is set inthis parameter, it becomes a modal call. For example, if thisparameter is set to -11, the modal call mode is entered by G1.1.Whether the modal call is equivalent to G66 or G66.1 depends on bit3 (MGE) of parameter No. 7000. Set G codes in the format Gm.n. Thevalue expressed by (m*10+n) is set in the parameter. The values mand n must satisfy the following relationships: 0 ≤ m ≤ 99, 0 ≤ n ≤ 9.


- 310 -

7071 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9001










[Valid data range] (From 3 through 99999999 excluding 30, 98 and 99)Set the M codes used to call the subprograms of program numbers9001 through 9009.

NOTEIf the same M code is set in these parameters, theyounger number is called preferentially. For example,if 100 is set in parameter No. 7071 and 7072, andprograms O9001 and O9002 both exist, O9001 iscalled when M100 is specified.


- 311 -

7080 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9020











[Valid data range] (From 3 through 99999999 excluding 30, 98 and 99)Set the M codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers9020 through 9029. The simple call mode is set.

NOTE1 If the same M code is set in these parameters, the

younger number is called preferentially. Forexample, if 200 is set in parameter No. 7081 and No.7082, and programs O9021 and O9022 both exist,O9021 is called when M200 is specified.

2 If the same M code is set in a parameter (No. 7071 toNo. 7079) used to call subprograms and in aparameter (No. 7080 to No. 7089) used to callcustom macros, a custom macro is calledpreferentially. For example, if 300 is set inparameter No. 7071 and No. 7081, and programsO9001 and O9021 both exist, O9021 is called whenM300 is specified.


- 312 -

7090 Start G code used to call a custom macro


[Valid data range] -999 - 999

7091 Start program number of a custom macro called by G code



7092 Number of G codes used to call custom macros


[Valid data range] 0 - 255Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using Gcodes at a time. With G codes as many as the value set in parameterNo. 7092 starting with the G code set in parameter No. 7090, thecustom macros of program numbers as many as the value set inparameter No. 7092 starting with the program number set in 7091 canbe called. Set 0 in parameter No. 7092 to disable this mode of calling.If a negative value is set in parameter No. 7090, the modal call modeis entered. Whether the modal call is equivalent to G66 or G66.1depends on bit 3 (MGE) of parameter No. 7000.Example 1: When parameter No. 7090 = 900, parameter No. 7091 = 10000000,and parameter No. 7092 = 100 are set, a set of 100 custom macro calls(simple calls) is defined as follows: G900 -> O10000000 G901 -> O10000001 G902 -> O10000002 : G999 -> O10000099When the setting of parameter No. 7090 is changed to -900, the sameset of custom macro calls (modal calls) is defined.

NOTE1 When the following conditions are satisfied, all calls

using these parameters are disabled:1 When a value not within the specifiable range isset in each parameter2 (Value of parameter No.7091+value of parameterNo.97092 - 1) > 99999999

2 The specification of a mixture of simple calls andmodal calls is not allowed.

3 If a range of G codes set by these parametersduplicate G codes specified in parameter No.7050 toNo.7059, the calls specified by parameter No.7050to 7059 are made preferentially.


- 313 -

7093 Start G code with a decimal point used to call a custom macro


[Valid data range] -999 - 999

7094 Start program number of a custom macro called by G code with a decimal

point




- 314 -

7095 Number of G codes with a decimal point used to call custom macros


[Valid data range] 0 - 255Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using Gcodes with a decimal point at a time. With G codes with a decimalpoint as many as the value set in parameter No. 7095 starting with theG code with a decimal point set in parameter No. 7093, the custommacros of program numbers as many as the value set in parameter No.7095 starting with the program number set in 7094 can be called. Set0 in parameter No. 7095 to disable this mode of calling.If a negative value is set in parameter No. 7093, the modal call modeis entered. Whether the modal call is equivalent to G66 or G66.1depends on bit 3 (MGE) of parameter No. 7000.Example: When parameter No. 7093 = 900, parameter No. 7094 = 20000000,and parameter No. 7095 = 100 are set, a set of 100 custom macro calls(simple calls) is defined as follows: G90.0 -> O20000000 G90.1 -> O20000001 G90.2 -> O20000002 : G99.9 -> O20000099When the setting of parameter No. 7093 is changed to -900, the sameset of custom macro calls (modal calls) is defined.


using these parameters are disabled:1) When a value not within the specifiable range is

set in each parameter2) (Value of parameter No.7094+value of

parameter No.7095 - 1) > 999999993) When bit 5 (DPG) of parameter No. 7002 = 0 (to

disable calls using G codes with a decimal point)2 The specification of a mixture of simple calls and

modal calls is not allowed.3 If a range of G codes set by these parameters

duplicate G codes specified in parameter No.7060 toNo.7069, the calls specified by parameter No.7060to 7069 are made preferentially.


- 315 -

7096 Start M code used to call a subprogram



7097 Start program number of a subprogram called by M code



7098 Number of M codes used to call subprograms (number of subprograms

called by M codes)


[Valid data range] 0 - 32767Set this parameter to define multiple subprogram calls using M codesat a time. With M codes as many as the value set in parameter No.7098 starting with the M code set in parameter No. 7096, thesubprograms of program numbers as many as the value set inparameter No. 7098 starting with the program number set in 7097 canbe called. Set 0 in parameter No. 7098 to disable this mode of calling.

Example 1: When parameter No. 7096 = 80000000, parameter No. 7097 =30000000, and parameter No. 7098 = 100 are set, a set of 100subprogram calls is defined as follows: M80000000 -> O30000000 M80000001 -> O30000001 M80000002 -> O30000002 : M80000099 -> O30000099


using these parameters are disabled:1 When a value not within the specifiable range isset in each parameter2 (Value of parameter No. 7097 + value ofparameter No. 7098 - 1) > 99999999

2 If a range of M codes set by these parametersduplicate M codes specified in parameter No. 7071to No. 7079, the calls specified by parameter No.7071 to 7079 are made preferentially.


- 316 -

7099 Start M code used to call a custom macro



7100 Start program number of a custom macro called by M code



7101 Number of M codes used to call custom macros (number of custom macros

called by M codes)


[Valid data range] 0 - 32767Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using Mcodes at a time. With M codes as many as the value set in parameterNo. 7101 starting with the M code set in parameter No. 7099, thecustom macros of program numbers as many as the value set inparameter No. 7101 starting with the program number set in 7100 canbe called. Set 0 in parameter No. 7101 to disable this mode of calling.

Example: When parameter No. 7099 = 90000000, parameter No. 7100 =40000000, and parameter No. 7101 = 100 are set, a set of 100 custommacro calls (simple calls) is defined as follows: M90000000 -> O40000000 M90000001 -> O40000001 M90000002 -> O40000002 : M90000099 -> O40000099


using these parameters are disabled:1 When a value not within the specifiable range isset in each parameter2 (Value of parameter No. 7100 + value ofparameter No. 7101 - 1) > 99999999

2 If a range of M codes set by these parametersduplicate M codes specified in parameter No. 7080through No. 7089, the calls specified by parameterNo. 7080 through 7089 are made preferentially.


- 317 -

4.26 PROGRAM RESTART, BLOCK RESTART, AND TOOLRETRACTION AND RETURN PARAMETERS (DATA NO.7110 AND LATER)

7110 Order of the axes to be used for tool movement in the dry run mode when the

program is restarted


[Valid data range] 0 - 24Set the order of the axes to be used when the tool is moved to therestart point in the dry run mode after the program is restarted, usingthe axis numbers.

If an entered number exceeds the number of controlled axes, an alarmis issued when the program is restarted.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7130 NBK


#0 NBK Specifies whether to perform block count operation for a program notdisplayed during execution when the program is restarted.0: Perform block count operation.1: Do not perform block count operation.


- 318 -

4.27 SKIP FUNCTION PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 7200 ANDLATER)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7200 SRE SFN HSS


#4 HSS Specifies whether to use the high-speed skip signal when the skipfunction or multi-step skip function is used.0: Not used. (The skip signal of the conventional type is used.)1: Used. (The skip signal of the conventional type is disabled.)

#5 SFN Specifies a feedrate that is used during execution of the multi-stepskip function or skip function using the high-speed skip signal (withbit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 7200 set to 1) .0: Feedrate of the F code specified in the program1: Feedrate set in parameter No. 7211 to No. 7214

NOTEFor the skip function not using the high-speed skipsignal (with bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 7200 set to 0),see the description of bit 3 of parameter No. 1400.

#6 SRE Specifies whether to use the rising edge or falling edge to assumesignal input when the high-speed skip signal or high-speedmeasurement position arrival signal is used.0: Use the falling edge (contact close -> open) to assume signal

input.1: Use the rising edge (contact open -> close) to assume signal

input.

NOTEIf this parameter is set to 0 (or 1), and the contact ofthe high-speed skip signal is already open (or closed)when skip operation is specified, the input of the skipsignal is assumed at that time.In this case, skip operation is performed immediately,and the block is terminated.This also applies to the high-speed measurementposition arrival signal for automatic tool lengthmeasurement.


- 319 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7203 TSE


#1 TSE Specifies a skip position to be stored in the system variables (#5061 to#5080) when the torque limit skip command (G31P98/P99) isspecified.0: Position reflecting a servo error (positional deviation)1: Position not reflecting a servo error

�

Position of skip operation

Current CNC position

Machine position Error amount

Position after compensationconsidering delay

Position without considering delay

Origin Stop point


- 320 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7205 1S8 1S7 1S6 1S5 1S4 1S3 1S2 1S1


#0-8 1S1 to 1S8 A skip signal to be used for the G31 skip command or G31.1multistage skip command is set.- Skip command (G31)

Corresponding skip signalParameter High-speed skip signal

( HSS (No.7200#4) =1 )DI signal

( HSS (No.7200#4) =0 )1S1 HDI01S2 HDI11S3 HDI21S4 HDI31S5 HDI41S6 HDI51S7 HDI61S8 HDI7

SKIP1 is always validregardless of the settingsin parameter 1S1 to 1S8.

- Multistage command (G31.1, G31.2, G31.3, G31.4)Corresponding skip signal

Parameter High-speed skip signal ( HSS (No.7200#4) =1 )

DI signal ( HSS (No.7200#4) =0 )

1S1 HDI0 SKIP11S2 HDI1 SKIP21S3 HDI2 SKIP31S4 HDI3 SKIP41S5 HDI41S6 HDI51S7 HDI6

1S8 HDI7

0: A corresponding skip signal is invalid.1: A corresponding skip signal is valid.


- 321 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7206 2S8 2S7 2S6 2S5 2S4 2S3 2S2 2S1


#0-8 2S1 to 2S8 A skip signal to be used for the G31.2 multistage skip command is set.Corresponding skip signal




2S8 HDI7


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7207 3S8 3S7 3S6 3S5 3S4 3S3 3S2 3S1






3S8 HDI7



- 322 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7208 4S8 4S7 4S6 4S5 4S4 4S3 4S2 4S1






4S8 HDI7


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7209 DS8 DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1


#0-8 DS1 to DS8 When the multistage skip option is provided, a skip signal to be usedfor the G04 dwell command is set.

Corresponding skip signalParameter High-speed skip signal

( HSS (No.7200#4) =1 )DI signal

( HSS (No.7200#4) =0 )DS1 HDI0 SKIP1DS2 HDI1 SKIP2DS3 HDI2 SKIP3DS4 HDI3 SKIP4DS5 HDI4DS6 HDI5DS7 HDI6

DS8 HDI7



- 323 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7210 9S8 9S7 9S6 9S5 9S4 9S3 9S2 9S1


#0-8 9S1 to 9S8 A skip signal to be used for G31.8 (EGB skip command) is set.Corresponding skip signal




9S8 HDI7


7211 Feedrate of the skip function (G31 or G31.1)

7212 Feedrate of the skip function (G31.2)





[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Set the feedrate of the skip function for each G code.These parameters are valid when bit 5 (SFN) of parameter No. 7200 isset to 1.


- 324 -

7220 Time width from input of a skip signal until the input of the next skip signal

is enabled when the EGB skip function is used


[Unit of data] 8msec[Valid data range] From 3 through 127. Other values are taken as 3.

Set the time width from input of a skip signal until the input of thenext skip signal is enabled (becomes acceptable) when the EGB skipfunction is used.Set a value in steps of 8 msec.

Example: When 10 is set, 80 msec is assumed.

This parameter is set to prevent the system from accepting a skipsignal mistakenly.

Parameter-set time

Skip signal <1> <2> <3>

After skip signal <1>, skip signal <2> is ignored because it is inputwithin the parameter-set time. Skip signal <3> is valid.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7300 SEB AMH MDC


#0 MDC Specifies whether the result of an automatic tool length measurementis subtracted from or added to the current offset value.0: Subtracted.1: Added.

NOTEThe standard setting is 1.

#1 AMH Specifies whether to use the high-speed measurement position arrivalsignal for automatic tool length measurement.0: Do not use. Instead, the conventional measurement position

arrival signal is used.1: Use.


- 325 -

#7 SEB Specifies whether to reflect the number of accumulated pulses due toacceleration/deceleration and positional deviation when the skipsignal or measurement position arrival signal is turned on in skipoperation or automatic tool length measurement.0: Do not reflect.1: Reflect for compensation.The input position of the skip signal (measurement position arrivalsignal) is found by reflecting the number of accumulated pulses due toactual acceleration/deceleration and positional deviation present whenthe skip signal (measurement position arrival signal) is turned on.Namely, this is the same as type B of FS15B. Note that there is nomethod equivalent to type A (method of determination from a timeconstant and gain) of FS15B.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7301 1A8 1A7 1A6 1A5 1A4 1A3 1A2 1A1


#0-8 1A1 to 1A8 A high-speed measurement position arrival signal to be used for G37(tool length automatic measurement command) is set.

ParameterCorresponding high-speed

measurement position arrival signal1A1 HAE11A2 HAE21A3 HAE31A4 HAE41A5 HAE51A6 HAE61A7 HAE7

1A8 HAE8

0: A corresponding high-speed measurement position arrival signalis invalid.

1: A corresponding high-speed measurement position arrival signalis valid.

7311 Feedrate during automatic tool length measurement





- 326 -

7321 Deceleration position in automatic tool length measurement (value of γ)



[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standardparameter setting table (B) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +999999.999)

7331 Allowable measurement position arrival signal range in automatic tool

length measurement (value of ε)



[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standardparameter setting table (B) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +999999.999)In the figure below, set the feedrate at the time of measurement inparameter No. 7311, the deceleration position (γ) in parameter No.7321, and the range within which the measurement position arrivalsignal (ε) is enabled in parameter No. 7331, respectively.

Feedrate

Rapid traverse

Start point

Rapid traverserate

Coordinates specified in G37

Feedrate duringmeasurement (No.7311)

Measurement positionarrival signal

ε (No.7331)

γ (No.7321)

ε


- 327 -

4.28 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT PARAMETERS (DATA NO.7400 AND LATER)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7400 TAD ABT SNG RAG LTM SIG GS2 GS1


#0 GS1#1 GS2 A combination of the maximum number of groups and maximum

number of tools that can be registered for tool life management is setaccording to the following table:

Tool life managementpairs: with no addition

option

Tool life managementpairs: 512 pairs

Tool life managementpairs: 1024 pairsGS2

(#1)GS1 (#0)

Number ofgroups

Number oftools

Number ofgroups

Number oftools

Number ofgroups

Number oftools

0 0 16 16 64 32 128 320 1 32 8 128 16 256 161 0 64 4 256 8 512 81 1 128 2 512 4 1024 4

NOTEAfter changing the setting in this parameter, specifyG10 L3; to set data again.

#2 SIG Specifies whether to specify a group number for tool skip by using asignal.0: Do not specify.1: Specify.

NOTEIf no group number is specified using a signal, toolskip is performed for the tool of the group currentlyused.

#3 LTM Specifies whether to count tool life by time or frequency.0: Count tool life by frequency.1: Count tool life by time.

NOTEAfter changing the setting of this parameter, reenterthe data with G10 L3;.

#4 RAG Specifies how to clear group execution data when the tool changereset signal (TLRST) is entered.0: Clear the execution data of a specified group if the life of the

group has expired.1: Clear the execution data of all registered groups.


- 328 -

#5 SNG Specifies how to handle the tool skip signal (TLSKP) entered when atool whose life is not managed is used.0: Skip the tool of the group most recently used or the group

specified by bit 2 (SIG) of parameter No. 7400.1: Ignore the tool skip signal. Tool skip based on MDI operation is

also unacceptable.#6 ABT Specifies whether to issue an alarm when the return tool number does

not belong to the currently used group in tool replacement A.0: Issue an alarm (PS0442) .1: Do not issue an alarm.

#7 TAD Specifies whether to issue an alarm when no T command is specifiedin the block that includes M06 in tool replacement D.0: Does not issue an alarm.1: Issues an alarm (PS0440) .

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7401 TRU TRS LFV EMD CT2 CT1


#0 CT1#1 CT2 A tool change type is set according to the following tables:

- Tool life managementDescription

CT2(#1)

CT1(#0)

Toolchange

type

Tool group numberspecified in the block thatspecifies the tool change

command (M06)

Tool life managementcount timing

0 0 AGroup of toolsalready used

0 1 B

1 0 C

Life counting is performedfor a toolin the specified tool groupwhen M06is specified next.

1 1 D

Tool group to be used nextLife counting is performedwhen a tool in the toolgroup specified in the blockthat specifies M06 isspecified.


- 329 -

- Tool offset by tool number

CT2 (#1)

CT1 (#0)

Toolchange

typeDescription

0 0 A

The offset value corresponding to the tool number (Tcode) specified previously becomes valid, and the toolpot number for the tool number specified in the blockthat specifies the tool change M code is output as acode signal. The offset value corresponding to this toolnumber is not made valid by the next tool change Mcode.

0 1 B

The offset value corresponding to the tool number (Tcode) specified previously becomes valid, and the toolpot number for the tool number specified in the blockthat specifies the tool change M code is output as acode signal. The offset value corresponding to this toolnumber is made valid by the next tool change M code.

1 0 C Same as type B.

1 1 D

The tool pot number for the tool number specified in theblock that specifies the tool change M code is output asa code signal, and the corresponding offset valuebecomes valid immediately.

#2 EMD Specifies when the asterisk (*) for representing the expiration of lifeis displayed.0: Displayed when the next tool is used.1: Displayed when the life has expired.

#3 LFV Specifies whether life count override is valid.0: Not valid.1: Valid.

#5 TRS Specifies that the tool change reset signal (TLRST) is valid whenRST is not set to 1 for a reset, and:0: When the reset state is set (OP is set to 0) .1: When the reset state is set (OP is set to 0) , the automatic

operation stop state is set (STL and SPL are set to 0, and OP isset to 1) , or the automatic operation halt state is set (STL is setto 0, and SPL is set to 1) . (However, TLRST is invalid in theautomatic operation stop state, automatic operation halt state,and automatic operation start state (with STL set to 1) duringdata setting command (G10 L3) execution.)

#6 TRU Specifies how to handle a cutting time less than 1 second when lifecounting is based on time (LTM = 1) , and the life count interval is 1second (FCO = 0) .0: A cutting time less than 1 second is truncated, and is not

counted.1: A cutting time less than 1 second is rounded off to 1 second, and

is counted.

NOTEWhen the life count interval is 0.1 second (FCO = 1),a cutting time less than 0.1 second is alwaysrounded off to 0.1 second, and is counted.


- 330 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7403 FGL FCO


#0 FCO Specifies whether the life count interval is 1 second or 0.1 secondwhen tool life counting is based on time.0: 1 second1: 0.1 secondAccording to this parameter, the unit of tool life value and tool lifecounter display/setting is as follows: Bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No. 7403 0 1 Life value and life counter display/setting unit 1 minute 0.1 minute

NOTEAfter changing the setting of this parameter, reenterthe data with G10 L3;.

#1 FGL Specifies whether a life value to be set by L in G10-based life dataregistration is set in steps of 1 minute or 0.1 second when tool lifecounting is based on time.0: In steps of 1 minute1: In steps of 0.1 second

7440 Number for ignoring tool life management


[Valid data range] 0 - 99999999If a value greater than the value set here is specified by a T code, thevalue produced by subtracting the value set here from the value of theT code is used as the tool group number for tool life management.

7442 M code used to restart tool life counting


[Valid data range] From 0 through 99999999 (Excluding 01, 02, 30, 98, 99 and callingM code)When the tool life is specified with the number of times the tool hasbeen used, the tool change signal (TLCHA) is issued if the tool life ofany one of the tool groups has expired at the time of specification ofthe M code used to restart tool life counting.The T code (tool life management group command) specified after theM code used to restart tool life counting selects a tool whose life hasnot expired yet from the specified group. The next M06 codeincrements the tool life counter by one.When the tool life is specified with the time the tool has been used,specifying the M code used to restart tool life counting does not cause


- 331 -

any operation. When 0 is set in this parameter, the M code used torestart tool life counting has no effect.

7443 H code for enabling tool length compensation specified by group number


[Valid data range] 0 - 9999Set, in this parameter, an H code for enabling tool lengthcompensation specified by the currently selected group number.When 0 is set in this parameter, compensation is enabled by H99.

7444 D code for enabling cutter compensation specified by group number


[Valid data range] 0 - 9999Set, in this parameter, a D code for enabling cutter compensationspecified by the currently selected group number. When 0 is set inthis parameter, compensation is enabled by D99.


- 332 -

4.29 FIVE-AXIS CONTROL FUNCTION PARAMETERS (DATANO. 7514 AND LATER)

7514 Tool axis direction


[Valid data range] 1 - 3Enter the tool axis direction when the two rotation axes are set at 0degree.

Data Tool axis direction1 X-axis2 Y-axis3 Z-axis


- 333 -

7515 Master rotation axis number


[Valid data range] 0 - Max axesWhen a machine does not have the rotation axis that turns about thetool axis, the axis number of a rotation axis used as the master axis isset. For machines not using the master-axis configuration, 0 is set.When the tool axis direction is controlled by two rotation axes,neither of which turns about the tool axis, one of the rotation axes ismounted on the other rotation axis as shown in the figure below. Inthis case, the rotation axis on which the other rotation axis is mountedis called the master axis.

A- and B-axes (The tool axis is the Z-axis, and the B-axis is the master.)

A- and B-axes (The tool axis is the Z-axis, and the A-axis is the master.)

Tool axis direction

Rotation center

Workpiece

Tool axis direction

Workpiece

Rotation center

Example for setting parameters that determine the machineconfiguration

Tool axis direction: Z-axisAxis configuration: W, X, Y, Z, A, BRotation axes: A-axis (axis rotating about the X-axis) , B-axis (axis rotating about the Y-axis)Master axis: A-axisData No. Data

W X Y Z A B1029

0 0 0 0 2 3

7514 37515 5


- 334 -

7516 Angular displacement of a rotation axis



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)When using the three-dimensional handle feed function or tool axisdirection tool length compensation function, set the coordinate of arotation axis, among the rotation axes determining the tool axisdirection, which is not controlled by the CNC. This parameter isenabled or disabled, depending on the setting of bit 1 (RAP) ofparameter No. 1014.

7517 Offset value for angular displacement of a rotation axis



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)An offset can be applied to the angular displacement of the three-dimensional handle feed function or tool axis direction tool lengthcompensation function to compensate for the move direction.

7518 Origin offset value of a rotation axis



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set an angular displacement shifted from the origin for a rotation axiswhen the three-dimensional handle feed function or tool axis directiontool length compensation function is used.


- 335 -

7519 Rotation center compensation vector in tool length compensation along tool

axis


[Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit)[Minimum unit of data] The increment system of the axis in question is followed.

[Valid data range] Nine digits in least input increment (See standard parameter settingtable (A).)(For IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)In the function for tool length compensation along the tool axis, setthe vector from the first rotation axis center to second rotation axiscenter.

7520 Spindle center compensation vector in tool length compensation along tool

axis



[Valid data range] Nine digits in least input increment (See standard parameter settingtable (A).)(For IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)In the function for tool length compensation along the tool axis, setthe compensation vector of the spindle center.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7540 ETH DTH SPC SBP TWN PHH


#1 PHH Specifies whether to perform two-head three-dimensional handle feedin parallel axis control and twin table control.0: Do not perform.1: Perform.When this parameter is set to 1, be sure to set parameter No. 7543.

#2 TWN Specifies whether to perform three-dimensional handlefeed/interruption and tool length compensation in tool axis directionwith twin table control.0: Do not perform these operations.1: Perform these operations.

#4 SBP In tool length compensation along the tool axis, shift of the controlpoint is:0: Calculated automatically.1: Set in parameter No. 7745.

#5 SVC In tool length compensation along the tool axis, the control point is:0: Not shifted.1: Shifted.The shift method is specified with bit 4 (SBP) of parameter No. 7540.


- 336 -

#6 DTH Specifies whether to include or exclude a tool holder offset value intool axis direction tool length compensation for tool tip coordinatedisplay.0: Exclude.1: Include.

#7 ETH Specifies whether the tool holder offset function in tool axis directiontool length compensation is useful for the tool length compensationfunction.0: Not useful.1: Useful.

7543 Three-dimensional handle feed head to which each axis belongs in parallel

axis control and twin table control


[Valid data range] 0 - 30: Not three-dimensional handle feed axis1: Three-dimensional handle feed axis of head 12: Three-dimensional handle feed axis of head 23: Three-dimensional handle feed axis of head 3

NOTESet 0 when parallel axis control and twin table controlare not used.

7548 Tool holder offset for tool axis direction tool length compensation



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set an offset value (tool holder offset value) for the machine-specificportion from the rotation center of the rotation axis to the toolmounting position when the tool axis direction tool lengthcompensation function is used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7550 CLR


#6 CLR Specifies whether to clear the travel distance by three-dimensionalhandle feed upon reset.0: Do not clear.1: Clear.


- 337 -

7551 Value set for the manual handle feed axis selection signals for the first

manual handle pulse generator in the first axis direction in tool axis normal

direction handle feed/interrupt


[Valid data range] 0 - 24In a plane perpendicular to the tool axis direction set in parameter No.7514 among the basic three axes, a movement along the first axis (theaxis encountered first when the axes are arranged in the order of X, Y,and Z) may be made. In this case, this parameter sets the status of themanual handle feed axis selection signals (HS1A to HS1E) for thefirst manual handle pulse generator.Example:

When the tool axis is the Z-axis, and this parameter is set to5The axes perpendicular to the tool axis are the X- and Y-axes, andthe first axis is the X-axis. When the first manual handle pulsegenerator is turned with 5 set as the status of the manual handlefeed axis selection signals for the first manual handle pulsegenerator, a movement along the X-axis is made.

<Parameter setting and corresponding manual handle feed axisselection signal status>The following table shows the correspondence between the parametersetting and the status of the manual handle feed axis selection signalsfor the first manual handle pulse generator. When the first manualhandle pulse generator is turned with the signals set according to theparameter setting, operation is performed in specified mode.

HS1E HS1D HS1C HS1B HS1A Setting

0 0 0 0 1 10 0 0 1 0 20 0 0 1 1 30 0 1 0 0 40 0 1 0 1 50 0 1 1 0 60 0 1 1 1 70 1 0 0 0 80 1 0 0 1 90 1 0 1 0 100 1 0 1 1 110 1 1 0 0 120 1 1 0 1 130 1 1 1 0 140 1 1 1 1 151 0 0 0 0 161 0 0 0 1 171 0 0 1 0 181 0 0 1 1 191 0 1 0 0 201 0 1 0 1 211 0 1 1 0 221 0 1 1 1 231 1 0 0 0 24


- 338 -


manual handle pulse generator in the second axis direction in tool axis

normal direction handle feed/interrupt


[Valid data range] 0 - 24Set the state of the manual handle feed axis selection signals (HS1Ato HS1E) for the first manual handle pulse generator when amovement is made in the direction of the second axis (counted in theorder from X to Y to Z) in the plane perpendicular to the direction ofthe tool axis specified in parameter No. 7514 among the three basicaxes. (See the table of correspondence with the manual handle feedaxis selection signals of parameter No. 7551.)


manual handle pulse generator in tool axis direction handle feed/interrupt


[Valid data range] 0 - 24Set the state of the manual handle feed axis selection signals (HS1Ato HS1E) for the first manual handle pulse generator for tool axisdirection handle feed/interrupt. (See the table of correspondencewith the manual handle feed axis selection signals of parameter No.7551.)


manual handle pulse generator for rotation in the tool axis direction in tool

tip center rotation handle feed/interrupt


[Valid data range] 0 - 24Set the state of the manual handle feed axis selection signals (HS1Ato HS1E) for the first manual handle pulse generator for rotation inthe tool axis direction of the tool among the two rotation axes whentool tip center rotation is performed. (See the table ofcorrespondence with the manual handle feed axis selection signals ofparameter No. 7551.)


- 339 -


manual handle pulse generator for rotation in a direction other than the tool

axis direction in tool tip center rotation handle feed/interrupt


[Valid data range] 0 - 24When tool tip center rotation handle feed/interrupt is performed, thisparameter sets the status of the manual handle feed axis selectionsignals (HS1A to HS1E) for the first manual handle pulse generator toperform rotation about one of the two rotation axes that is not in thetool axis direction. (See the table showing the correspondencebetween the parameter setting and the manual handle feed axisselection signals in the description of parameter No. 7551.)The following table lists the axes subject to axis movement inparameter Nos. 7554 and 7555 in different machine configurations.

Tool axis direction Rotation axisconfiguration

7554 7555

Z A, C C AZ B, C C BX A, B A B


manual handle pulse generator for tool axis direction tool length

compensation value modification


[Valid data range] 0 - 24A tool axis direction tool length compensation value can be modifiedby setting the signal corresponding to the setting of this parameter asthe manual handle feed axis selection signals for the first manualhandle pulse generator, then rotating the first manual handle pulsegenerator in the tool axis direction tool length compensation mode(G43.1) . A modified compensation value is canceled by a reset.(See the table of correspondence with the manual handle feed axisselection signals of parameter No. 7551.)


- 340 -

7557 Distance from the center of tool rotation to the tool tip



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the distance from the center of rotation to the tool tip for tool tipcenter rotation handle feed/interrupt and tool tip position display.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7558 NT3 HSS


#6 HSS Specifies how to stop axis movement when the manual pulsegenerator is rotated by three-dimensional handle feed at a speedgreater than the clamp speed then is stopped.0: Stop after the amount of movement specified by the manual

pulse generator is made.1: Stop immediately.

#7 NT3 Specifies whether to use the conventional rotary head or Nutator headfor three-dimensional handle feed/interrupt.0: Conventional rotary head1: Nutator head


- 341 -

4.30 OTHER PARAMETERS

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7565 NOF ZAG


#4 ZAG Specifies whether to perform the deceleration function (decelerationby Z-axis falling angle) based on cutting load of fine HPCC.0: Do not perform.1: Perform.After setting 1 in this parameter, be sure to set parameter No. 7591,No. 7592, and No. 9593.

#7 NOF Specifies whether to ignore an F command in fine HPCC.0: Do not ignore.1: Ignore.When 1 is set in this parameter, the specification of the upper feedratelimit of parameter No. 7567 is assumed.

7567 Upper feedrate limit for fine HPCC



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Set an upper feedrate limit for fine HPCC. If a feedrate higher thanthe value set in this parameter is specified in the fine HPCC mode, thefeedrate is clamped to the value set in this parameter.When 0 is set in this parameter, the feedrate is not clamped.When bit 7 (NOF) of parameter No. 7565 is set to 1, the specificationof the feedrate set in this parameter is assumed. If 0 is set in thisparameter at this time, the PS0187 alarm is issued.


- 342 -

7591 Override for area 2 in deceleration based on fine HPCC cutting load





With the deceleration function based on fine HPCC cutting load, aspecified override can be applied according to the Z-axis fallingangle.A feedrate found from other conditions is multiplied by the overridevalue of an area to which the falling angle ̆ belongs. Note,however, that no parameter is available for area 1, and an override of100% is used at all times.

Area 1 0° ≤ θ < 30°Area 2 30° ≤ θ < 45°Area 3 45° ≤ θ < 60°Area 4 60° ≤ θ < 90°

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7601 SRF


#4 SRF Specifies how the slave axis and master axis operate with G28, G30,and G53 in synchronous control.0: Independent movements are made to specified positions on the

slave axis and master axis.1: The same operation is performed on the slave axis and master

axis.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7602 DDP INC G90 REL TYB


#0 TYB Specifies whether the operation sequence of the index table indexingaxis is of type A or type B.0: Type A1: Type B

#2 REL Specifies whether to round index table indexing axis position displaywithin one rotation in the relative coordinate system.0: Do not round.1: Round.


- 343 -

#3 G90 Specifies whether the specification of an index table indexing axisfollows the absolute mode/incremental mode specification or isassumed to be specified as an absolute command.0: Follow the absolute/incremental mode specification.1: Assumed to be an absolute command at all times.

#4 INC Specifies whether to use the shortcut direction as the direction ofrotation in the G90 mode when the M code for negative directionrotation specification (parameter No. 7632) is not set.0: Do not use the shortcut direction.1: Use the shortcut direction.

#5 DDP Specifies whether to use the conventional format or the fixed-pointformat as the method of decimal point input for index table indexingaxis specification.0: Conventional format1: Fixed-point format

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7603 OPUS OPSP OPKY OPAT OPOV OPHD OPJG OPMD



#0 OPMD Specifies whether to perform mode selection on the softwareoperator’s panel.0: Perform.1: Do not perform.

#1 OPJG Specifies whether to perform jog feed axis selection and manual rapidtraverse switching through the MDI keys.0: Perform.1: Do not perform.

#2 OPHD Specifies whether to perform manual pulse generator feed axisselection/magnification setting on the software operator’s panel.0: Perform.1: Do not perform.

#3 OPOV Specifies whether to set an override for each of a jog feedrate, cuttingfeedrate, rapid traverse rate, and spindle speed on the softwareoperator’s panel.0: Set.1: Do not set.

#4 OPAT Specifies whether to perform optional block skip, single block,machine lock, and dry run operations on the software operator’s panel.0: Perform.1: Do not perform.


- 344 -

#5 OPKY Specifies whether to perform memory protection on the softwareoperator’s panel.0: Perform.1: Do not perform.

#6 OPSP Specifies whether to perform feed hold on the software operator’spanel.0: Perform.1: Do not perform.

#7 OPUS Specifies whether to use the general-purpose switches on the softwareoperator’s panel.0: Use.1: Do not use.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7605 NBC


#7 NBC Specifies whether to check for interference when a block is restarted.0: Check.1: Do not check.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7609 RAX RDS


#2 RDS In the binary input operation mode of the remote buffer, the dataformat of axis travel distances is:0: A special one.1: A general one.

#3 RAX In the binary input operation mode of the remote buffer, auxiliaryfunctions are:0: Not used.1: Used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7610 CBK PNR


#0 PNR When a programmable mirror image is applied,0: G41 and G42 are inverted. (See NOTE.)1: G41 and G42 are not inverted.This parameter bit is related to NR3 (bit 2 of parameter No.6007). See the description of this parameter.


- 345 -

NOTEIf two or more programmable mirror axes arespecified, G41 and G42 are not inverted. Themirror axis component refers to the vectorcomponent on the axis on which the programmablemirror is enabled.

#7 CBK Specifies whether to use parameter No. 7685 or address K to specifythe amount of linear axis division (span value) in exponentialinterpolation.0: Use parameter No. 7685.1: Use address K together with the G02.2/G03.3 code.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7611 DLT XSC


#4 XSC Specifies whether axis-by-axis scaling magnification setting is valid.0: Not valid.1: Valid.

#7 DLT Specifies the timing of updating the number of manual interruptpulses and the travel distance on the display screen when the tool axisdirection tool length compensation value is changed.0: When the execution of the next block to be buffered starts1: Each time the manual pulse generator is turned

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7612 OVT HDR RSH


#0 RSH Specifies whether to cancel the synchronous mode (G81, G81.5)when the electronic gear box function (EGB) is used.0: Cancel upon reset.1: Do not cancel upon reset. The synchronous mode is canceled by

the G80 or G80.5 code only.


- 346 -

#2 HDR Helical gear compensation direction (Usually, set 1.)Example: When the rotation direction of the C-axis is the negative (-)direction, and a left-twisted helical gear is cut:0: Set a negative (-) value in P.1: Set a positive (+) value in P.

When HDR = 1

+C

C : +, Z : +, P : +Compensation

direction: +

(a)

-Z

+Z +C

C : +, Z : +, P : -Compensation

direction: -

(b)+C

C : +, Z : -, P : +Compensation

direction: -

(c)+C

C : +, Z : -, P : -Compensation

direction: +

(d)

-Z

+Z

C : -, Z : +, P : +Compensation

direction: -

(e)-C

C : -, Z : +, P : -Compensation

direction: +

(f)-C

C : -, Z : -, P : +Compensation

direction: +

(g)-C

C : -, Z : -, P : -Compensation

direction: -

(h)-C

When HDR = 0 ((a), (b), (c), and (d) are the same as when HDR = 1.)

-Z

+Z

C : -, Z : +, P : +Compensation

direction: +

(e)-C

C : -, Z : +, P : -Compensation

direction: -

(f)-C

C : -, Z : -, P : +Compensation

direction: -

(g)-C

C : -, Z : -, P : -Compensation

direction: +

(h)-C

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7613 TWJ ART


#4 ART Specifies whether the retraction function based on a servo spindlealarm is valid.0: Not valid.1: Valid.


- 347 -

#5 TWJ Specifies how the amount of manual interrupt is reflected in the slaveaxis independent mode or synchronous mode of the twin table controlfunction.0: The amount of manual interrupt of the master axis only is

reflected for the master axis and slave axis.1: The amount of manual interrupt of the master axis is reflected

for the master axis, and the amount of manual interrupt of theslave axis is reflected for the slave axis.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7614 TRS TRI


#0 TRI Specifies whether the specification of the G10.6 code for toolwithdrawal and return follows the absolute/incremental modespecification or is an incremental command.0: Follow the absolute/increment mode specification.1: Incremental command at all times.

#1 TRS Specifies operation to be performed upon completion of repositioningin tool withdrawal and return operation.0: Automatic operation restarts.1: Operation stops if the single block switch is on. Automatic

operation restarts when the cycle start button is pressed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7616 EXT G60



#0 G60 Specifies whether the G60 code (single direction positioning) is aone-shot G code (00 group) or modal G code (01 group) .0: One-shot G code (00 group)1: Modal G code (01 group)

#3 EXT Specifies whether to perform external device subprogram calls.0: Do not perform.1: Perform.When a setting is made so that external device subprogram calls arenot performed, M198 is handled as an ordinary M code.


- 348 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7617 DNA


#3 DNA Specifies whether to issue an alarm if the tool number (pot number)

specified by the tool data deletion command (G10L72) cannot befound.0: Issue an alarm (SR422) .1: Do not issue an alarm, ignoring the deletion command of the

block.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7618 TM2 TM1 TM0



#0 TM0#1 TM1#2 TM2 This parameter specifies data distribution time in msec for binary

statement input operation. In binary statement input operation throughREMOTE BUFFER, set these parameters according to the followingtable.

TM2 TM1 TM0Time required for distributing

data at binary statement inputs1 0 0 1msec0 0 1 2 msec0 1 0 4 msec0 0 0 8 msec0 1 1 16 msec

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7620 MOA MOP


#3 MOP Specifies whether to output M, S, T, and B codes before a block to berestarted is found at program restart time, then the tool is moved tothe machining restart position.0: Do not output M, S, T, and B codes (the overstore mode is

disabled) .1: Output M, S, T, and B codes (the overstore mode is enabled) .


- 349 -

#6 MOA Specifies M, S, T, and B codes to be output before the tool is movedto a machining restart position at program restart time.0: The last M, S, T, and B codes are output.1: All M codes and the last S, T, and B codes are output.This parameter is valid only when parameter MOP = 1.

7629 The amount of retraction in tool withdrawal and return



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the amount of retraction when G10.6 for the tool withdrawal andreturn function is specified singly. The value set in this parameter isused as an incremental value for retract operation. This data is validonly when bit 0 (RPS) of parameter No. 7630 is set to 1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7630 TRC RPS


#0 RPS Specifies whether to perform retraction when the tool retract signalTRESC is set to 1 after G10.6 is singly specified.0: Do not perform retraction.1: Perform retraction using the setting of parameter No. 7629 as the

incremental amount of retraction.#1 TRC When the tool retract & recovery function is executed to restart

automatic operation in a drilling canned cycle:0: The same machining operation is performed again. (The same

drilling operation is performed.)1: The next machining operation is performed. (The next drilling

operation is performed.)

7631 Controlled axis number of an index table indexing axis



[Valid data range] 0 - Max axesSet the controlled axis number of an index table indexing axis.When 0 is set, the fourth axis is assumed.


- 350 -

7632 M code used to specify the negative-direction rotation of an index table

indexing axis


[Valid data range] 0 - 1270: The rotation direction of an index table indexing axis is determinedby the setting of the parameter (7602#4 INC) and command.1 to 127: The rotation direction of an index table indexing axis isalways positive. The rotation direction is negative only when a movecommand is specified together with the M code set.

7633 M code for turning off synchronization in synchronous control and twin table

control


[Valid data range] 1 - 999999999Specify an M code for switching from synchronous operation toindependent operation or normal operation.The M code set in this parameter is not buffered.

7634 M code for turning on synchronization in synchronous control and twin table

control


[Valid data range] 1 - 999999999Specify the M code that causes switching from independent or normaloperation to synchronous operation.The M code specified for this parameter is treated as an M codewithout buffering.

7635 Number of axes in a single block that can accept commands (remote buffer)


[Valid data range] 0 - Max axesSet the number of axes in a single block that can accept commandswhen using binary input operation mode. Do not change thisparameter during operation.

NOTEThe axes that can accept commands from theremote buffer are the first n axes in the controlledaxis list, where n is the number of axes specified forthis parameter.For example, when this parameter is 3, the fourthand any subsequent axes in the controlled axis listcannot accept commands.


- 351 -

7636 Number of a linear axis for which exponential interpolation is performed


[Valid data range] 1 - Max axesSet the ordinal controlled axis number of a linear axis for whichexponential interpolation is performed.

7637 Number of a rotation axis for which exponential interpolation is performed


[Valid data range] 1 - Max axesSet the ordinal controlled axis number of a rotation axis for whichexponential interpolation is performed.

7642 M code that causes switching to independent operation during twin table

control

Specify the M code that causes switching from synchronous or normaloperation to independent operation.The M code specified for this parameter is handled as an M codewithout buffering.

7651 Interference allowance when the block is restarted (d)


[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis

[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 -+999999.999)Set an allowable distance between the normal path after cuttercompensation and the block restart position.If the distance between the normal path and restart position is equal toor greater than d, a warning about interference is issued to protectagainst overcutting.

7672 Maximum travel of a block executed with smooth interpolation





- 352 -

Set the length specified in each block that is to be checked as acondition for performing smooth interpolation. When the lengthspecified in a block is longer than this setting, the block is executedwithout smooth interpolation.

7673 Angle for which smooth interpolation is not performed



[Valid data range] 0 - 90Set the angle to be checked as a condition for performing smoothinterpolation. Smooth interpolation is not performed for a point atwhich the difference in the angle is greater than this setting.

7675 Minimum travel of a block executed with smooth interpolation



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) )(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the length specified in each block that is to be checked for acondition for performing smooth interpolation. When the lengthspecified in a block is shorter than this setting, the block is executedwithout smooth interpolation.

7676 Maximum tolerance of a block executed with smooth interpolation



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the tolerance to be checked as a condition for performing smoothinterpolation. When the tolerance specified in a block is larger thanthis setting, the block is executed without smooth interpolation.When a value of 0 is set for this parameter, the tolerance is notchecked.


- 353 -

The tolerance means a distance between a curve-C and a line-L.

CommandpointLine-L

Curve-C

Tolerance

7677 Minimum tolerance of a block executed with smooth interpolation



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the tolerance to be checked as a condition for performing smoothinterpolation. When the tolerance specified in a block is smaller thanthis setting, the block is executed without smooth interpolation.Normally, set a value near one-tenth of the maximum tolerance(parameter No. 7676) . When a value of 0.0 is set, the minimumtolerance is assumed to be one-tenth of the maximum tolerance(parameter No. 7676) . When a negative value is set, the minimumtolerance is assumed to be 0.0.

7681 Sequence number for stoppage upon matching


[Valid data range] 1 - 99999999When the sequence number set in this parameter appears duringprogram execution, single block stop state is set after the block isexecuted. In this case or in the case of a reset, this parameter iscleared to 0.

NOTE1 When 0 is set, stoppage upon matching is disabled.

This means that even when there is a block of N0,single block stop state does not occur with the block.

2 If a match is found with the sequence number of ablock processed internally within the CNC only (suchas a macro statement, M98, or M99), stoppage uponmatching is not performed.

3 If a match is found with the sequence number of ablock that specifies the number of repeats (such as Lspecification in a canned cycle), operation stopsafter the specified number of repeats are performed.


- 354 -

NOTE4 If the sequence number set in this parameter

appears more than once in the program, operationstops after the first matching block in the executionflow is executed.

7682 Minimum positioning angle for an index table indexing axis



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set a minimum positioning angle (angular displacement) for an indextable indexing axis. An angular displacement for positioningspecification must always be an integral multiple of the setting of thisparameter. When 0 is specified, no angular displacement check ismade.Not only commands but also coordinate system settings andworkpiece origin offsets are checked for a minimum positioningangle.

7685 Interval in exponential interpolation for a linear axis (span value)



[Valid data range] 0 - 999999999When bit 7 (CBK) of parameter No. 7610 is set to 0, set an interval inexponential interpolation for a linear axis.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7697 TTD WNM ZG2 BEX


#0 BEX If a tapping mode command (G63) or canned cycle command (exceptthe rigid tapping cycle command (G84.2) and the rigid reverse tappingcycle command (G84.3)) is issued, the mode ofacceleration/deceleration before look-ahead interpolation is:0: Turned off.1: Not turned off.


- 355 -

#1 ZG2 In the function of deceleration with the cutting load of fineHPCC (deceleration with the Z-axis decent angle), the overridevalue is in the shape of:0: A staircase.1: A slope.This parameter bit is effective only if ZAG, bit 4 of parameter No.7565, is 1.If setting this parameter bit to 1, specify parameters Nos. 7698, 7591,7592, and 7593.

#2 WNM In tool length/workpiece origin measurement, an automaticreference position return after a manual numeric command andmeasurement is:0: Enabled.1: Disabled.

#7 TTD On the tool head coordinate display screen and on the manualinterrupt pulse/travel distance display screen, if a rotation axis isa parameter axis, that rotation axis is:0: Displayed.1: Not displayed.

7698 Override for area 1 during deceleration with the cutting load of fine HPCC



Set the override value for area 1 with the function of decelerationwith the cutting load of fine HPCC.This parameter bit is effective only if ZG2, bit 1 of parameter No.7697, is 1.

7702 Master axis number in synchronous control or twin table control



[Valid data range] 0 - Max axesSelect an axis that is to be synchronized in synchronous control ortwin table control.Example: Assume the following controlled axis configuration: First axis : X-axis / Second axis : Y-axis / Third axis : Z-axis / Fourth axis : U-axisTo synchronize the U-axis with X-axis, set the parameters as follows: X : 0 / Y : 0 / Z : 0 / U : 1


- 356 -

7703 Drawing axis selection


[Valid data range] 0 - 3Specify which axes are used as drawing axes in tool path drawing andbackground drawing.First drawing axis: 1 Second drawing axis: 2 Third drawing axis: 3Set 0 for an axis not used for drawing.When 0 is set for all axes, the three basic axes are used as drawingaxes.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7710 TPM CTM MGC MGO


#0 MGO Specifies how to output M codes with the program restart M, S, T,and B output function.0: Output the last M code only.1: Output the last M code of each M code group.

NOTEThis parameter is valid only when the optional Mcode grouping function is selected and bit 3 (MOPR)of parameter No. 7620 is set to 1.

#3 MGC Specifies whether to check the M code group when multiple M codesare specified in a single block.0: Do not check.1: Check.


- 357 -

#4 CTM Specifies the count condition for cumulative cutting time parameters(Nos. 103 and 104) during automatic operation, as follows:0: Condition a1: Condition b

Condition b (CTM = 1)Condition a (CTM = 0)CCT<G045#6>=”0” CCT<G045#6>=”1”

G01/G02/G03 command block beingexecuted

G01/G02/G03 command block being executed

Dry run not specified(Signal DRN<G004#1> = "0")

Dry run not specified(Signal DRN<G004#1> = "0")

Machine lock not specified(Signal MLK<G004#7> = "0")

Machine lock not specified(Signal MLK<G004#7> = "0")

Interlock state not specified (Signals*IT<G000#0>, *AIT<G001#0>, *IT1<G64#4>,*IT2<G68#4>, ..., *BSL<G001#1>, and*CSL<G000#1> are all "1", where *IT1,*IT2, ... represent the axes of interest.)

Interlock state not specified (Signals*IT<G000#0>, *AIT<G001#0>, *IT1<G64#4>,*IT2<G68#4>, ..., *BSL<G001#1>, and*CSL<G000#1> are all "1", where *IT1, *IT2, ...represent the axes of interest.)A feedrate override value is not 0%. (Signals *FV0 to *FV<G012>)The second feedrate override value is not 0%.(Signals *AFV0 to *AFV7<G013>/*AFV0B to*AFV15B<G146 to G147>)One of the spindle stop confirmation signals(SPSTPA to SPSTPD<G026#0, G272#0,G273#0, and G274#0>) for all spindles is "0".

Unconditional

If CTM = 1 (condition b), setting the cumulative cutting time countrequest signal CCT<G045#6> to "1" nullifies the count conditions forthe cumulative cutting time parameters (Nos. 103 and 104).

#7 TPM Specifies whether to use the function for displaying the currentlyexecuted program with the open CNC.0: Do not use.1: Use.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7711 EHF FWR DDT


#0 DDT Specifies whether G41 I_J_K_ or G42 I_J_K_ is used for three-dimensional tool compensation or specified-direction tool lengthcompensation.0: Used for three-dimensional tool compensation.1: Used for specified-direction tool length compensation.

#2 FWR Specifies whether to include or exclude rotation axes for the feedratein the specified-direction tool length compensation mode.0: Exclude rotation axes for the feedrate.1: Include rotation axes for the feedrate.


- 358 -

#6 EHF Specifies whether feed-forward control on the axial feed axis inhelical compensation is valid during cutting only or in thesynchronization mode based on G81.0: Valid only during cutting.1: Valid at all times in the synchronization mode based on G81.Usually, set 0.Feed-forward control is usually valid during cutting feed only. Whenthis parameter is set to 1, however, feed-forward control on the axialfeed axis in helical compensation is valid at all times duringsynchronization based on the G81 command for a hobbing machine.When bit 3 (RFW) of parameter No. 1800 is set to 1, feed-forwardcontrol is valid, regardless of this parameter.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7712 FNR AMM PHD PHS


#0 PHS Specifies whether to perform acceleration/deceleration when EGBsynchronization is started or canceled if there is no R command in aG81/G80 block.0: Do not perform acceleration/deceleration when EGB

synchronization is started or canceled.1: Perform acceleration/deceleration when EGB synchronization

when EGB synchronization is started or canceled, andautomatically perform phase alignment after acceleration whensynchronization starts.

#1 PHD Specifies the direction of movement for automatic phase alignment.0: Positive (+) direction1: Negative (-) direction

#4 AMM If M99 is issued from the main program:0: The tape is rewound to execute the program again from the

beginning.1: Alarm PS0018 is issued.

#5 FNR In the fixture offset coordinate system rotation function,coordinate system rotation is:0: Performed.1: Not performed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

7713 G5H HBF


#2 HBF Specifies whether to use the memory card interface on the CNC sideor PC side with the CNC screen display function of the open CNC.0: Use the memory card interface on the CNC side.1: Use the memory card interface on the PC side.


- 359 -

#3 G5H In binary input operation mode, acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead interpolation or fine HPCC is:0: Enabled.1: Disabled.Only when the unit time is 1 msec (2 msec for a system with 11 ormore controlled axes), acceleration/deceleration before look-aheadinterpolation or fine HPCC can be disabled in binary input operationmode by using this parameter.Note that to do this, acceleration/deceleration before look-aheadinterpolation or fine HPCC must be enabled.In operation with the unit time shorter than 8 msec,acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead interpolation or fineHPCC must be enabled.

7714 Direction of the tool axis of head 2 in parallel axis control and twin table

control


[Valid data range] 0 - 3Enter the direction of the tool axis when the two rotation axes are at0-degree position.

Data Tool axis direction1 X-axis2 Y-axis3 Z-axis


- 360 -

7715 Master axis number of the rotation axis of head 2 in parallel axis control and

twin table control


[Valid data range] 0 - Max axesWith a machine configured to have no axis rotated in the tool axisdirection, set the axis number of a rotation axis that functions as themaster axis. Set 0 in this parameter for a machine configuration thatinvolves no master axis. For information about the master axis, seethe description of parameter No. 7515.

7716 Angular displacement of the rotation axis of head 2 in parallel axis control

and twin table control



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)When the three-dimensional handle feed function or the tool axisdirection tool length compensation function is used, set the coordinateof a rotation axis, among the rotation axes used for tool axis directiondetermination, which is not controlled by the CNC. This parameter isenabled or disabled, depending on the setting of bit 1 (RAP) ofparameter No. 1014.

7717 Offset value for the angular displacement of the rotation axis of head 2 in

parallel axis control and twin table control



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)An offset can be applied to the angular displacement of the three-dimensional handle feed function or the tool axis direction tool lengthcompensation function to shift the direction of movement.


- 361 -

7718 Origin offset value of the rotation axis of head 2 in parallel axis control and

twin table control



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the amount of rotation shifted from the origin of the rotation whenthe three-dimensional handle feed function or the tool axis directiontool length compensation function is used.

7719 Rotation center compensation vector for head 2 in parallel axis control and

twin-table control



[Valid data range] Nine digits in least input increment (See standard parameter settingtable (A).)(For IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)In the function for tool length compensation along the tool axis, setthe vector from the first rotation axis center to second rotation axiscenter.

7723 Maximum error in synchronous error checking based on machine

coordinates



[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standardparameter setting table (B) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +999999.999)This parameter sets the maximum allowable difference between themaster axis and the slave axis machine coordinate value when thesynchronous error check based on machine coordinates is used. If thedifference of machine coordinates exceeds the value specified in thisparameter, an alarm (OT513) is issued.Set this parameter to the slave axis.


- 362 -

7724 Maximum compensation value in synchronization alignment based on

machine coordinates



[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standardparameter setting table (B) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +999999.999)This parameter sets the maximum compensation value forsynchronization alignment. If a compensation value exceeds the valuespecified with this parameter, an alarm (OT513) is issued, and thecompensation alignment is not performed.Set this parameter to the slave axis.

7729 Acceleration for workpiece axis acceleration/deceleration


[Unit of data] degree/sec/sec[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis

[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D) (When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 - +100000.0. Whenthe machine system is inch system, machine, 0.0 - +10000.0)Set an acceleration value for workpiece axis acceleration/deceleration.

7738 Spindle center compensation vector for head 2 in parallel axis control and

twin-table control



[Valid data range] Nine digits in least input increment (See standard parameter settingtable (A).)(For IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)In the function for tool length compensation along the tool axis, setthe spindle center compensation vector.


- 363 -

7745 Shift vector in tool length compensation along tool axis



[Valid data range] Nine digits in least input increment (See standard parameter settingtable (A).)(For IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)In the function for tool length compensation along the tool axis, setthe control point shift vector. This parameter is valid when bit 5(SVC) of parameter No. 7540 is 1 and bit 4 (SBP) of parameter No.7540 is 1.

7746 Shift vector of tool length compensation along tool axis for head 2 in parallel

axis control and twin-table control



[Valid data range] Nine digits in least input increment (See standard parameter settingtable (A).)(For IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)In the function for tool length compensation along the tool axis, setthe control point shift vector. This parameter is valid when bit 5(SVC) of parameter No. 7540 is 1 and bit 4 (SBP) of parameter No.7540 is 1.

7753 Value to be set for the manual handle feed axis selection signals for the first

manual handle pulse generator in the first axis direction for tool axis normal

direction handle feed/interrupt of head 2 in parallel axis control and twin

table control


[Valid data range] 0 - 24When a movement is made by the handle in the first axis direction(first axis when counting X (U) , Y (V) , and Z (W) in this order) inthe plane that is perpendicular to the direction of the tool axis, amongthe three basic axes, which is set in parameter No. 7714, set the stateof the manual handle feed axis selection signals (HS1A to HS1E) forthe first manual handle pulse generator. (See the table ofcorrespondence with the manual handle feed axis selection signals ofparameter No. 7551.)

NOTEWhen 0 is set, tool axis normal direction handle feedis disabled.However, set 0 in this parameter when parallel axiscontrol and twin table control are not used.


- 364 -

7754 Value to be set for the handle feed axis selection signals for the first manual

handle pulse generator in the second axis direction for tool axis normal

direction handle feed/interrupt of head 2 in parallel axis control and twin

table control


[Valid data range] 0 - 24When a movement is made by the handle in the second axis direction(second axis when counting X (U) , Y (V) , and Z (W) in this order)in the plane that is perpendicular to the direction of the tool axis,among the three basic axes, which is set in parameter No. 7714, setthe state of the manual handle feed axis selection signals (HS1A toHS1E) for the first manual handle pulse generator. (See the table ofcorrespondence with the manual handle feed axis selection signals ofparameter No. 7551.)

NOTEWhen 0 is set, tool axis normal direction handle feedis disabled.However, set 0 in this parameter when parallel axiscontrol and twin table control are not used.


handle pulse generator for tool axis direction handle feed/interrupt of head 2

in parallel axis control and twin table control


[Valid data range] 0 - 24Set the state of the manual handle feed axis selection signals (HS1Ato HS1E) for the first manual handle pulse generator when tool axisdirection handle feed is performed. When the manual handle feed axisselection signals for the first manual handle pulse generator is set tothe state set in this parameter in the three-dimensional handle feedmode, turning the first manual handle pulse generator performs toolaxis direction handle feed operation. (See the table ofcorrespondence with the manual handle feed axis selection signals ofparameter No. 7551.)

NOTEWhen 0 is set, tool axis direction handle feed isdisabled.However, set 0 in this parameter when parallel axiscontrol and twin table control are not used.


- 365 -


handle pulse generator for tool axis direction rotation of the tool tip center of

head 2 in parallel axis control and twin table control


[Valid data range] 0 - 24Set the state of the manual handle feed axis selection signals (HS1Ato HS1E) for the first manual handle pulse generator when one of thetwo rotation axes of head 2 rotates in the tool axis direction. (Seethe table of correspondence with the manual handle feed axisselection signals of parameter No. 7551.)

NOTEWhen 0 is set, tool tip center rotation handle feed isdisabled.However, set 0 in this parameter when parallel axiscontrol and twin table control are not used.


handle pulse generator for rotation in a direction other than the tool axis

direction of the tool tip center of head 2 in parallel axis control and twin table

control


[Valid data range] 0 - 24When rotation is performed about one of the two rotation axes of head2 that is not in the tool axis direction, this parameter sets the status ofthe manual handle feed axis selection signals (HS1A to HS1E) .(See the table showing the correspondence between the parametersetting and the manual handle feed axis selection signals in thedescription of parameter No. 7551.)

The following table lists the axes subject to axis movement inparameter Nos. 7756 and 7757 in different machine configurations.

Tool axis direction Rotation axis configuration 7756 7757

Z A,C C AZ B,C C BX A,B A B

NOTEWhen 0 is set, tool tip center rotation handle feed isdisabled.However, set 0 in this parameter when parallel axiscontrol and twin table control are not used.


- 366 -

7758 Value to be set for the manual handle feed axis selection signals for the first

manual handle pulse generator for modification to the tool axis direction tool

length compensation value of head 2 in parallel axis control and twin table

control


[Valid data range] 0 - 24In the tool axis direction tool length compensation mode (G43.1) , setthe signal corresponding to the setting of this parameter as the manualhandle feed axis selection signals for the first manual handle pulsegenerator, then turn the first manual handle pulse generator. The toolaxis direction tool length compensation value is then modified. Themodified compensation value is canceled by a reset. (See the tableof correspondence with the manual handle feed axis selection signalsof parameter No. 7551.)

NOTEWhen 0 is set, tool axis direction tool lengthcompensation value modification is disabled.However, set 0 in this parameter when parallel axiscontrol and twin table control are not used.

7759 Distance from the tool rotation center of head 2 to the tool tip in parallel axis

control and twin table control



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set the distance from the tool rotation center to the tool tip for tool tipcenter rotation handle feed/interrupt and tool tip position display.

7760 Tool holder offset value for tool axis direction tool length compensation of

head 2 in parallel axis control and twin table control



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set an offset value (tool holder offset value) for the machine-specificportion from the rotation center of the rotation axis to the toolmounting position when the tool axis direction tool lengthcompensation function is used.


- 367 -

7765 Interval at which time is recorded in the operation history



If history data is recorded not at specified intervals, time informationis recorded in the history data at specified intervals.When 0 is set, time information is recorded at intervals of 10 minutes.

7767 Allowable cumulative movement value for torque control



Set an allowable cumulative movement value in the torque controlmode.If the cumulative movement value exceeds the value set in thisparameter, a servo alarm (SV0126) is issued.

NOTEThis parameter is valid when bit 3 (TQF) of parameterNo. 1409 is set to 0.

7768 Torque control cancellation limit



Set a cancellation limit value used to cancel the torque control mode.When the torque control mode is canceled, position control isresumed if the positional deviation becomes equal to or less than thesetting of this parameter.

NOTEThis parameter is valid when bit 3 (TQF) of parameterNo. 1409 is set to 0.


- 368 -

7793 Limit for normal-direction control axis rotation



[Valid data range] 1 - 999999999A specified limit functions as a limit for ignoring the angulardisplacement of the normal-direction control axis. The parametermeans as follows:When the angular displacement calculated in normal-direction controlis less than the limit specified in this parameter, the block thatspecifies the calculated angular displacement is not inserted in theprogram. The ignored angular displacement is added to the angulardisplacement to be calculated next, which in turn is compared withthe parameter value.Note)- When an angle of 360 degrees or larger is specified in this

parameter, the block that specifies the angular displacement isnot inserted in the program.

- When an angle of 180 degrees or larger is specified in thisparameter, the block that specifies the angular displacement isnot inserted in the program unless circular interpolation isperformed with an angle of 180 degrees or larger.

7794 Limit of the travel distance moved using the normal-direction angle in the

previous block



[Valid data range] 1 - 999999999Set a limit on the travel distance moved using the normal-directionangle of the previous block without modification.

7795 Retract feedrate



[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)Set a feedrate for retraction along each axis.


- 369 -

7796 Retract amount



[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter settingtable (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)Set a retract amount for each axis.

7799 Limit value for synchronization error check based on position deviation



Alarm OT513 is issued if the absolute positional deviation differencebetween the master axis and slave axis during synchronization controlexceeds the value specified in this parameter.Set a desired value for the slave axis.

When 0 is set in this parameter, no check is made.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

8412 FDI HIK EST


#0 EST The simple start command for NURBS interpolation is:0: Disabled.1: Enabled.

#1 HIK The high-precision knot command for NURBS interpolation is:0: Disabled.1: Enabled.

#5 FDI Parametric feedrate control for NURBS interpolation is:0: Disabled.1: Enabled.


- 370 -

4.31 SERVICE PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 8000 AND LATER)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

8000 NLP PRA NAP PWE


#0 PWE Specifies whether to enable those parameters that cannot be set bysetting input to be set from an external device or the MDI unit.0: Not enable.1: Enable.

#1 NAP Specifies whether to switch the screen display to the alarm messagescreen automatically when an alarm is issued.0: Switch.1: Do not switch.

#2 PRA Specifies whether to issue an alarm when the PWE parameter is set to1 (to enable parameter setting) .0: Issue an alarm.1: Do not issue an alarm.

#3 NLP From P-CODE, the parameters for the macro executor are:0: Loaded.1: Not loaded.Usually, the parameters for the macro executor are initialized to thevalues set in P-CODE when the power is turned on. If this bit is setto 1, none of these parameters will be initialized, except parametersNos. 8500, 8501, 8549, and 8550.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

8001 SBU


#6 SBU Specifies whether to save file SRAM in a batch from the memory cardinput/output screen.0: Do not save.1: Save.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

8010 NCS


#0 NCS Specifies whether the setting of parameter No. 8000 is cleared to 0 orpreserved when the power to the NC is turned off.0: Cleared to 0.1: Preserved.


- 371 -

4.32 MACRO EXECUTOR PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 8500 ANDLATER)

A detailed description of parameters between 8500 and 8599 isomitted.See FANUC Series 15i/150i-MODEL A Programming Manual(Macro Compiler/Macro Executor (B-63323EN-2) for details.

APPENDIX

B-63330EN/03 A.CHARACTER CODE LIST

- 375 -

A CHARACTER CODE LIST

Character Code Comment Character Code Comment

A 065 6 054

B 066 7 055

C 067 8 056

D 068 9 057

E 069 032 Space

F 070 ! 033 Exclamation mark

G 071 ” 034 Quotation marks

H 072 # 035 Sharp

I 073 $ 036 Dollar mark

J 074 % 037 Percent

K 075 & 038 Ampersand

L 076 ’ 039 Apostrophe

M 077 ( 040 Left parenthesis

N 078 ) 041 Right parenthesis

O 079 * 042 Asterisk

P 080 + 043 Positive sign

Q 081 , 044 Comma

R 082 - 045 Negative sign

S 083 . 046 Period

T 084 / 047 Slash

U 085 : 058 Colon

V 086 ; 059 Semicolon

W 087 < 060 Left angle bracket

X 088 = 061 Equal sign

Y 089 > 062 Right angle bracket

Z 090 ? 063 Question mark

0 048 @ 064 Commercial at mark

1 049 [ 091 Left square bracket

2 050 094

3 051 ¥ 092 Yen mark

4 052 ] 093 Right square bracket

5 053 _ 095 Underline

B.LIST OF COMPATIBLE PARAMETERS FOR Series 15-MB B-63330EN/03

- 376 -

B LIST OF COMPATIBLE PARAMETERSFOR Series 15-MB

Following parameters are compatible completely with the parameterof Series 15-MB

Parameters (Data No.0000 to 0999)0 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 21

22 23 31 32 40 42 43 44 45 46

47 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108

109


1020 1021 1022 1023 1030 1031 1032 1033 1049 1056

1070 1191 1196 1200 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1409

1412 1413 1414 1417 1450 1496 1517 1518 1519 1520

1522 1529 1540 1542 1549 1560 1562 1569 1600 1601

1604 1620 1622 1624 1626 1628 1635 1636 1644 1645

1656 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1710 1711

1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721

1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731

1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1752 1753 1754

1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764

1765 1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774

1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784

1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 1790 1791 1792 1793 1794

1795 1796 1797 1798 1799 1800 1802 1803 1804 1810

1815 1816 1817 1820 1821 1822 1825 1827 1828 1829

1830 1832 1837 1841 1842 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853

1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863

1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 1871 1873 1874

1875 1876 1877 1878 1879 1881 1883 1891 1892 1893

1894 1895 1896 1910 1912 1913 1914 1915 1917 1918

1951 1952 1953 1955 1957 1958 1959 1961 1962 1963

1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 1969 1970 1971 1972 1973

1974 1975 1976 1977 1978 1979 1980 1981 1982 1983

1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993

1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999

B-63330EN/03 B.LIST OF COMPATIBLE PARAMETERS FOR Series 15-MB

- 377 -


2015 2016 2020 2021 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2049

2200 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 2209

2210 2211 2214 2217 2231 2232 2233 2234 2274 2275

2276 2277 2278 2311 2312 2313 2314 2315 2316 2317

2318 2321 2322 2323 2324 2325 2326 2327 2328 2331

2332 2333 2334 2335 2336 2337 2338 2341 2342 2343

2344 2345 2346 2347 2348 2351 2352 2353 2354 2355

2356 2357 2358 2361 2362 2363 2364 2365 2366 2367

2368 2371 2372 2373 2374 2375 2376 2377 2378 2381

2382 2383 2384 2385 2386 2387 2388 2400 2401 2402

2403 2404 2405 2407 2411 2412 2413 2414 2415 2416

2417 2418 2426 2428 2429 2431


3028 3029 3030 3031 3032 3033 3034 3035 3036 3037

3038 3039 3040 3041 3042 3043 3044 3045 3046 3047

3048 3049 3050 3051 3052 3053 3054 3055 3056 3057

3058 3059 3060 3061 3062 3063 3064 3065 3066 3067

3068 3069 3070 3071 3072 3073 3074 3075 3076 3077

3078 3079 3080 3081 3082 3083 3084 3085 3086 3087

3088 3089 3090 3091 3092 3093 3094 3095 3096 3097

3098 3099 3100 3101 3102 3103 3104 3105 3106 3107

3108 3109 3110 3111 3112 3113 3114 3115 3116 3117

3118 3119 3120 3121 3122 3123 3124 3125 3126 3127

3128 3129 3130 3131 3132 3133 3134 3135 3136 3137

3138 3139 3140 3141 3142 3143 3144 3145 3146 3147

3148 3149 3150 3151 3152 3153 3154 3155 3156 3157

3158 3159 3160 3161 3162 3163 3164 3165 3166 3167

3168 3169 3170 3171 3172 3173 3174 3175 3196 3197

3198 3199 3200 3201 3202 3203 3204 3205 3206 3207

3208 3209 3210 3211 3212 3213 3214 3215 3216 3217

3218 3219 3220 3221 3222 3223 3224 3225 3226 3227

3228 3229 3230 3231 3232 3233 3234 3235 3236 3237

3238 3239 3240 3241 3242 3243 3244 3245 3246 3247

3248 3249 3250 3251 3252 3253 3254 3255 3256 3257

3258 3259 3260 3261 3262 3263 3264 3265 3266 3267

3268 3269 3270 3271 3272 3273 3274 3275 3276 3277

3278 3279 3280 3281 3282 3283 3284 3285 3286 3287

3288 3289 3290 3291 3292 3293 3294 3295 3296 3297

3298 3299 3300 3301 3302 3303 3304 3305 3306 3307

3308 3309 3310 3311 3312 3313 3314 3315 3316 3317

B.LIST OF COMPATIBLE PARAMETERS FOR Series 15-MB B-63330EN/03

- 378 -

3318 3319 3320 3321 3322 3323 3324 3325 3326 3327

3328 3329 3330 3331 3332 3333 3334 3335 3336 3337

3338 3339 3340 3341 3342 3343 3344 3345 3346 3347

3348 3349 3350 3351 3354 3355 3356 3357 3358 3359

3360 3361 3362 3363 3364 3365 3366 3367 3368 3369

3370 3371 3372 3375 3376 3377 3378 3379 3380 3381

3382 3383 3384 3385 3386 3387 3388 3389 3390 3391

3392 3393


4621 4622 4623 4624 4821 4822 4824 4831 4832 4833

4834 4835


5033 5034 5035 5036 5037 5070 5071 5072 5073 5074

5081 5082 5083 5084 5110 5111 5112 5120 5121 5122

5130 5131 5132 5140 5141 5142 5150 5151 5152 5160

5161 5162 5200 5210 5226 5227 5270 5271 5272 5273

5274 5275 5276 5277 5278 5279 5420 5421 5422 5423

5426 5427 5428 5430 5431 5433 5440 5441 5442 5443

5444 5445 5446 5447 5448 5449 5450 5451 5461 5462

5463 5464 5471 5472 5473 5474 5481 5482 5483 5484

5485 5491 5492 5493 5494 5495 5501 5502 5503 5504

5511 5512 5513 5514 5521 5522 5523 5524 5551 5552

5553 5554 5561 5562 5563 5564 5571 5572 5573 5574

5580 5581 5582 5583 5584 5585 5591 5592 5593 5594

5595 5602 5603 5605 5606 5607 5608 5609 5611 5612

5613 5614 5621 5622 5623 5624 5625 5626 5627 5628

5680 5681 5701 5702 5721 5722 5751 5757 5804 5810

5811 5820 5821 5994 5995 5996 5997


6060 6061 6062 6063 6064 6065 6066 6067 6068 6069

6070 6071 6072 6073 6074 6075 6076 6080 6081 6082

6083 6085 6086 6087 6088 6109 6110 6111 6122 6124

6126 6128 6129 6200 6201 6240 6400 6410 6411 6421

6610 6612 6630

B-63330EN/03 B.LIST OF COMPATIBLE PARAMETERS FOR Series 15-MB

- 379 -


7017 7033 7034 7045 7050 7051 7052 7053 7054 7055

7056 7057 7058 7059 7060 7061 7062 7063 7064 7065

7066 7067 7068 7069 7071 7072 7073 7074 7075 7076

7077 7078 7079 7080 7081 7082 7083 7084 7085 7086

7087 7088 7089 7110 7130 7200 7203 7220 7300 7400

7401 7442 7540 7543 7550 7551 7552 7553 7554 7555

7556 7558 7565 7591 7592 7593 7602 7605 7609 7610

7611 7612 7613 7614 7616 7617 7618 7620 7631 7632

7634 7635 7636 7637 7681 7702 7703 7710 7711 7712

7765 7767 7768


8510 8511 8512 8513 8514 8515 8516 8517 8518 8519

8520 8521 8522 8523 8524 8525 8526 8527 8528 8529

8530 8531 8532 8533 8538 8539 8540 8544 8545 8546

8547 8548 8549 8550 8551 8552 8555 8556 8557 8558

8570 8571 8572 8573 8600 8601 8602 8603

B-63330EN/03 INDEX

i - 1

INDEX

<A>ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL

PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1600 AND LATER)............ 99

AXIS CONTROL PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1000

AND LATER) .................................................................... 43

<C>CANNED CYCLE PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 6200

AND LATER) .................................................................... 293

CHARACTER CODE LIST ............................................... 375

CHOPPING PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1181 AND

LATER).............................................................................. 66

COORDINATE SYSTEM PARAMETERS (DATA NO.

1200 AND LATER) ........................................................... 69

CUSTOM MACRO PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 7000

AND LATER) .................................................................... 303

<D>DATA I/O PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 5000 AND

LATER).............................................................................. 195

DATA TYPES.................................................................... 27

DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS ................................. 27

DI/DO PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 2000 AND LATER) 137

DISPLAY/MDI AND EDIT PARAMETERS (DATA NO.

2200 AND LATER) ........................................................... 151

DISPLAYING PARAMETERS ......................................... 2

DISPLAYING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR

COMPENSATION DATA ................................................. 1

DISPLAYING PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION

DATA................................................................................. 5

DRAWING PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 4820 AND

LATER).............................................................................. 192

<F>FEEDRATE PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1400 AND

LATER).............................................................................. 74

FIVE-AXIS CONTROL FUNCTION PARAMETERS

(DATA NO. 7514 AND LATER)....................................... 332

<A>Input/Output Format for Pitch Error Compensation Data .. 26

INPUT/OUTPUT FORMATS............................................ 20

Input/Output Formats for Parameters ................................. 20

INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS ON

THE FLOPPY DIRECTORY SCREEN............................. 16


THE MEMORY CARD SCREEN ..................................... 18


THE PARAMETER SCREEN ........................................... 13

INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS

USING EXTERNAL INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES ........... 12

<L>LIST OF COMPATIBLE PARAMETERS FOR SERIES

15-MB ................................................................................ 376

<M>MACRO EXECUTOR PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 8500

AND LATER)..................................................................... 371

<O>OTHER PARAMETERS.................................................... 341

<P>PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION PARAMETERS

(DATA NO. 5420 AND LATER)....................................... 211

PROGRAM PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 2400 AND

LATER) .............................................................................. 169

PROGRAM RESTART, BLOCK RESTART, AND TOOL

RETRACTION AND RETURN PARAMETERS (DATA

NO. 7110 AND LATER).................................................... 317

<R>REPRESENTATION OF PARAMETERS ........................ 28

SCALING AND COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION

PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 6400 AND LATER)............ 298

<S>SERVICE PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 8000 AND

LATER) .............................................................................. 370

SERVO PARAMETER (DATA NO. 1700 TO 1999 AND

2600 AND LATER)............................................................ 111

SETTING PARAMETERS................................................. 8

SETTING PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 0000 AND

LATER) .............................................................................. 31

SETTING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR

COMPENSATION DATA ................................................. 7

SETTING PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA ..... 10

INDEX B-63330EN/03

i - 2

SKIP FUNCTION PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 7200

AND LATER) .................................................................... 318

SPINDLE CONTROL PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 5602

AND LATER) .................................................................... 226

SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT AND CS CONTOUR

CONTROL FUNCTION PARAMETERS (DATA NO.

3000 AND LATER) ........................................................... 180

SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT AND CS CONTOUR

CONTROL FUNCTION PARAMETERS (DATA NO.

3000 AND LATER) ........................................................... 181

STANDARD PARAMETER SETTING TABLES............. 29

STROKE LIMIT PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 5200 AND

LATER).............................................................................. 203

<A>TIMER PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 0100 AND

LATER).............................................................................. 40

TOOL COMPENSATION PARAMETERS (DATA NO.

6000 AND LATER) ........................................................... 267

TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT PARAMETERS (DATA

NO. 7400 AND LATER).................................................... 327

Rev

isio

n R

ecor

d

FA

NU

C S

erie

s 15

i/150

i-M

OD

EL

A P

AR

AM

ET

ER

MA

NU

AL

(B-6

3330

EN

)

03O

ct.,

2000

Par

amet

ers

for

follo

win

g fu

nctio

ns (

ST

EP

4 to

6)

wer

e ad

ded.

Pun

ch o

f CR

,LF

for

EO

B, F

eedr

ate

Spe

cific

atio

n on

a V

irtua

l Circ

le fo

ra

Rot

ary

Axi

s, C

uttin

g/R

apid

Tra

vers

e In

-pos

ition

Che

ck, C

hang

ing

Act

ive

Offs

et V

alue

with

Man

ual M

ove,

Sm

ooth

Bac

klas

hC

ompe

nsat

ion,

Fin

e T

orqu

e S

ensi

ng, N

ano

Inte

rpol

atio

n T

ype

Err

orC

ompe

nsat

ion,

Rig

id ta

ppin

g ad

ditio

nal f

unct

ion,

Oili

ng S

igna

l (C

anne

dC

ycle

), A

dditi

onal

sys

tem

var

iabl

e, A

dditi

onal

func

tion

for

Syn

chro

niza

tion

erro

r ch

eck,

NU

RB

S In

terp

olat

ion

Add

ition

al F

unct

ion,

Aut

omat

ic fe

edra

te c

ontr

ol b

y ar

ea, O

verr

ide

for

dece

lera

tion

func

tions

,A

ccel

erat

ion/

dece

lera

tion

befo

re in

terp

olat

ion

of li

near

type

rap

id,

Dec

eler

atio

n st

op a

t pow

er fa

ilure

, Tur

ning

mod

e an

d co

mpe

nsat

ion

clam

p du

al p

ositi

on fe

edba

ck, D

o si

gnal

out

put b

y so

ftkey

, MD

Iop

erat

ion,

Enh

ance

men

t of w

avef

orm

dia

gnos

is fu

nctio

n,E

nhan

cem

ent o

f dis

tanc

e co

ded

linea

r sc

ale,

Spe

cific

atio

n of

dia

met

eren

try

for

tool

com

pens

atio

n va

lue,

Thr

ee-d

imen

sion

al to

olco

mpe

nsat

ion,

Grin

ding

whe

el w

ear

com

pens

atio

n, C

ontr

ol p

oint

com

pens

atio

n of

tool

leng

th c

ompe

nsat

ion

alon

g to

ol a

xis,

Loa

ding

of

Mul

tiple

SE

RV

O P

rogr

ams,

Set

up o

f FS

SB

s If

usin

g H

igh

Spe

ed H

RV

Con

trol

, H

igh

Spe

ed H

RV

Mod

e, 2

-LC

D-U

NIT

Con

nect

ion

Fun

ctio

n,T

herm

al G

row

th C

ompe

nsat

ion

alon

g T

ool V

ecto

r, T

hree

-dim

ensi

onal

Cut

ter

Com

pens

atio

n at

Too

l Cen

ter

Poi

nt, C

utte

r C

ompe

nsat

ion

for

Rot

ary

Tab

le

02Ja

n., 2

000

Par

amet

ers

for f

ollo

win

g fu

nctio

ns (

ST

EP

2 a

nd 3

) wer

e ad

ded.

Pow

er M

ate

CN

C m

anag

er, 3

-dim

ensi

onal

circ

ular

inte

rpol

atio

n, S

pind

le s

peed

fluc

tuat

ion

dete

ctio

n, S

ubsc

reen

, Hel

p fu

nctio

n, S

cree

n ha

rd c

opy,

DN

C O

pera

tion

from

Mem

ory

card

inte

rfac

e, a

nd T

ool l

engt

hco

mpe

nsat

ion

in to

ol a

xis

dire

ctio

n w

ith T

win

Tab

le c

ontr

ol

01F

eb.,

1999

Edi

tion

Dat

eC

onte

nts

Edi

tion

Dat

eC

onte

nts

· No part of this manual may bereproduced in any form.

· All specifications and designsare subject to change withoutnotice.

Date post:	11-May-2020
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	7 times
Download:	0 times

GE Fanuc AutomationGE Fanuc Automation Computer Numerical Control Products Series 15i / 150i―Model...

Documents